Home

User Manual

1. entry Time Scale wet 1003 Oms 1000ms 1000ms 2000ms 1000ns 2000ns i Online Offline s Setting Scale Monitor guPro lt gt gt lt Ready NUM 1 Sampling at regular time intervals 1 Register the bit word device to be monitored by the time chart monitor function of FPWIN GR 2 Specify the sampling configurations Set the mode of the sampling configurations to TRACE Set the sampling rate time Sampling Configurations Cancel Sampling Times 1000 100 1000 Sampling Rate Every SMPL instruction 00 msec 10 30000 Delay Times 00 Times 1 999 10 4 3 Start monitoring Start with the button 2 Sampling by instruction 1 Register the bit word device to be monitored by the time chart monitor function of FPWIN GR 2 Specify the sampling configurations Set the mode of the sampling configurations to TRACE Set the sampling rate time to 0 Sampling Configurations Mode TRACE Sampling Times 1000 Times 100 1000 Sx B Cancel Help Delay Times 100 Times 1 999 3 Read data by trigger 1 Stop sampling by stopping monitoring the trace that has been started in the above procedure 1 or 2 on the time chart display of FPWIN GR The data will be indicated in the time chart Stop monitoring Stop wi
2. 12 10 12 5 3 Precautions When Using a Control Instruction 12 11 12 5 Preca tions Tor P regramimniligssuecu 12 12 12 7 Rewrite Function During 12 13 12 7 1 Operation of Rewrite During 12 13 12 7 2 Cases Where Rewriting During Run is Not Possible 12 14 12 7 3 Procedures and Operation of Rewrite During RUN 12 16 12 8 Processing During Forced Input and Output 12 18 12 8 1 Processing When Forced Input Output is Initiated During RUN 12 18 19 1 13 2 12 11 General Specifications ooo oi gh 13 2 19 1 2 Control coetu ede eet ea 13 4 13 1 3 Communication 13 6 19 2 aee roce tuo 13 7 13 2 1 Numbers for FPOR Control 4 4888211 13 7 13 2 2 I O Numbers for FPO Expansion 13 8 13 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constant 13 9 13 4 Power Supply Unit and Link Uni
3. 32 bit data DCMP 51 52 51 gt 52 1 52 gt 900 on 51 1 51 52 1 52 gt on 414444444 51 1 51 lt 52 1 52 gt 900 on 16 bit data band WIN 51 52 51 gt 53 gt 900 on PWIN 53 52 lt or S1 lt or S3 R9YOOB on 7 Q a ao a aj aj g 51 lt 52 gt 900 on Available gt lt Not available Not available partially mS SO 15 50 lean rand DWIN 2 S2 PDWIN F64 Block data BCMP 2 52 64 32 bit data band compare 51 1 51 gt 53 1 S3 R900A on 8241 52 lt 0 51 1 51 lt 53 1 S3 R9OOB on 51 1 S1 lt S2 1 52 gt 900 on Compares the two blocks beginning with 52 and 53 to see if they are equal FPX FP2SH FP10SH Logic operation instructions pwa AND PWAN pog Pwo P66 PWOR F67 te bit data XOR 1 S2 D P67 exclusive PXOR 1 S2 D OR WUNI 51 S2 PWUNI S3 D F68 16 bit data Data conversion instructions F69 P69 AND 62 gt 62 gt S1 AND S2 S1 AND 52 S1 AND S2 OR S1 AND 62 gt S1 AND S3 OR S2 AND S3 D When S3 is S2 D When S3 is HFFFF 1 D Q m P68 exclusive NOR 16 bit data unite F70 Block check BCC S1 S2 P70 code
4. 14 8 14 2 6 AFB85813 9 pin male 25 pin 14 9 14 2 7 AFB85843 Straight cable for connecting a modem 9 pin male 25 pin dui c 14 9 14 2 8 AFC85305 AFC8531 AFC8532 For extending for the tool port 14 9 14 2 9 RIPSIGOZN 41892932 14 10 14 2 10 AFP15205 AFP1523 End of life EOL product 14 10 14 2 11 AFP5520 AFP5523 End of life EOL product 14 10 14 2 12 AFP8550 End of life EOL product 14 11 PPOMOUN 15 1 15 1 System Registers Special Internal Relays Special Data Registers 15 3 15 1 1 Table of System Registers for 15 5 15 1 2 Table of Special Internal Relays for 15 11 15 1 3 Table of Special Data Registers for 15 21 15 2 Table of Basic Instructions oo ten eee e eere n e Redon etas 15 40 15 3 Table of High level 15 48 154 Table of EM Or COGdOS ven be be EE 15 68 15 5 MEWTOCOL COM Communication Commands 15 81 15 6 Hexadecimal Biriary BGOD ui D 15
5. F145 SEND Force Multiple Coils Write Multiple Ys and Rs F145 SEND Preset Multiple Registers Write DT Multiple Words Cannot be issued Mask Write 4X Register Write DT Mask Cannot be issued Read Write 4X Registers Read Write DT Table for MODBUS reference No and FPOR device No MODBUS reference No E FPOR device No hexadecimal 000001 001760 0000 06DF 0 109 002049 006144 0800 17 RO R255F 100001 101760 0000 06DF X0 X109F Holding register 7 55 7 7 2 Setting Communication Parameters Settings for baud rate and communication format The settings for baud rate and communication format of the COM RS232C port are entered using a programming tool Setting with FPWIN GR Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Click the COM Port tab Dialog box of PLC system register setting PLC Configuration Untitle1 X Hold Non hold Action on Error No 413 Communication Format Time Mo 410 Unit No Link WO 0 412 Comm Mode Char Bit 8 Link WO 1 2e odd Controller input settings HSC Parity 099 Controller output settings PLS Modem Enabled a Stop Bit 1 Interrupt pulse catch settings Interrupt edge settings Terminator c Time constant setting of CPU input Tool Port Header 5 not exis Y Mo 415 Baudrate 115200 bps Notie Starting address for
6. Operation Mode Protect Unprotect 8 digits password Enter in alphanumeric m Setting for FP memory loader option Allow the download in case of same password Set that PLC cannot be uploaded A is not protected state the dialog box is shown select as below Digit number Select 4 digits or 8 digits Operation Mode Select Protect 4 digits or 8 digits password Input a password to be set Click Settings Input the password for confirmation again and click OK The setting has completed As the dialog box is shown select as below Digit number Select 4 digits or 8 digits Operation Mode Select Access 4 digits or 8 digits password Input a password to be set Click Settings The setting has completed If the power supply of the PLC is turned on off with the setting that the access is allowed the setting will be that the PLC is protected again How to cancel the password setting Following two methods are available to cancel the password setting Description Program Unprotect Cancels the registered password to be specified All programs are retained All programs are deleted The upload protection setting is also deleted Erases all programs and security information to Force cancel cancel the settin
7. NANA 15 57 i Nul Turns output Yn off when the elapsed value of the high speed counter or pulse output reaches the target value of S 1 S Positioning pulses are output from the specified channel in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S Pulse strings are output from the specified output in accordance 2 O with the contents of the data table that starts with S Ea Ni PWM output is output from the specified output in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S F174 F175 F176 F177 F178 15 58 Pulse output Selectable data table control Pulse output Linear interpolation Pulse output Circular interpolation Pulse output Home return Input pulse measurement No of pulses cycle for input pulses Boo lean Operand S n 51 S2 D m WN vete Outputs the pulses from the specified channel according to the data table specified by S Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the designated data table so that the path to the target position forms a straight line Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the designated data table so that the path to the target position forms an arc Performs the home return according to the specified data table Measures the number of pu
8. 5 3 1 8 4 6 9 Unit mm 14 7 14 2 3 AFC8513 98 Mini DINS pin Male D SUBS pin Male 3000 12 4 95 E ooooooo oooogoo es 1d O Lim 8521 1000120 D SUBS9 Male D SUB9 pin Female o c Er a ie us a ao o D RD 50 5G DR RS Cs Unit mm 14 8 14 2 6 85813 9 pin male 25 male e PCside Pin Signal 2 a 2 w ch en 2 ee fl 3000 100 Unit mm 14 2 7 AFB85843 Straight cable for connecting a modem 9 pin male 25 male D SUBS9 pin Male D SUB25pin Male i Modem side E M2 6 screw 3000 100 E 4 M2 6 screw 14 2 8 AFC85305 AFC8531 AFC8532 For extending for the tool port 66600 1 552922 8 ARAA AA NANNA T Unit mm o Lim AFC85305 AFC8531 AFC8532 2000 10 D 1 Unit mm 14 9 14 2 9 AIP81862N 85232 port Dimensions Unit mm Wiring diagram PLC side RS232C device side D SUB9 pin Male D SUBS pin Male Cover JAE DE C8 J9 F 1 1 Connector JAE DE 9PF
9. 9 9 94 1 Seting With FEWIN pee tad Ge 9 10 9 5 Table of Security 9 1 1 10 Other 10 T P9 PICWT TIRSUUCLUIOFI 10 2 10 2 5 10 3 10 5 IU MT mmm 10 3 10 2 2 Details of Sampling Trace Function 10 3 10 2 3 How to Use Sampling 10 4 10 3 Time Constant Processing 10 6 11 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 11 1 TA d oelt Diagnostic TU elloni sema Sent tenor es eta teed us te 11 2 11 1 1 LED Display for Status 11 2 11 1 2 Operation Mode When an Error Occurs 11 2 2 Troubleshooting Roa i nisu todo 11 3 11 2 1 f ERROR ALARM LED is FIASIIING sitet Co etos 11 3 2I ERROR LEHIS ON orsina ETE 11 5 FEZ SALLE LEDS are rerin aaa 11 5 11 2 4 Diagnosing Output 11 6 11 2 5 A Protect Error Message Appears 11 7
10. O x x x xX x x registration FP e screen 5 Specify the screen to be displayed display on the FP e 3 0 x xx x switching Basic function instruction Time FILTR 1 52 Executes the filter processing for constant 3 D the specified input x x processing F183 Auxiliary DSTM Turn on the specified output and timer 32 bit R900D after 0 01 x set value Data transfer instructions F190 Three 16 bit 1 S2 S1 D D 1 P120 Pu ae Bee ee Three 32 bit DMV3 51 52 SM 1 gt 0 1 D S241 data move PDMV3 S3 D 2 5 Do S341 x x 3 gt 0 5 0 4 Logic operation instructions 32 bit data DAND z S2 o S1 AND 52 1 AND PDAND D 1 bit data TIER 1 OR 52 1 S2 gt D 1 D F217 22 bit data DXOR ST S2 P217 XOR PDXOR 61 1 S1 AND S241 S2 OR 61 1 51 AND S2 1 52 0 1 D F218 32 bit data DXNR 2 S2 61 1 S1 52 1 S2 OR P218 XNR PDXNR 2 51 AND S2 1 D 1 D Double word 1 S2 51 2 S341 S3 32 bit data S3 D 2 52 AND e unites D 1 D Data conversion instructions Time data gt TMSEC S D The specified time data a date second PTMSEC and time is changed to the second conversion data Second SECTM S D The specified second data is data time PSECTM changed into time data a date and conversion time Available Not available Not available partially
11. General purpose communications Selection of modem Disabled Enabled Disabled Enter the settings for the various items Data lenght bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity check none with odd with even Data eng Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Communication Parit ceder s The following setting is valid only when format setting 7 the communication mode specified by Tool Stop bit 1 bit system register 412 has been set to port General purpose serial communication SI Terminator CR CR LF None ETX ting Header STX not exist STX exist Communication 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps co speed Baud rate 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps setting 115200 bps Starting address for received buffer of general serial data communication mode Buffer capacity setting for data received of general 2048 0 to 2048 serial data Aae mode 410 Unit No setting 1 109 Computer link Communication General purpose serial communication 412 mode setting Computer link link MODBUS RTU een Enter the settings for the various items Data lenght bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity check none with odd with even Data enght Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Pity Shake I The following setting is valid only when COM Odd the communication mode specified by port Stop bit 1 bit system register 412 has been set to Sab General purpose serial communication ting Terminator CR CR LF None ETX Communication speed Baud rate
12. ui D 15 82 ER 15 83 15 1 System Registers Special Internal Relays Special Data Registers Precation for System Registers What is the system register area e System registers are used to set values parameters which determine operation ranges and functions used Set values based on the use and specifications of your program e There is no need to set system registers for functions which will not be used Type of system registers The registers to be used depend on each PLC 1 Allocation of user memory System registers 0 1 and 2 These registers set the size of the program area and file register area allowing the user memory area to be configured for the environment used The size of the memory area will vary depending on the type 2 Allocation of timers and counters System register 5 The number of timers and counters is set by specifying the starting counter number 3 Hold non hold type setting System registers 6 to 18 When these registers are set to hold type the values in the relays and data memory will be retained even if the system is switched to PROG mode or the power is turned off If set to non hold type the values will be cleared to 0 4 Operation mode setting on error System registers 4 20 to 28 Set the operation mode when errors such as battery error duplicated use of output I O verification error and operation error occur 5
13. A 7 Ecodata BCD data Topo foren Data which can be processed in the PLC BIN data Converted to 1992 in decimal data Output to a 7 segment display with decoder Use the BIN to BCD conversion instruction F80 BIM Conversion using F80 BCD instruction 7 display Data processed in PLC BIN data Data output from PLC BCD data 12 4 12 3 Handling Index Registers 12 3 1 Index Registers Like other registers index registers 14 points 10 to ID for reading and writing 16 bit data Use an index register to indirectly specify a memory area number This is called index modification lt Example gt Transferring the contents of data register DT100 to the number specified by the contents of an index register RO Lt FO MV DT 100 1 Base memory area In this example the number of the destination data register varies depending on the contents of IO with acting as a base For example when 10 contains K10 the destination will be DT10 and when 10 is K20 the destination will be DT20 In this way index registers allow the specification of multiple memory areas with a single instruction and thus index registers are very convenient when handling large amounts of data 12 3 2 Memory Areas Which can be Modified with Index Registers Index registers can be used to modify other types of memory areas in addition to data registers
14. EE Retrieving 51 These instructions retrieve character string 52 character string consisting of a from a character 53 D specified number of characters from 10 string the specified position in the character string F264 Writing a MIDW 51 These instructions write a specified P264 character string S2 D number of characters from a 12 to character n character string to a specified string Replacing character strings position in the character string S D A specified number of characters in p n a character string are rewritten starting from a specified position in the character string Available X Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP 32k type 2 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later 72 pe e 5 amp This instruction is available for FPX Ver 3 10 or later 15 61 FP2SH FP10SH Boolean Description Integer type data processing instructions F270 Maximum P270 value word data 16 bit 52 and stores it in the The xoa alaja address relative to S1 is stored in D 1 F271 Maximum Searches for the maximum value in P271 value double the double word data table between word data 32 the area selected with S1 and S2 bit and stores it
15. 5000 DT110 Frequency 3 5000 Hz according to the values of data tables and F1 DMV K 5000 DT112 Target value 3 5000 pulses Stops at the data table that the value of pulse F1 DMV 1000 DT114 Frequency 4 1000 Hz output stop KO is written F1 DMV K 2000 DT116 Target value 4 2000 pulses T F1 DMV K 0 DT118 Stop of pulse output When this program 1 executed the H DF F174 SPOH DT100 KO Start of pulse output positioning table and the pulse output diagram will be as shown below Positioning data table DT100 Control code 1 Arbitrary table control Incremental CW CCW Assignment of pulse output stop 74 71 Control code H constant H Note If the target value is set to a value larger than 50kHz it will be corrected to 50kHz 10 Fixed Note the following characteristics according to the specified initial speed 1 When the initial speed is 1 or higher and lower than 46Hz the control up to the maximum frequency to the degree of 10kHz can be performed If the frequency n is set to a value below 6Hz it will be corrected to 6Hz 2 When the initial speed is 46 or higher and lower than 184Hz the control up to 50kHz can be performed If the frequency n is set to a value below 46Hz it will be m Control assignment 0 Arbitrary table control 000 Fixed m Operation mode assignment 0 Incremental 1 Absolute m Output type assignment corrected
16. DT90401 e Use only this F1 DMV instruction to set the elapsed value Example 1 Writing the elapsed value XT Set the initial value of K3000 for the pulse DF F1 DMV K3000 DT90400 output CHO Reading the elapsed value X8 Reads the elapsed value of the pulse output DF F1 DMV 0790400 DT100 CHO to DT100 and DT101 8 24 Wiring example FPOR Input terminal Home sensor Near home sensor Positioning start Positioning start Home return start JOG start JOG start Overrun bcon acontact b contact tact tact Stepping motor side side n Moving table Stepping motor driver Output terminal Common E CW input Common CCW input Pulse output CW Pulse output CCW RiR2 RIR Note Note When the stepping motor input is a 5 V optical coupler type connect a resister of 2 1 2 W to R1 and connect a resistor of 2 1 2 W 470 2 W to R2 Table of I O allocation X9 Positioning start signal 1 R10 Posiioniginprogress XA Home return start R11 Positonigoperationstatt XB JOG start signal R12 Posiionngdonepuse XC JOG start signal 7 R9110 Pulse output instruction flag for CHO 8 25 8 4 5 Positioning Control Instruction 171 Trapezoidal Control This instruction automatically performs trapezoidal control according to the specified data table
17. E16R QU 24V DC 8 at 26 4V DC Number of points per common which are simulta neous on 47 55 Ambient Temperature C 8 16 at 24V DC Number of at 26 4V DC points per i commion 5 Uic E ca hi p SiS M T HA which 4 aE simulta neous 34 43 55 Ambient Temperature C E16X E32T 16 Number of points per common which 2 simulta neous on at 24V DC 26 4V DC 26 34 55 Ambient Temperature C 3 4 2 Output specifications Relay type output specifications E8RS E8RM E8YRS E16RS E16RM Output type 1a relay output Rated control capacity 2 A 250 V AC 2 A 30 V DC Max 4 5 A or less common Note Output points per E8R 4 points common common E16R E8YR 8 points common OFF Approx 10 ms ON OFF Approx 8 ms ean Mechanical Min 20 000 000 operations Lifetime Electrical Min 100 000 operations Surge absorber Operating mode indicator LED display Note Resistance load Transistor type output specifications NPN output type EBYT E16YT E16T E32T PNP output type EBYP E16YP E16P E32P NEN PNP Max load current 0 1 A point Max 1 A per common common External power ly for drivi SUPPE n Current mA 1 point internal circuit OFF ON 1 ms or less ON OFF 1 ms or less Surge absorber Operating mode indicator LE
18. E16Y 5 Terminal type Part Names and Functions 1 Power supply connector Supply 24 V DC It is connected using the cable AFP0581 supplied with the unit 2 Input connector 3 Input indicator LED 4 Output connector 5 Output indicator LEDs 6 Expansion hook This hook is used to secure expansion units 7 Expansion connector This connector is used to connect an expansion unit and internal circuit 2 DIN hook This hook enables the unit to attach to a rail at a touch It is also used to install the unit on the slim type mounting plate AFP0803 3 3 3 3 Input and Output Specifications 1 Input specifications Item Specifications Insulation method Optical coupler Rated input voltage 24 V DC Approx 4 3 mA at 24 V DC Input impedance Approx 5 6 Operating voltage range 21 6 V DC to 26 4 V DC Input point per common E8X E16P E16 8 points common Either the positive or negative of E32T E16X 16 points common the inptu power supply can be dut dud E8R 4 points common connected to common terminal Min on voltage Min on current 19 2 V DC 3 mA Max off voltage Max off current 2 4 V DC 1 mA OFF gt Response time ON gt OFF Operating mode indicator LED display Limiations on number of simultaneous input on points Keep the number of input points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature
19. When the initial speed is 184 or higher the control up to 50kHz can be performed The speed error around 50kHz will be smallest Also the intial speed may be corrected due to the calculation result Note that the vector of the composite speed may be deviated at the time the pulse output starts or stops when the value has been corrected Compare with the correction speed of initial speed in the special registers from DT90400 to check whether or not the specified initial speed is corrected Explanation of pulse output operation Pulses are output using a duty of 25 fixedly When outputting with the PULSE SIGN method pulses will be output approx 300us later after the output of direction signal The characteristics of a motor driver is considered 8 41 Sample program for interpolation control Wiring diagram Input terminal Home sensor Near home sensor Home sensor side at Near home sensor Home return start Positioning start Emergency stop 5 6 Moving table side CH1 Output terminal Lm Motor driver 3 1 cew lt _ 1 s oe ommon Need cow 1 Motor driver T Ri R2 Ri m2 Note Note If the input of the stepping motor is 5V photocoupler type connect a resistor of 2k 1 2 W to R1 and connect a resistor of 2k 1 2 W 470 2 W to R2 8 42 Home return operation Minu
20. logarithm F321 Floating point type EXP 5 EXP S41 5 1 D P321 data exponent PEXP 7 GJ ojaa a E Floating point type LOG S D LOG S 1 S gt D 1 D acd 2 fle fefefe data power PPWR S2 D D i 1 m T erresa data square root PFSQR V S 1 S gt D 1 D FPO FPOR FPX FP X FP o EE Description aH 16 bit integer datato FLT S D Converts the 16 bit integer data floating point type PFLT with sign specified by S to real data conversion number data and the converted 1 data is stored in D 32 bit integer data to DFLT S D Converts the 32 bit integer data floating point type PDFLT with sign specified by S41 S to Oo data conversion real number data and the converted data is stored D 1 D F327 Floating point type INT Converts real number data P327 data to 16 bit integer PINT specified by S 1 S to the 16 con version the bit integer data with sign the largest inte ger largest integer not exceeding the ex ceeding the floating point data and the floating point type converted data is stored in D data F328 Floating point type DINT Converts real number data P328 data to 32 bit integer PDINT specified by S 1 S to the 32 con version the bit integer data with sign the largest inte ger not largest integer not exceeding the ex ceeding the floating point data and the
21. 4 Select Search for the best driver these locations and check Include this location in the search Then input the folder name below C Program Files Panasonic EW Control FPOR USB 2000_ XP Uncheck the other items Then click Next Found New Hardware Wizard Please choose your search and installation options cw Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed Search removable media floppy CD ROM Include this location in the search C Program Files Panasonic E W Control FPOR_USB v Browse Don t search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware 5 The installation of the USB driver starts Although an alart for the Windows logo testing is indicated during the installation click Continue Anyway to continue the installation Hardware Installation PN The software you are installing for this hardware Panasonic Electric Works PLC Virtual UART has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system
22. Acceleration time ome Soom Deceleration time Target value 100 000 pulses Trigger RO x DF F1 H10000000 F1 DMV K1000 DT2 Pulse output F1 DMV K7000 DT4 1 instruction flag F1 DMV K450 DT6 No of output pulses 1 i 1kHz ETE F1 DMV K300 DT8 F1 DMV KO DT10 R1 F171 SPDH KO RZ I DF F0 MV H120 0790052 FO MV H100 DT90052 8 28 8 4 6 JOG Positioning 0 F171 Instruction This instruction performs the deceleration stop outputting the specified number of pulses when the position control starting input is input externally or the position control start is requested internally during the pulse output It is possible to change the target speed while the operation is running F1 DMV H10100000 1 F1 DMV K1000 DT2 F1 DMV K7000 DT4 F1 DMV K300 DT6 F1 DMV K450 DTS F1 DMV K100000 DT10 R1 DF F171 SPDH m e 4 to c m n3 Position control start request Positioning data table DTO Control code 1 Pulses are output from YO at an initial speed of 1000 Hz a target speed of 7000 Hz an acceleration time of 300 ms a deceleration time of 450 ms and a movement amount of 100 000 pulses
23. IEF Note The PC link 1 can be used to connect with the second PC link WO of the 2 Multi Communication Unit MCU At that time the link relay number and link register number for the PC link can be the same values as the FP2 from WL64 from LD128 2 Reference For the information on FP2 MCU lt Chapter 5 Communication Function PC PLC Link in FP2 Multi Communication Unit Technical Manual ARCT1F396E gt 7 44 Partial use of link areas In the link areas available for PC PLC link link relays with a total of 1024 points 64 words and link registers with a total of 128 words can be used This does not mean however that it is necessary to reserve the entire area Parts of the area which have not been reserved can be used as internal relays and internal registers Link relay allocation Name Range of link relays used Starting No of word for link relay transmission Receive area Used Link relay transmission size With the above settings the 14 words 224 points consisting of WL50 to WL63 can be used as internal relays as 77 Starting No for link register transmission Link register transmission size Used With the above settings the 28 words consisting of LD100 to LD127 can be used as internal registers 7 45 Note Precautions When Allocating Link Areas If a mistake is made when allocating a link area be aware that an error will result and communication will be disal
24. MAS s s M eS hour data is stored the upper 8 bits of DT90053 and the minute data the lower 8 bits the BCD format This hour and minute data is compared with the appointed time BCD and the R900B flag special internal relay is used to detect whether or not it matches the appointed time 2 4 3 Built in Backup Battery Time the built in backup battery can be used Backup time The built in backup battery is not charged when the unit is shipped Charge the battery surfficiently before use Full charge Ambient temperature 25 C 72 hours It will be charged automatically if the DC power is supplied to the control unit Relation between charging time and backup time The number of days in the backup time varies according to the rate of charging time If it is charged on a full charge 72 hours at the ambient temperature of 25 C the bakup time will be approx 50 days 100 50 days at 25 Backup time Battery capacity recovery rate 0 8 16 24 48 72 Charging time h The backup time will vary according to the ambient temperature when the battery is charged Ambient temperature when charged Number of days in backup time 70 C Approx 14 days Approx 25 days Predicted life of built in backup battery The life of the built in backup battery varies according to the ambient temperature while the control unit is on energized Note The tempera
25. WING OF Input and 5 5 91 IDE VVIFIE GI scende es a 5 8 ODUCT VV INNO EU TIT 5 10 5 3 3 Precautions Regarding Input and Output Wirings 5 10 5 4 Wiring of MIL Connector 5 11 5 5 Wiring of Terminal Block 5 13 5 6 Wiring of Molex Connector 5 15 5 7 Wiring of COM Port RS232C 5 16 950 Safely MOSSIFOS 5 18 5 18 5 8 2 Momentary Power Failures nnne 5 18 5 8 3 Protection of Power Supply and Output Sections 5 18 6 Preparation of USB Port eee ee eee eee ee eee e eere ee eee eese eeeeessssssss 9 USB CONNECCION x cios caeca dec did un Utd 6 2 6 1 1 Installation of USB 6 3 0 1 2 Confirming COM etn ae 6 5 6 1 3 Communication with Programming 6 7 6 1 4 Restrictions on USB 6 8 COMMA CAL ON emt E 7 2 7 1 1 Communication Modes and Communication Ports 7
26. ae Note Chapter 6 Preparation for USB Port 7 2 3 COM Port RS232C Port It is a screw down connection type terminal block 3 pin Wire for use it UR MM SD Send Data Output R RD T Receive Data input 6 55 Signal ground Receive data Input send data Output ae Note For information on the wiring refer to 5 7 Wiring of COM Port RS232C Port 7 3 Communication Specifications Tool Port Description Communication method Half duplex communication Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system Data length 7 bits 8bits Parity None Even Odd Communication format Start code STX No STX End code CR CR LF None ETX Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Data transmission order Transmits from bit 0 character by character Computer link slave Communication mode Modem initialization General purpose communication only in RUN mode USB port eseription O Standard Baud rate USB2 0 Fullspeed Computer link slave COM port RS232C port Desepton O Data length 7 bits 8bits Parity None Even Odd Communication format Start code STX No STX End code CR CR LF None ETX Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Computer link master slave Modem initialization Communication mode General purpose communication MODBUS RTU master slave PC PLC link Factory default settings 27 Baudrae Datalength Party _ Stopbit Too
27. 1 This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later FP10SH cannot be used 2 This instruction is available for 32k type This instruction is available for C32T2 C28P2 C32T2H and C28P2H 4 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later 5 This instruction is available for FP Ver 3 10 or later 6 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 1 13 or later 7 This instruction is available for FP10SH Ver 3 10 or later Ss 5 15 60 g Q J lt rand 16 bit binary GRY S D Converts the 16 bit binary data of data gt Gray PGRY 5 to gray codes and the converted result is stored in the D S D Converts the 32 bit binary data of 5 1 S to gray code and the FPX ae e e e e e e x x e e o 9 m Tx ele 5 2 sans code conversion 32 bit binary data Gray PDGRY converted result is stored in the D 1 D S D Converts the gray codes of S to P237 binary data PGBIN binary data and the converted conversion result is stored in the D F238 32 bit gray code DGBIN S D Converts the gray codes of S 1 S P238 binary data PDGBIN to binary data and the converted code conversion F237 16 bit gray code GBIN conversion result is stored in the D 1 D F240 Bit line to bit COLM 5 The values of bits 0 to 15 of S are P240 column PCOLM D s
28. FPO D A conversion unit FPO AOAV FPO AO041 is converted and loaded with a user program that includes a switching flag to convert the data Regarding FPO CC Link slave unit please refer to the exclusive manual Output 16 points 4 4 Chapter 5 Installation and Wiring 5 1 Installation 5 1 1 Installation Environment and Space Operating environment Use the unit within the range of the general specifications when installing Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Ambient humidity 10 to 95 RH at 25 C non condensing For use in pollution Degree 2 environment Do not use the unit in the following environments Direct sunlight Sudden temperature changes causing condensation Inflammable or corrosive gas Excessive airborne dust metal particles or saline matter Benzine paint thinner alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda Direct vibration shock or direct drop of water Influence from power transmission ilnes high voltage equipment power cables power equipment radio transmitters or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges 100 mm or more Static electricity Do not touch connector pins directly to prevent static electricity from Causing damage Always rid yourself of any static electricity before handling this product Measures regarding heat discharge Always install the unit oriented with the tool port
29. If using a power supply without a protective circuit power should be supplied through a protective element such as fuse If an incorrect voltage is directly applied the internal circuit may be damaged or destroyed Be sure to supply power to a control and an expansion unit from a single power supply Turning on off of the power of all the units must be conducted simultaneously Power supply sequence Have the power supply sequence such that the power supply of the control unit turns off before the power supply for input and output If the input output power supply is turned off before the control unit or if the control unit is not shut off momentarily the controller detects change of input level and might conduct an unexpected operation Before turning on the power When turning on the power for the first time be sure to take the precautions given below When performing installation check to make sure that there are no scraps of wiring particularly conductive fragments adhering to the unit Verify that the power supply wiring I O wiring and power supply voltage are all correct Sufficiently tighten the installation screws and terminal screws Set the mode selector to PROG mode Before entering a program Be sure to perform a program clear operation before entering a program Refer to the respective tool software manuals for the details of the operation procedure Tool software FPWIN Pro FPWIN GR Request concerninng
30. N A K1 to K3000 0 5ms to 1 5s or 10ms to 30s Sampling by the SMPL instruction DT90028 Sample trace interval K1 to K3000 x 10 ms 10 ms to 30 s A DT90029 Notused The contents of the specified message Data Character storage by length are stored in these special data A N A F149 MSG instruction registers when F149 MSG instruction is executed DT90036 Notused J 1 1 1 1 NA NA Note Scan time display is only possible in RUN mode and shows the operation cycle time In PROG mode the scan time for the operation is not displayed The maximum and minimum values are cleared each time the mode is switched from RUN to PROG 15 23 FPOR A Available N A Not available Work1 for SRC The number of data that match the searched DT90037 data is stored here when F96 SRC A N A Instructions insturction is executed Work for SRC The position of the first matching data is DT90038 stored here when 96 SRC instruction is N A Instructions executed DT90039 Notused Z A NA DT90040 Not used 0790041 Notused J NANA 0790042 Notused J DT9003 Notused J J NA 0790044 Notused DT9005 Notusd J A NA 0790046 Notused J J DT9007 Notused J DT9008 Notused NA 07900
31. Not used N A N A 7901 Notused J 10 J NA NA 15 21 FPOR A Available N A Not available One shift out hexadecimal digit is stored in bit Operation auxiliary positions 0 to 3 when the data shift instruction DT90014 register for data shift F105 BSR or F106 BSL is executed The instruction value can be read and written by executing FO MV instruction The divided remainder 16 bit is stored in DT90015 DT90015 when the division instruction F32 or F52 B instruction is executed The divided remainder 32 bit is stored in DT90015 and DT90016 when the division instruction F33 D or F53 DB is DT90016 executed The value can be read and written by executing FO MV instruction Operation auxiliary register for division instruction After commencing operation the address Operation error where the first operation error occurred is address hold type stored Monitor the address using decimal display The address where an operation error Operation error occurred is stored Each time an error occurs address latest type the new address overwrites the previous address The data stored here is increased by one 2 5 ms ring counter every 2 5 ms HO to HFFFF Note1 Difference between the values of the two points absolute value x 2 5 ms Elapsed time between the two points The data stored here is increased by one every 10 67 us HO to HFFFF DT90020 1 counter Differenc
32. Reverse Control is carried out using one pulse output to specify the speed and Puse Purse vo FIFIFLFLFL another to specify the direction of rotation with on off signals In this a mode forward rotation is carried out Sign when the rotation direction signals is ON Incremental counting Decremental counting 8 20 Operation mode Incremental lt Relative value control gt Outputs the pulses set with the target value Selected Pulse and direction Pulse and direction CW CCW forward OFF forward ON HSE CoU Ind Method reverse ON reverse OFF Pulse output when Pulse output when 2 Pulse output Positive from CW direction output is direction output is OFF ON Pulse output when Pulse output when Pulse output 5 Negative direction output is direction output is Decremental from CCW ON OFF Example When the current position value of elapsed value area is 5000 the pulse of 1000 is output from CW by executing the pulse output instruction with the target value 1000 and the current position will be 6000 Absolute lt Absolute value control gt Outputs a number of pulses equal to the difference between the set target value and the current value Selected Pul nd direction Mode ulse and direc forward OFF reverse ON Cw CCW Target value greater than Pulse output when direction output is Pulse output current
33. kQ 01 24 wattage W of the resistor is _ Power supply voltage 3 to 5 times R W If the input of PLC does not turn off because of leakage current from the LED equipped limit switch the use of a bleeder resistor is recommended as shown on the left 5 9 5 3 2 Output Wiring Protective circuit for inductive loads With an inductive load a protective circuit should be installed in parallel with the load When switching DC inductive loads with relay output be sure to connect a diod across the ends of the load When using an AC inductive load Relay output type mmi m un R C Varistor Output Output Load terminal _ Load FPOR FPOR terminal COM Example of surge absorber Resistance R 50 Capacity C 0 47 uF When using an DC nductive load Output 4 FPOR terminal Diode Reverse voltage 3 times the load voltage Averag rectified torward current Load current or more Precautions when using capacitive loads When connecting loads with large in rush currents to minimize their effect connect a protection circuit as shown below Resistor Output terminal Load FPOR FPOR COM Out put Indu T terminal Load rail COM Use an external fuse as overload protection A fuse is not built in the output circuit It is recommended to instal
34. setting Starting address for received buffer of general serial data Communication format setting 9600 bps communication mode n Header STX not exist STX exist 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps 0 to 32764 Buffer capacity setting for data 417 received of general 2048 0 to 2048 serial data communication mode Note1 The communication format in a PLC link is fixed at the following settings Du length is 8 bits odd parity stop bit is 1 The communication speed baud rate is fixed at 115200 bps Note2 The general purpose communication with the tool port is available only in RUN mode In PROG mode the computer link mode must be used regardless of settings 15 9 ress value x Controller input time constant setting 1 X0 to X3 Controller input time constant setting 1 XA to X7 time Controller input time imie 2 mS cons 432 constant setting 2 4 ms tant X8 to XB 8 ms set C32 T32 F32 16 ms Controller input time constant setting 2 XC to XF C32 T32 F32 Note X6 and X7 is invalid for C10 15 10 15 1 2 Table of Special Internal Relays for The special internal relays turn on and off under special conditions The on and off states are not output externally Writing is not possible with a programming tool or an instruction WR900 FPOR Relay No Turns on when a self diagnostic erro
35. 0 CWICCW This is stored as 2 words in real numbers type 1 PLS SIGN Forward OFF Reverse 1 PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF X axis compo composite speed x X axis movement amount nentspeed X axis movement amount Y axis movement amount 2 Composite speed Initial speed target speed Hz lt K constant gt 6 Hz to 50 KHz K6 to K50000 Unit Hz sre spare eet ata Woes enw eta encod to nare me roo Se CE J X axis movement amount Y axis movement amount each axis become 6Hz or higher Also specify composite speed initial speed 30 kHz or less Y axis compo composite speed x Y axis movement amount Note Precaution for the specification of composite speed initial speed If each component speed initial speed of CHO and CH2 which is calculated using the following formula is not 6 0 Hz or higher the path may not be linear as the following formula is not set up 60 Component speed and correction Note the following characteristics according to the component speed initial speed calculated using the above formula 5 1 When the initial speed is 1 or higher and lower than 46Hz the control up to the maximum frequency to the degree of 10kHz can be performed If the frequency is higher than that the speed error will be larger 2 When the initial speed is 46 or higher and lower than 184Hz the control up to 50kHz can be performed
36. 130mAorless J FPO TC8 25 mA or less FPO RTD6 FPO IOL 30 mA or less 40 mA or less FPO CCLS 40 mA or less 40mAorless sion unit FPO intelligent unit 4 ble display SA AIGT0030 AIGT0230 GTO1R 5 VDC RS232C 13 3 13 1 2 Control Specifications Hem C10 C14 Ci C32 12 F32 Program memory Rewriting during Available Simultaneous rewriting capacity 512 steps RUN Download during Available All programs RUN Security function Password function 4 digit 8 digit Read protection setting Comment Memory capacity 328 kbytes All comments including comments annotations memory interlinear comments Download during Available All comments RUN Without expansion units 0 2 ms or less With expansion units 0 2 ms or less 1xthe number of expansion unit ms Basic instruction from 0 08 us Timer instruction 2 2 ys Operation High level instruction from 0 32us MV instruction speed Basic instruction from 0 58 us Timer instruction 3 66 us High level instruction from 1 62 MV instruction Approx 110 types Approx 210 types 1760 points X External output Y 1760 points Internal Relay R 4096 points T Special Internal Relay 224 points Link Relay L 2048 points R 1024 points Factory default Timer 1008 points TO to T1007 Bout 16 as
37. 2048 sera date communication mode Ns Cancel Read PLE Initialize Help 410 Unit number unit number be set within a range of 1 to 16 No 412 Communication Mode Select the communication mode for the RS232C port Click on Ivi and select PC Link u Key Point When using PC PLC link the communication format and baud rate are fixed Name Communication format Char bit 8 bits Parity Odd Stop bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist No 415 Baud rate setting for COM1 port 115200 bps 1 41 7 6 4 Link Area Allocation The link relays and link registers to be used in the PC PLC link are allocated in the link area of the CPU unit Link area allocations are specified by setting the system registers of the CPU unit System registers TU value Range of link relays used for PC PLC link 0 Oto64words Range of link data registers used for PC PLC link 0 0 128 42 Starting number for link relay transmission O 0063 43 Link relay transmission size 10 Oto64words 44 Starting number for link data register tranmission O 00702 45 Link data register transmission size Oto 127 words Reverse 2nd half Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET WO PC PLC link PC PLC link switch flag Normal Normal 1st half Reverse 2nd
38. 5 8 3 Protection of Power Supply and Output Sections Power supply An insulated power supply with an internal protective circuit should be used The power supply for the control unit operation is a non insulated circuit so if an incorrect voltage is directly applied the internal circuit may be damaged or destroyed If using a power supply without a protective circuit power should be supplied through a protective element such as fuse Protection of output If current exceeding the rated control capacity is being supplied in the form of a motor lock current or a coil shorting in an electromagnetic device a protective element such as a fuse should be attached externally 5 18 Chapter 6 Preparation of USB Port 6 1 USB Connection Connectingt the unit with a personal computer using the USB cable enables the communication with our software such a FPWIN GR Necessary items for the connection About PC The PC with the following OS is necessary to connect the FPOR with the USB Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista Note The FPOR cannot be connected with the USB cable when using Windows other than the above About programming tool FPWIN GR Ver 2 80 or later version FPWIN Pro Ver 6 10 or later version About USB cable A commercial cable is necessary USB 2 0 cable A miniB Max 5 m About USB HUB A USB HUB cannot be used for the connection 6 1 1 Installation of USB Driver USB driv
39. ANS 1 T TMX5 K304 YO 2 5 will activate if X1 becomes regardless of whether is off lt Example 3 gt PSHS x1 YO aa 2 H X3 DF E 61 D When X2 was on prior to XO 1 will not be on even if XO becomes on When a combination of contacts are set as the trigger execution condition of a differential instruction DF or timer instruction do not use an AND stack ANS instruction read stack RDS instruction or pop stack POPS instruction Examples in which the above programs are rewritten correctly Program in which the example 1 is rewritten YO x1 H oF 0 2 lt Program which the example 2 is rewritten gt X0 X1 5 30 YO X0 X2 17 lt Program which the example 3 is rewritten gt xO X1 YO AQ A2 Yi Ho xO X3 12 12 12 7 Rewrite Function During RUN 12 7 1 Operation of Rewrite During RUN How operation of rewrite during RUN is performed Rewriting programs can be executed even in RUN mode When a rewrite is attempted during RUN the tool service time is temporarily extended program rewriting is performed and operation is resumed without the need to change the mode For this reason the tiem of the scan during the RUN rewrite extends from several ms to several hundreds of ms Operation during rewrite 1 External output Y is held 2 External input X is ignored 3 The timer T sto
40. D 1 D 0 1 0 1 0 1 D 0 1 D 15 D 1 D S141 S1 X S24 1 52 gt 3 0 2 0 1 51 S2 D 51 1 51 62 1 S2 gt 1 D result 32 bits Available X Not available Not available partially EN 2 o o 15 49 FP2SH FP10SH Ope ae Description n rand BCD arithmetic instructions emo m 404000 data addition Par dme pose 7 data addition data addition EL RUSTON fe 12244442 data addition PDB S0 OS 8 subtraction P subtraction PDB pee 4444444 SUDISCHOR PB me sumacion o oen n multiplication 8 digit BCD data DB 51 92 61 11 1 2 1 2 gt 0 3 0 2 11 e m 4 digit BCD data B 1 S2 D 52 2 8 digit BCD data DB 1 S2 D NCO division PDB D 1 D OF GO ao Oo remainder 079016 DT9015 4 digit BCD data B 1 0 1 0 lalololololalo increment PB 1 8 digit BCD data DB 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 D laloloalololalo increment PDB 1 4 digit BCD data B 1 1 D decrement PB 1 8 digit BCD data DB 1 D 1 D 15 D 1 D decrement PDB 1 De compare instructions 16 bit data CMP 51 52 60
41. Ltd AXY52000 Pressure connection tool 3 Key Point If using MIL connector for flat cables specify the product No AXM110915 In this case the suitable wire is AWG 28 and the rated current is 1 A Wiring method The wire end can be directly crimped without removing the wire s insulation saving labor 1 Bend the welder contact back from the carrier and set it in the pressure connection tool If there is a wiring mistake or the cable is incorrectly pressure connected the contact puller pin provided with the fitting can be used to remove the contact Press the housing against the pressure connection tool so that the contact puller pin comes in contact with this section 5 5 Wiring of Terminal Block Type Attached terminal block Suitable wires A screw down connection type is used for the terminal block The suitable wires are given below lt a gt 2 a e a Terminal block socket The terminal sockect manufactured by Phoenix Contact is used Model No of Phoenix Contact RR of pins P Model No Product No MC1 5 9 ST 3 5 1840434 Suitable wires Twisted wire Size Nominal cross sectional area AWG 24 to 16 0 2mm to 1 25mm Pole terminals with compatible insulation sleeve If a pole terminal is being used the following models manufactured by Phoenix Contact Co should be used Manufacturer Cross sectional area Phoenix Contact model No 0 25mm AWG 24 Al 0 25 6
42. Positioning done pulse YO Mes High speed counter control flag Program When 5 is turned on YO turns on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT90300 and DT90301 reaches K5000 YO turns off and the conveyor stops X5 R9110 R102 R100 nU Y n DMV DT90300 5 7 counter C 167 Ko Ksoo 0 Sets high speed counter CHO f Target value match off instruction YO goes off when elapsed value of high 91 s type timer t Setting 5 and using it as a 0 5 s timer J lt 8 16 Positioning operations with double speed inverter Wiring example FPOR Input termial Conveyor Encoder input Operation start Encoder Inverter Operation Stop Fast Slow Inverter operation Inverter high speed Operation chart allocation speed 0 4500 5000 Number of pulse R02 Arrival at R900 9110 High speed counter CHO control iag Program When 5 is turned on YO and 1 turn on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT90300 and DT90301 reaches K4500 Y1 turns off and the conveyor begins decelerating When the elapsed value reaches K5000 YO turns off and the conveyor stops R9110 R103 a ee E aD f Positioning operations running J 26 Posi
43. S3 D calculation 1 S2 D 1 S2 D BCDA 1 S2 D PBCDA ABCD 1 S2 D PABCD BINA 1 S2 D PBINA F71 P71 Hexadecima data gt ASCII code F72 ASCII code P72 Hexadeci mal data F73 P73 4 digit BCD data gt ASCII code F74 ASCII code P74 4 digit BCD data F75 16 bit binary P75 data ASCII code Creates the code for checking the data specified by 52 and 53 and stores it in calculation method is specified by 51 Converts the hexadecimal data specified by S1 and S2 to ASCII code and stores it in D Example gt H 42 41 44 43 Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and S2 to hexadecimal data and stores itin D Example 44 43 42 41 gt HCDAB DC BA Converts the four digits of BCD data specified by 51 and 52 to ASCII code and stores it in D Example H1234 H 32 31 34 33 2 1 Converts the ASCII code specified by 51 and S2 to four digits of BCD data and stores it in D Example H 34 33 32 31 H3412 4 3 2 1 Converts the 16 bits of binary data specified by S1 to ASCII code and stores it in D area of icd e 001 Available X Not available Not available partially o o o o o o 15 51 ee m FP2SH FP10SH F76 ASCII code gt ABIN 5
44. Second half WL64 to WL127 LD128 to LD255 is used Main flag Link area First half 1201 WLOto WL63 LDO to LD127 Second half 64 to WL127 LD128 to 10225 1 47 7 6 6 Monitoring When using PC PLC link the operation status of the links be monitored using the following relays Transmission assurance relays For PC PLC link 0 R9060 to R906F correspond to unit no 1 to 16 For PC PLC link 1 R9080 to R908F correspond to unit no 1 to 16 If the transmission data from a different unit is being used with the various PLCs check to make sure the transmission assurance relay for the target unit is on before using the data Exclusive internal relays link relays L and data registers link registers LD are shared between the connected PLCs 16 Conditions ON When the PC PLC link is normal for on off OFF If transmission is stopped a problem has occurred or a PC PLC link is not being used Operation mode relays For PC PLC link 0 R9070 to R907F correspond to unit no 1 to 16 For PC PLC link 1 R9090 to R909F correspond to unit no 1 to 16 The operation modes RUN PROG can be checked for any given PLC 16 15 144 42 8 Conditions ON When the unit is in the RUN mode for on off OFF When the unit is in the PROG mode PLC link transmission error relay R9050
45. Terminator End code Messages must always end with a ASCII code HOD ae Note When writing he method for writing text segments in the message varies depending on the type of command If there is a large number of characters to be written they may be divided and sent as several commands if there is a large number of characters in the value that was loaded they may be divided and several responses sent Key Point With the FPOR an expansion header is supported to send single frame of up to 2048 characters as well as general 9o Type of header No of characters that can be sent in 1 frame Max 118 characters Max 2048 characters Response message The PLC that received the command in the example above sends the processing results to the computer D Header Unit no of source PLC that processed the command decimal Text Processing results communication error codes estored here Check code Hexadecimal 5 Terminator Two One digit digit IL Read value Processing results for contact area read contact is off name e g read contact area Response code indicates a normal processing result indicates that an error occurred 1 Header Start code A 95 ASCII code H25 or a lt ASCII code must be at the beginning of a message The response must start with the same header that was at the beginning of the comman
46. The above program executes the operation 1 to 3 repeatedly 1 Updates the write data if the write data DT50 and DT51 and the read data DT60 and DT61 are matched 2 Writes the DT50 and DT51 of the local unit into the data DTO and DT1 in the unit number 1 from the RS232C port 3 Reads the data DTO and dT1 in the unit number 1 into the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit from the COM RS232C port 7 58 Sample program For Il Use a program as below to directly specify a MODBUS address For Send command set the used communication port to COM1 destination unit No 1007 MODBUS command No to 6 register single point preset DT 100 Also for Receive command set the same settings except Modbus command No It should be 03 in DT101 Clear the WRO to send the write command first Clear the write data DT50 and DT51 Set the read data DT60 and DT61 SES H 1607 MV HO F1DMV HO Drso 1 HFFFFFFFF DT60 R1 is the transmission condition of write command transmission condition 31F R2isthe transmission condition of read command R9044 RO R1 RO R2 Compares the write data DT50 and DT51 with the read data DT60 DT61 before 39 sending the write command and updates the write data if they are matched R1 61 50 oreo R1 R900B 1 1 9 F36D 1 DT50 sends a command to wr
47. The initial soeed of the calculated result is stored The minimum speed for the change of speed If the elapsed value corsses over this position when changing the speed acceleration cannot be performed 15 39 15 2 Table of Basic Instructions La rx Instructions Begins a logic operation with a Form A ololo oololo normally open contact X XR CL RE E a logic Ue with a Form B meme Dee coser cona o elo o o YRLE Outputs the operated result to the specified Zoos ee fololo instruction Bais YR oclo Connects a Form A normally open contact FP2SH FP10SH serially XYRTCGLRE Connects a Form B normally closed contact 31 1 serially Connects a Form A normally open contact in oarallel Connects Form normally closed contact i in parallel Leading Begins logic operation only for one scan edge LE when the leading edge of the trigger is start detected Trailing YvRTCGLPE Begins a logic operation only for one scan edge STL H when the trailing edge of the trigger is start detected Leading ee GLEE Connects a Form A normally open contact edge ANT serially only for one scan when the leading AND edge of the trigger is detected Trailing Connects a Form normally open contact edge serially only for one scan when the trailing AND edge of the trigger
48. Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 8 2 79 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 16 43 x 8 2 79 5 139 23 ms Calculation example 5 When all stations have been added to a 2 unit link the largest station number is 2 relays and registers have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pem 23 32 64 x 4 407 bytes Tpc Ttx x Pem 0 096 x 407 39 072 ms Each Ts 5 39 072 44 072 ms 0 096 x 13 2 x 2 1 632 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 44 072 x 2 1 632 5 94 776 ms Calculation example 6 When all stations have been added to a 2 unit link the largest station number is 2 32 relays and 2 register words have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 1 ms Ttx 0 096 Each 23 1 1 x 31 bytes Tpc Ttx x Pem 0 096 x 31 2 976 ms Each Ts 1 2 976 3 976 ms Tit 0 096 x 13 2x2 1 632 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 3 976 x 2 1 632 1 10 584 ms Ca Note In the description stations that have been added refers to stations which are connected between station no 1 and the largest station number and for which the power supply has been turned on Comparing examples 2 and 3 the transmission cycle time
49. When the initial speed is 1 or higher and lower than 46Hz the control up to the maximum frequency to the degree of 10kHz can be performed If the frequency is higher than that the speed error will be larger 2 When the initial speed is 46 or higher and lower than 184Hz the control up to 50kHz can be performed 3 When the initial speed is 184 or higher the control up to 2 can be performed The speed error around 50kHz will be smallest Change of speed during pulse output 1 If the target value is set to a value larger than 50kHz it will be corrected to 5OkHz 2 If the elapsed value crosses over the acceleration forbidden area starting position during accelerating acceleration cannot be performed For information on the acceleration forbidden area starting position check with the special registers from DT90400 3 For deceleration the speed cannot be lower than the deceleration minimum speed For information on the deceleration minimum speed check with the special registers from DT90400 Explanation of pulse output operation Pulses are output using a duty of 25 fixedly When outputting with the PULSE SIGN method pulses will be output approx 300ys later after the output of direction signal The characteristics of a motor driver is considered 8 33 Pulse output diagram Pulse output instruction flag Trigger i gt 42ms 63ms Operation mode of J
50. pulse catch or interrupt has been specified Only following settings are valid C10 to X5 C14 C16 to X7 C32 T32 F32 to 10 6 Chapter 11 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 11 1 Self Diagnostic function 11 1 1 LED Display for Status Condition How to read status indicator LEDs on control unit LED status Operation ALARM Light on Forcing input output in Run mode Operation Self diagnostic error Operation is running Light Self diagnostic error Operation stops Light on Light on Light System watchdog timer has been or off or off on activated e The control unit has a self diagnostic function which Stakis identifies errors and stops operation if necessary indicator e When an error occurs the status of the status indicator LED LEDs on the control unit vary as shown in the table above Description Normal condition 11 1 2 Operation Mode When an Error Occurs e Normally when an error occurs the operation stops e When the duplicated output error or operation error occurs the user may select whether operation is to be continued or stopped by setting the system registers You can set the error which operation is to be continued or stopped using the programming toolshoftware as shown below PLC System Register setting menue on programming tool software To specify the steps to be taken by the FPWIN GR if
51. 0 or later oc Num Ope UT jo lt P Description 2 2 amp exchange PXCH PDXCH o ni us F17 Higher lower SWAP The higher byte and lower byte of D are P17 byte in 16 bit PSWAP exchanged data exchange F18 16 bit data BXCH Exchange the data between D1 and D2 P18 block PBXCH Bo with the data specified by exchange Control instruction F19 Auxiliary jump SJP The program jumps to the label instruction specified by S and continues from there D 1 D S 1 5 gt 0 1 D Fa Fea o o o fol Li Te o 25 05 arithmetic instructions mu o m addition mo U addition mu x addition m 1 addition 16 bit data P subtraction 51 1 51 52 1 2 0 1 D D 1 D S 1 5 gt 1 D 51 1 51 52 1 52 1 D P27 subraction P28 su btraction multiplication multiplication division a P P D41 D p D D D S2 gt quotient D 52 D S2 D D S2 D 2 D d DT9015 51 1 51 52 1 S2 5quotient 0 1 D division PD96 D 079016 079015 16 bit data multiplication S1 X S2 gt D result in 16 pits _ increment P 1 increment PD 1 P37 decrement P38 decr misnt 32 bit data multiplication D
52. 1 Password protect function It is used to restrict access to the programs in the FPOR from the programming tool by setting a password Writing and reading ladder programs or system registers will be unperformable by setting a password and setting to the protect mode There are two types of passwords as below 4 digit password 4 characters of 16 characters that are 0 to 9 and A to F can be used e 8 digit password A maximum of 8 English one byte characters case sensitive and symbols can be used 2 Upload protection Ladder programs or system registers cannot be uploaded from the FPOR by setting that the program is not uploaded As transferring programs to the master memory cassette as well as the programming tool will be unperformable it ensures higher security Password protection and upload protection functions They are available for the FP memory loader Ver 2 0 or later sar Reference lt 9 4 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader gt The state of the security can be checked with programming tools Using FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select Security information or Set PLC Password under Tool on the menu bar The following displays will be shown Security information dialog box Set PLC Password dialog box Security informat
53. 1 is set 2nd unit Unit no 2 is set 3rd unit Unit no 3 is set 4th unit Unit no 4 is set A largest unit no of 4 is set for each n Nth unit Unit no n is set A largest unit no of n is set for each ae Note Unit numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively starting from 1 with no breaks between them If there is a missing unit number the transmission time will be longer If fewer than 16 units are linked the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest unit number in system register no 47 in system register no 57 for PC PLC link 1 For all PLCs which are linked the same value should be set for the largest unit number If there are fewer than 16 units linked and the largest unit number has not been set default 16 or the largest unit number has been set but the unit number settings are not consecutive or the unit number settings are consecutive but there is a unit for which the power supply has not been turned on the response time for the PC PLC link the link transmission cycle will be longer Reference lt 7 6 7 Link Response Time Setting PC PLC link switching flag PC PLC link switching flag can be set using system register no 46 If it is set to 0 default value the first half of the link relays and registers are used If it is set to 1 the second half of the loink relays and registers are used First half WLO to WL63 LDO to LD127 is used
54. 11 2 6 PROG Mode does not Change to 11 8 12 Precautions During Programming ecce eee eee ee eee 12 1 AZ A USE of Duplicated OULD UUs vencer o Debt sa gs 12 2 12 1 1 Duplicated OUIDUE its et tb ene tite de ecd 12 2 12 1 2 When Output is Repeated with OT KP SET or RST Instruction 12 3 2 Zan GUNG BCD Daa c 12 4 2 BC NEN 12 4 12 222 Handling BOD Data in testa n reet 12 4 12 3 Handling Index Registers 12 5 12 3 gei 12 5 12 3 2 Memory Areas Which can be Modified with Index Registers 12 5 12 3 3 Example of Using an Index 12 6 12 4 Operation ENOS etus 12 7 12 4 1 Outline of Operation Emons dra ausu nd bier bete p vdd 12 7 12 4 2 Operation Mode When an Operation Error Ococurs 12 7 12 4 3 Dealing with Operation Errors 12 7 12 4 4 Points to Check in Program 12 8 12 5 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method 12 9 12 5 1 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method 12 9 12 5 2 Operation and Precautions When RUN starts
55. 206 Dec Hime Creep speed 200 Hz Fi DMY RI 206 Deviation counter clear output Not used F1 K 200 0720 Fi gui ES DELE J Home vu e Pulse output instruction Home return Pulses are output from using the data 77 200 table headed by DT200 _ F177 07200 lt output instruction Home return Pulses are output from CH1 using the data table headed by DT200 R9120 R20 R44 R42 EDU EAE enu 2H L 77 home return completes R9121 R20 R44 R43 _ 4 a E Hor H CH1 home return completes R43 R42 R43 R44 L return completes xO leet DF A eee 1 ro H110 DT 90052 CHO near home deceleration start E Fo Mv H100 DT 90052 Hor _____________ FEDERN 1 Fo MY H1110 DT 90052 aac c CI E 4 CH1 near home deceleration start E Fo Mv H1100 0 90052 33 Key Point As there is no interpolation function for the home return the home return should be executed for each channel After the home return for both channels is completed the positioning operation running program R40 turns off Pulse output diagram Near home sensor ON X1 ON Home sensor X5 ON 2000 Hz 20
56. 32 bit data in the AND L d comparative condition S1 1 51 lt 52 1 52 or 1 1 1 gt 2 1 S2 STD lt LE lt 51 52 1l Connects a Form A normally open contact pp 81 52 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 52 Connects Form A normally open contact AND gt AND gt i serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the D gt S1 S2 L 1 comparative condition S1 1 51 gt 52 1 52 or S14 1 51 52 1 52 lt Connects a Form A normally open contact Ps 81 52 4 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 52 or 51 1 51 52 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in D 51 52 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 ORD lt gt EI Connects a Form A normally open contact in 0051 9 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 51 lt 52 1 52 or 51 1 51 gt 52 1 52 ORD gt gessi Connects a Form A normally open contact in D 1 52 J parallel comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 Connects a
57. 7 MS 480 to 495 DT90100 Step ladder process iiid 496 to 511 DT90092 nd prose Note A programming tool software can be s ag used to write data ep ladder process diis 528 to 543 Step ladder process RSS 544 to 559 Step ladder process diea 560 to 575 DT90096 Step ladder process 576 to 591 Step ladder process RE 592 to 607 1 655 t es1 1 647 t 643 E 640 Process No 1 During running 0 During stopping 15 29 FPOR A Available N A Not available Reh Step ladder process 608 to 623 Step ladder process 9130099 624 to 639 Step ladder process DT90100 640 to 655 Step ladder process 656 671 Step ladder process DT90102 672 to 687 Step ladder process DT90103 688 to 703 Step ladder process adii 704 to 719 Step ladder process aibi 720 to 735 Step ladder process DT90106 736 to 751 DT90107 oe 2 dieu Indicates the startup condition of the step Step ladder process ladder process When the process starts up DT90108 768 to 783 the bit corresponding to the process number Step ladder process turns on DT90109 784 to 799 DT90110 SteP ladder process Monitor using binary display 800 to 815 A A 0190111 Step ladder process lt Example gt 15 11 7 3 0 Bit No 816 to 831 preoiof 121 0790112 Step ladder process t 655 5 651 1 647 1 643 1 640 Process No 832 to 847 1 During running 0 During
58. 8 20 EET UEM 8 22 8 4 4 Pulse output control instructions FO 1 8 23 8 4 5 Positioning Control Instruction F171 Trapezoidal Control 8 26 8 4 6 JOG Positioning Type 0 F171 8 29 8 4 7 JOG Positioning Type 1 F171 22 8 31 8 4 8 JOG Operation F172 8 33 8 4 9 Arbitrary Data Table Control F174 Instruction 8 35 8 4 10 Home Return F177 Instruction 8 37 8 4 11 Linear Interpolation F175 8 39 9 5 PWM OUtOUE FUMCION cesse Yep rud rit work e TU Sorge 8 45 9o TOVel VIO s icut I ip PEE 8 45 8 5 2 PWM Output Instruction 173 8 45 g Security FUNCOMS m 9 1 Type of Security Functions 9 2 9 2 Password Protect FUNCION s cir rio seas cerros Cre ELS UON 9 3 9 2 TPassWoOLd Sellllig i Mnt E Due Re RM 9 4 DS Upload FTOIGCUOD 9 8 9 3 1 Upload Protection Setting 9 8 9 4 Setting Function for FP Memory
59. 82 A a 9 EUR EDAD 15 83 Before You Start Operating environment Use the unit within the range of the general specifications when installing Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Ambient humidity 10 to 95 RH at 25 C non condensing For use in pollution Degree 2 environment Do not use the unit in the following environments Direct sunlight Sudden temperature changes causing condensation Inflammable or corrosive gas Excessive airborne dust metal particles or saline matter Benzine paint thinner alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda Direct vibration shock or direct drop of water Influence from power transmission lines high voltage equipment power cables power equipment radio transmitters or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges 100 mm or more Static electricity Do not touch connector pins directly to prevent static electricity from causing damage Always rid yourself of any static electricity before handling this product Power supply Use a power supply wire that is twisted The unit has sufficient noise immunity against the noise generated on the power line However it is recommended to take measures for reducing noise such as using an isolating transformer before supplying the power Allocate an independent wiring for each power supplying line input output device and operating device
60. BSR Shifts the one digit of data of D to bit F106 Left shift of one BSL Shifts the one digit of data of D to P106 hexade cimal digit PBSL the left 4 bit P108 multiple bits n bits PBITR D n 017 and De to the right P109 bits n bits PBITL n D1 and D2 to the left Ty ofololofololo word 16 bit PWSHR D2 D1 and D2 to the right Pri PWSHL p2 2 9 0 word 16 bit PWSHL D2 D1 and D2 to the left dq Right shift of one WBSR D1 Shifts the one digit of the areas by hexade cimal digit PWBSR D2 D1 and D2 to the right 4 bit Left shift of one WBSL D1 Shifts the one digit of the areas by hexade cimal digit PWBSL D2 D1 and D2 to the left 4 bit Available X Not available Not available partially 15 53 FP2SH FP10SH Boo Ope n A 2 Description lean rand FIFO buffer define FIFT The n words beginning from D are n D Data read from S D The oldest data beginning from S FIFO buffer that was written to the buffer is read ojll aj aoj and stored in D F117 Data write into FIFW S D The data of S is written to the buffer P117 FIFO buffer PFIFW ee starting from D function instructions 000000000002 Basic function instructions UP DOWN counter UDC S D Counts up or down from the
61. CAle Ge M CI E 2 11 2 4 3 Built in cresce coin e ona c aqva Ve niens e ch ai sa e 2 13 SN qi Oy Expansion Me NOG Ep DR Ut 3 2 3 2 Part Names and Functions 3 3 3 3 Input and Output 9 19 3 4 94 Terminal IAVOUL CIA GFA 3 6 e e E cea veo esa ees eva 5 865 m TT 4 2 4 2 V O Allocation for FPOR Control 4 3 4 2 1 Numbers of FPOR Control 4 3 4 3 Numbers of FPO Expansion 4 4 5 Installation and Wiring eee eere eee ee eere e eee eee e eoe sseeeeeesss D L Cord Beene 5 2 5 1 1 Installation Environment and Space 5 2 5 1 2 Installation 8 5 3 5 1 3 Installation Using the Optional Mounting Plate 5 4 5 2 Wiring of Power 5 6 5 2 1 Wiring of Power SUDDIyccet cache ta Ob onu sa 5 6 9A Z PO UNIGIING P 5 7
62. Constant value settings for scan Normal 0 to 600 ms Scans once each time scan specified time interval 15 5 Default Tae Descriptions value Range of link relays used for E PC PLC link EN Range of link data registers a used for PC PLC link mE PLC 43 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words link 0 Starting number for link data set 9 0 to 127 register tranmission ting Link data register transmission PC PLC link switch flag Maximum unit number setting 11016 for MEWNET WO PC PLC link Range of link relays used for PC PLO link eee Range of link data registers used for PC PLC link 0 to 128 words PC Starting word number for link t D NC 6410127 link 1 53 Link relay transmission size 0 to 64 words set Starting number for link data 128 128 to 255 ting register tranmission Link data register transmission E mmm size Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET WO0 link DN Pius 15 6 o O c o E im c O O Controller input settings 2 High speed counter High speed counter Default value CHO Do not set input as high speed counter High speed counter operation mode settings X0 to X2 CH1 Do not set input X1 as high speed counter CH2 Do not set input X3 as high speed counter High speed counter operation mode set
63. During the pulse output the number of pulses specified for the target value will be output from the time that the position control start 15 requested the deceleration stop will be performed When this program ie executed the positioning table and the pulse output diagram will be as shown below JOG positioning type 0 Incremental CW CCW 71 Control code lt H constant gt HO 10 Fixed m Control assignment 0 JOG positioning Control assignment 2 0 Type 0 0 Fixed Output assignment 0 Pulse output 1 Calculation only m Operation mode assignment 0 Incremental m Output type assignment 0 CW CCW 1 PLS SIGN Forward OFF Reverse ON 1 PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF 2 Frequency Hz K constant 1 Hz to 50 kHz K1 to K50000 Unit Hz 73 Acceleration time and deceleration time lt constant K1to K32760 Unit ms Acceleration time from the initial speed to the target speed and deceleration time from the target speed to the initial speed 4 Target value K constant K 2147483648 to K2147483647 Note the following characteristics according to the specified initial speed 1 When the initial speed is 1 or higher and lower than 46Hz the control up to the maximum frequency to the degree of 10kHz can be performed If the frequency is higher than that the speed error will be larger 2 When the initial speed is 46 or higher and lower than 184Hz th
64. E8YT P FPO EBYR Ouput 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67 ih Expansion 50 E16X Input 16 points X20 2 X40to X60 to X6F FPO E16R Input 8 points X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67 FPO E16T P Y2010 Y27 Y40to YA7 60 to Y67 FPO E16YT P Output 16 points Y20to Y2F Y40to YAF Y6F FPO E32T P X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F Y20 to Y2F 40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F WX2 WXA WX6 X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F FPO Analog I O 0 24 WX3 WxX5 WXT unit X30 to X3F X50to 5 X70 to X7F WY2 WY4 WY6 Y20 to 2 40 Y60 to Y6F ids in 8 e conversion unit FPO TCA X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F FPO Thermocouple FPO TC8 WX3 WX5 WX7 unit X30 to X3F 50 to X5F X70 to X7F WX2 WXA WX6 X20 to X2F X40 to XAF 60 to X6F FPO D A FPO A04V WY2 WY4 WY6 conversion unit FPO A04 Y20 to Y2F 40 to Y60 to Y6F Output 16 points WY3 WY5 WY7 CH1 3 Y30 to Y50 to Y70 to X40 to 5 601 X7F FPO I O link unit FPO IOL FPO RTD unit Input 16 points WX2 4 WX6 CHO 2 4 X20 to X2F X40 to XAF X60 to FPO RTD Input 16 points WX3 WX5 WX7 X30 to X3F X50 to XSF X70 to WY2 WY4 WY6 Y20 to Y2F 40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F The data for the each channels of FPO A D conversion unit FPO A80 FPO thermocouple unit FPO 8
65. Eaay PID 51 52 53 54 Compare instructions DTR D F373 16 bit data P373 revision F374 DDTR S D P374 PDDTR detection 32 bit data revision detection Index register bank processing instructions SETB n PSETB Setting the index regis ter bank number Changing the index regis ter bank number CHGB n PCHGB POPB PPOPB File register bank processing instructions F414 Setting the file P414 Restoring the index regis ter bank number register bank number Changing the file register bank number Restoring the file register bank number 1 2 This instruction is not available for FP10SH 8 and the result is stored in the 5 3 Temperature control PID can easily performed using the image of a temperautre controller If the data in the 16 bit area specified by S has changed since the previous execution internal relay R9009 carry flag will turn on is used to store the data of the previous execution If the data in the 32 bit area specified by 5 1 S has changed since the previous execution internal relay R9009 carry flag will turn on D 1 D is used to store the data of the previous execution Index register IO to ID bank number change over Index register IO to ID bank number change over with remembering preceding bank number Changes index register IO to ID bank number back to the bank before F411 411 PCHGB instruct
66. F166 15 K2 K20000 6 for channel 2 matches K20000 output Y6 turns on Target value match OFF instruction F167 Example 1 XC If the elapsed value DT90304 and DT90305 HDF F167 K1 K30000 Y4 for channel 1 matches K30000 output 4 turns off Example 2 XD If the elapsed value DT90312 and DT90313 dF167 K40000 Ys for channel 3 matches 40000 output Y5 turns off Input pulse measurement instruction F178 R9013 High speed counter channel 0 MV 150 DT100 No of moving average 5 Unit of pulse period measurement 1us FO MV 10 DT101 Period of counting the number of pulses 10 ms R3 F178 PLSM DT100 07101 07200 Stores Mo of pulses moving average value in DT200 to DT201 No of pulses in 1us unit in DT202 to DT203 Mo of pulses in 1ms unit in DT204 to DT205 this example No of pulses in 1ms unit is 0 ms Note The last numbers of the actual measured values may vary due to the measurement error 8 3 6 Sample program Positioning operations with a single speed inverter Wiring example FPOR Input terminal Conveyor Encoder input Operation start Inverter Operation Stop Operation chart allocation Description S Encoder input peed Operation start signal Inverter operation signal Positioning operation running 0 XN Number of pulse d Positioning operation start
67. Hz DT6 300 ms DT8 10000 Hz DT10 150 ms DT12 450 ms DT14 100 000 pulses 71 Control code lt H constant H TEE Note the following characteristics according to the specified initial speed pe 1 When the initial speed is 1 or higher and lower than Control assignment 46Hz the control up to the maximum frequency to the 0 JOG positioning degree of 10kHz can be performed If the frequency is higher than that the speed error will be larger Control assignment 2 2 When the initial speed is 46 or higher and lower than 1 Type 1 184 2 the control up to 50kHz can be performed 3 When the initial speed is 184 or higher the control up to 2 can be performed The speed error around 50kHz will m Output assignment be smallest 0 Pulse output 1 Calculation only 0 Fixed Explanation of pulse output operation Pulses are output using a duty of 25 fixedly Operation mode assignment When outputting with the PULSE SIGN method pulses will 0 Incremental be output approx 300us later after the output of direction Output type assignment signal The characteristics of a motor driver is considered 0 CW CCW 1 PLS SIGN Forward OFF Reverse ON 1 PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF 2 Initial speed target speed Hz lt constant 1 Hz to 50 kHz K1 to K50000 Unit Hz 3 Acceleration time and deceleration time lt constant K1 to K32760 Unit ms Ac
68. MTRN instruction are related as follows Data received E X9 device Cannot be stored when reception done flag is on ON Reception done flag R9038 OFF Duplex transmission Gee while F159 MTRN is bein F159 MTRN fl executed instruction ae execution ON Transmission done flag R9039 OFF Transmitted data 6 lt gt Stored Receive buffer Number of bytes lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt 19621756 Write pointer Number of bytes received is cleared when F159 MTRN instruction is executed For general purpose serial communication half duplex transmission must be used Reception is disabled when the reception done flag R9038 is on When F159 MTRN is executed the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address Also when F159 MTRN is executed the error flag R9037 the reception done flag R9038 and the transmission done flag R9039 goes off Duplex transmission is disabled while F159 MTRN is being executed The transmission done flag R9039 must be observed Reception stops if the error flag R9037 goes on To resume reception execute the F159 MTRN instruction which turns off the error flag Ca Note Be aware that the reception done flag R9038 changes even while a scan is in progress e g if the reception done flag is used m
69. MV instruction lt Example gt Set the time to 12 00 00 on the 5th day when the XO turns on 0 DF Fomv H 90054 1105 0 minutes FO MV 512 0790055 12th FO MV H8000 DT90058 Sets the time Note If the values of DT90054 to DT90057 Clock calender setting are changed with the programming tool and 30 seconds software the time will be set when the new DT90058 correction register values are written Therefore it is T32 only unnecessary to write to DT90058 When the correcting times less than 30 seconds By setting the lowest bit of DT90058 to 1 the value will be moved up or down and become exactly 0 seconds After the correction is completed 0790058 is cleared to 0 Example Correct to 0 seconds with on ory Fo Mv H 1 DT90058 Correct to At the time of coorection if between 0 and 29 seconds it will be moved down and if between 30 and 59 seconds it will be moved up In the example above if the time was 5 minutes 29 seconds it will become 5 minutes 0 seconds and if the time was 5 minutes 35 seconds it will become 6 minutes 0 seconds DT90059 Communication error Error code IS sotred here when a RR code communication error occurs 15 27 FPOR A Available N A Not available ma Step ladder process DT90060 0 to 15 Step ladder process DT90061 16 to 31 Step ladder process DT90062 32 to 47 Step ladder process DT90063 48 to 63 Ste
70. O cable Specifications Product No Data clear type AFP8670 Data hold type AFP8671 Relay output type Necessary when wiring terminal blocks Phoenix AFP0806 Necessary when wiring relay output type and Molex connectors AFP0805 MOLEX 57189 5000 Necessary when wiring transistor output type connectors AXY52000 Mounting plate for mounting FPO expansion unit on a panel vertically AFP0803 10 pack Mounting plate for mounting Control unit on a panel horizontally AFP0804 10 pack Loose wiring cable 9 leads AWG20 with Molex socket attached at one end 0 5mm 1 set 2 cables blue white Loose wiring cable 10 leads AWG22 with connector attached at one end 0 3mm 1 set 2 cables blue white AFP0581 1 pack FPOR FP2 Power suppl id Attaches to FPOR control unit Maintenance parts Length 1m AFPG805 1 pack cable 1 7 1 3 Restrictions on Unit Combination wma HEE E E H1 Maximum possible expansion is with a total of three untis Contorol unit Expansion Expansion Expansion unit 1 unit 2 unit 3 Up to three expansion units can be added on the right of the FPOR these expansion units being either expansion units or intelligent units A combination of relay output and transistor output types is also possible Controllable points Type of No of I O points when When the expansion unit When the expansion unit control unit using control unit is the same output type is a transist
71. Position Pulse control starting input X1 402 PWM output PWM output Y2 settings Normal output Y4 Y5 YO to Y7 CH2 Pulse output Y4 Y5 Pulse output Y4 Y5 Home input X6 Pulse output Y4 Y5 Home input X6 Position control starting input X2 PWM output Y4 Normal output Y5 Normal output Y6 Y7 Pulse output Y6 Y7 Pulse output Y6 Y7 Home input X7 Pulse output Y6 Y7 Home input X7 Position control starting input X3 PWM output Y6 Normal output Y7 AD X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 XT Not set Controller input The pressed contact is set for the pulse catch XO X1 X2 X3 X4 XS X6 AT Controller input The pressed contact is set for the interrupt input Inter XO X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 Normal output Transistor type C16 or over CN o Oo c ji Q P p c O O Inter rupt Pulse catch input settings Pulse catch settings Interrupt input settings dnm 405 setting for X0 X1 X2 X4 X5 X6 X7 i Trailing edge settings controller input The pressed contact is up and set to trailing edge Note1 When using the pulse output PWM output the controller output settings must be specified The output that has been set to the pulse output PWM output cannot be used as the normal output Note2 X4 to X7 can be used as the home input of the pulse output CHO to CH3 When using the home return function of the pulse output
72. R9112 For CH2 R903D For CH3 R9113 For CH3 The contents of the following special data registers are changed FPO DT9052 DT90052 High speed counter control flag As each 4 bits of the control code for all 4 channels are allocated write the control code in the area of the corresponding channel FPOR DT90052 High speed counter control flag As the areas to write the channel numbers to be changed and the control codes are separated write the corresponding channel numbers and control codes bitl5 12 11 87 bitlb 1211 87 4 led m PRIV Control codes for each ch DT9052 DTS0052 ch vend ication area erm qmm code The addresses of the following special data registers are changed Elapsed value of high speed counter CHO to CH3 DT9044 DT90044 DT9048 DT90048 DT9049 DT90049 FPOR gt DT90300 DT90301 DT90304 DT90305 gt DT90308 DT90309 DT90312 DT90313 DT9045 DT90045 DT9104 DT90104 DT9105 DT90105 DT9108 DT90108 DT9109 DT90109 Target value of high speed counter CHO to CH3 FPO DT9046 DT90046 DT9050 DT90050 DT9106 DT90106 DT9110 DT90110 FPOR DT9047 DT90047 DT90302 DT90303 DT9051 DT90051 DT90306 DT90307 DT9107 DT90107 DT90310 DT90311 DT9111 DT90111 DT90314 DT90315 Note The numbers parenthese are for 32 When using the in the same specifications as FPO The FPOR supports an operation mode FPO
73. Relay output specifications 10 14 Item si Description O Output type 1a output Rated control capacity 2 A250 V AC 2 A 30 V DC 4 5 A or less common 10 2 points common 1 point common 1 point common Output points per common C14 4 points common 1 point common 1 point common Response OFF ON Approx 10 ms time ON OFF Approx 8 ms Min 20 000 000 operations Switching rate 180 times min Lifetime Elecstrical Min 100 000 operations Switching rate 20 times min at rated control capacity Surge absorber Operating mode indicator LED display Note Resistance load Circuit diagram 3 e m 2 3 Terminal layout diagrams ModelNo Terminalayoutdiagrams C10RS C10CRS C10RM C10CRM C14RS C14CRS C14RM C14CRM Hl let The above illustration is the terminal block type 2 Model No C16T 16 C16P C16CP Terminal layout diagrams Front view of connector ACS ae Note Two COM terminals of the input circuit are connected internally Front view of connector ae Note Two COM terminals of the input circuit are connected internally Model Terminal layout diagrams LM 1 rrr EER EER uel M view mA ae Note Four COM terminals of the input circuit are connected internally Two terminals of the output ci
74. Terminator None Programming example The following program transmits 8 bytes of data without adding the terminator HO 1 91 1 159 MTRN DT100 K 8 1 E 33 Key Point Do not include the terminator end code in the transmission data The terminator is added automatically When STX exist is specified for the header start code in system register 413 do not add the header to the transmission data The header is added automatically Specify K 8 7 23 7 5 4 Receiving Data register pu Data input from the communication port is stored in the receive buffer specified by the system register and the reception done flag goes on If the reception done flag is off data can be received at any time Data reception FPOR lt lt External device Reception done flag on Data table for reception receive buffer This is the state when the above program is executed DT200 The received number of DT200 to DT204 are used as the receive buffer bytes is stored as data is DT201 stored System register settings are as follows HAN System register 416 K200 202 Received data is stored in y 9 DT203 d from the lower order System register 417 K5 DT204 H4B H HATIG E Receive buffer when reception is completed Sample program for receiving data 10 byte data received in the receive buffer through the communication port 1 are
75. Time settings System registers 30 to 34 Set time out error detection time and the constant scan time 6 Remote operation settings System registers 35 and 36 These registers are used to select whether or not to wait for a slave station connection when the remote I O is started and the remote update timing 7 MEWNET WO MEWNET W P PLC link settings System registers 40 to 47 50 to 55 and 57 These settings are for using link relays and link registers for MEWNET WO MEWNET W P PC PLC link communication Note The default value setting is no PC PLC link communication 8 PC PLO link settings System register 49 Set the data size to be processed during one scan in the MEWNET H PC PLC link communication 9 Input settings System registers 400 to 406 When using the high speed counter function pulse catch function or interrupt function set the operation mode and the input number to be used for the function 10 Input time constant settings FP1 FP M System registers 404 to 407 Changing the input signal width to be loaded enables to prevent the malfunctions caused by chattering or noises 11 Number of temperature input averaging process settings System register 409 The number of averaging times can be set in order to even out the variation in the input thermocouple values For normal use it set the number of times to t least twenty For default value 0 the number of average processing
76. always set the home input In that case X4 to X7 cannot be set as the high speed counter Note3 C16 type For performing the home return for the pulse output CHO with deviation counter clear the above Y6 should be set to the normal output to use Y6 for the deviation counter clear signal For performing the home return for the pulse output CH1 with deviation counter clear the above Y7 should be set to the normal output to use Y7 for the deviation counter clear signal The home return cannot be performed for the pulse output CH2 with deviation counter clear Note4 C32 T32 F32 type When performing theo home return with deviation counter clear the deviation counter clear dba corresponding to each CH are used fixedly as follows CHO Y8 CH1 Y9 CH2 YA H3 YB For performing the home return for each type itis necessary to specify the home input corresponding to each channel to be used for the home return in the system register 401 Home input corresponding to each channel 4 CH1 X5 CH2 X6 CH3 X7 For performing the JOG positioning for each type itis necessary to specify the position control starting input signal corresponding to each channel to be used for the JOG positioning Note3 The settings for pulse catch and interrupt input can only be specified in system registers 403 to 405 15 8 Descriptions value aie 1 to 99 Communication Computer link Computer link 412 mode setting
77. current condition is on In any other case the instruction is not executed Precautions when usign an instruction which performs leading edge detection When RUN begins for example when the system is powered on the off gt on change of the execution conditon trigger is not detected Execution of the instruction will take place as explained on the next page When used with one of the instructions indicated in instructions 1 to 6 belowwhich change the order of execution of instructions the operation of hte instruction may change depending on input timing Take care regarding this point Be careful when using leading edge detection type instructions with control instructions such as 1 MC and MCE instructions 2 JP and LBL instructions 3 LOOP and LBL instructions 4 CNDE instruction 5 Step ladder instructions 6 Subroutine instructions 12 5 2 Operation and Precautions When RUN starts Operation of first scan after RUN begins The leading edge detection instruction is not executed when the mode has been switched to the RUN mode or when the power supply is booted in the RUN mode if the trigger execution condition is already on RUN Power on Trigger Operation of instruction Not executed Executed If you need to execute an instruction when the trigger execution condition is on prior to switching to RUN mode make a program as below using 9014 initial pulse off relay R9014 is a special interna
78. data received of 1 m 12941 seral data communication mode DT 102123181 Nodi Butter capacity setting for data received 2048 data cammunication made Initialize No 410 Unit number The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 99 No 412 Communication mode Select the communication mode for the COM RS232C port Click on and select MODBUS RTU link No 413 Communication Format setting The default setting of communication format is as below Set the communication format to match the external device connected to the communication port The terminator and header cannot be changed Char Bit 8 bits Parity Odd Stop Bit 1 bit Terminator Setting disable Header Setting disable No 415 Baud rate setting The default setting for the baud rate is 9600 bps Set the value to match the external device connected to the communication port Select one of the values from 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 bps For information on F145 SEND and F146 RECV instructions d wd Reference Programming Manual ARCT1F353E gt 7 56 7 7 3 MODBUS Master Use the F145 SEND Data send or F146 RECV Data receive instruction to use the MODBUS master function Sample program sets the remote unit No to 01 and No of processing OL words to 2 in the DT100 and DT101 Clear the WRO to send the write command first Clear the write data DT
79. external device from among the data stored in the data table starting with the area specified by S through the communication port specified by D Data can be sent with the header and terminator automatically attached A maximum of 2048 bytes can be sent When the above program is run the eight bytes of data contained in DT101 to DT104 and stored in the send buffer starting from DT100 are sent from the communication port Receiving data Data can be received when the reception done flag is off The received data is stored in the receive buffe specified by the system register When the reception of the data is completed the terminator is received the reception done flag turns on and subsequently receiving data is prohibited To receive the next data execute the F159 MTRN instruction and turn the reception done flag off to clear the number of received bytes to 0 To receive data continuously without sending data clear the number of transmitted bytes to 0 set n to KO and then execute the F159 MTRN instruction Reference Programming Manual ARCT1F353E gt Binary communication Selecting STX not exist for the header and None for the terminator in the general purpose serial communication enables the binary communication Sending data Sends the data of bytes to be specified Receiving data Check the No of bytes received before the process At that time the reception done flag does not work 1 20 Data t
80. external devices is forcibly rewritten to a specified value For medium sized PLCs FP2 FP2SH For the internal relay R and output Y specified by OT or KP instruction the value of the forced processing has a priority When rewritten by a high level instruction the result of the instruction has a priority 12 18 Chapter 13 Specifications 13 1 Table of Specifications 13 1 1 General Specifications Item Description Rated operating voltage 24 VDC Operating voltage range 20 4 to 28 8 V DC Allowable momentary C10 C14 C16 5 ms at 20 4 V 10 ms at 21 6 V power off time C32 T32 F32 10 ms at 20 4 V use Built in Not replaceable Ambient temperature 010 55 C Storage temperature 40 to 70 C T32 only 20 to 70 10 to 95 RH at 25 C No condensation 10 to 95 RH at 25 C No condensation Ry output type Between input terminals and output 500 V AC 1500 V AC terminals for 1 minute for 1 minute Between output terminals and output 1500 V AC terminals Between different commons for 1 minute Breakdown voltage E l Between input terminals and power ground 500 V 500 V AC Detection current 5 mA RAR terminals for 1 minute for 1 minute Between output terminals and 500 V AC 1500 V AC power ground terminals for 1 minute for 1 minute Between ground terminal and power 500 V AC 500 V AC terminal for 1 minute for 1 minute Tr o
81. facing outward on the bottom in order to prevent the generation of heat Do not install the unit as shown below INCORRECT Upside down Upside down Installations such that Input and output Horizontal the input and output connectors on top installation of the unit connectors face down Do not install the unit above devices which generate heat such heaters transformers or large scale resistors 5 2 Installation space Leave at least 50 mm of space between the wiring ducts of the unit and other devices to allow heat radiation and unit replacement 50 mm 1 97 in or more 50 mm 1 97 in or more Maintain at least 100 mm of space between devices to avoid adverse affects from noise and heat when installing a device or panel door to the front of the PLC unit 100 mm 3 937 in more door Leave at least 100 mm of space from the front surface of the control unit order to allow room for programming tool connections and wiring 5 1 2 Installation and Removal Attachment to DIN rail and removal from DIN rail The unit can be simply attached to DIN rail Procedure of installation 1 Fit the upper hook of the unit onto the DIN rail 2 Without moving the upper hook press on the lower hook to fit the unit into position Procedure of removal 1 Insert a slotted screwdriver into the DIN rail attachment lever 2 Pull the attachment lever downwards 3 Lift up the unit a
82. for auxiliary timer instruction turns off Turns on when communication error at tool port is occurred Turns on when scan time exceeds the time specified in system register 34 during constant scan execution This goes on if 0 has been set using system register 34 15 11 WR901 Relay Description R9010 Always on relay Always on Always off relay Always off R9012 Scan pulse relay Turns on and off alternately at each scan Initial on type Goes on for only the first scan after operation RUN has been pulse relay started and goes off for the second and subsequent scans Initial off type Goes off for only the first scan after operation RUN has been R9014 pulse relay started and goes on for the second and subsequent scans Step ladder initial pulse relay on type Turns on for only the first scan of a process after the boot at the step ladder control 0 01 s clock Repeats on off operations in x R9018 pulse relay 0 01 sec cycles 0 02 s clock Repeats on off operations in R9019 pulse relay 0 02 s cycles 0 1 s clock pulse Repeats on off operations in O 1 relay S cycles 0 2 s clock pulse Repeats on off operations 0 2 R901B relay S cycles R901C 1 s clock pulse Repeats on off operations in 1 s relay cycles 2 5 clock pulse Repeats on off operations 2 s R901D relay cycles gs 1 min clock pulse Repeats on off operations in 1 relay min
83. in the The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 F272 Minimum value Searches for the minimum value in P272 word data 16 the word data table between the area bit selected with 51 and S2 and stores it in the The address relative to S1 is stored in D 1 F273 Minimum value Searches for the minimum value in P273 double word the double word data table between data 32 bit the area selected with 51 and S2 stores it the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 F275 Total and The total value and the mean value of P275 mean values the word data with sign from the area olololo word data 16 selected with S1 to S2 are bit obtained and stored in the F276 Total and DMEAN 51 The total value and the mean value of P276 mean values PDMEAN S2 D the double word data with sign from al lxolalalo o double word the area selected with S1 to 52 1 data 32 bit are obtained and stored in the D F277 Sort word SORT 51 The word data with sign from the P277 data 16 bit PSORT 52 area specified by 51 to 52 are S3 sorted in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first F278 Sort double DSORT 51 The double word data with sign from P278 word data 32 PDSORT 52 the area specified b 51 a
84. in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 3 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 4 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 5 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 6 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 7 is communicating properly in PC P link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 8 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 9 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 10 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC 0 mod Turns on when Unit No 11 is communicating properly in PC PLC
85. link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 12 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mod Turns on when Unit No 13 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC 0 mod Turns on when Unit No 14 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 15 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mod Turns on when Unit No 16 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode WR907 FPOR Relay No Name Description R9070 Unit Turns on when Unit No 1 IS in the RUN mode No 1 Turns off when Unit No 1 is in the PROG mode E Turns on when Unit No 2 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 2 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 3 is in the RUN mode R9071 R9072 Turns off when Unit No 3 is in the PROG mode E Turns on when Unit No 4 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 4 is in the PROG mode Unit Turns on when Unit No 5 is i
86. lt 8 2 1 Table of Specifications gt 8 3 5 Instructions used with High speed Counter Function High speed counter control instruction FO e This instruction is used for counter operations such as software reset and count disable e Specify this instruction together with the special data register DT90052 e Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again Operations that can be performed with this instruction Counter software reset bitO Counting operation enable disable bit1 e Hardware reset enable disable bit2 e Clear high speed counter instructions F166 to F167 e Clear target value match interrupt Example Performing a software reset In case of CHO In the above program the reset is performed in step 1 and 0 is entered just after that in step 2 The Fo MV 0790052 count is now ready for operation If it is only reset counting will not be performed X7 HDF Fo MV 1 DT90052 4 In case of CH1 X7 I DF F0 MV H 1001 DT90052 MV H 1000 DT90052 High speed counter pulse output control flag area of FPOR 15 12 11 8 7 qs 0 e The area 0790052 for writing channels 0130052 BENE REN and control codes is allocated as shown in mp9 the left figure Control codes written with FO MV instruction are stored by channel in 0 Fixed special data registers DT90370 to DT90375 Clear high spe
87. number The unit number be set within a range of 1 to 99 No 412 Communication mode Select the operation mode of communication port operation mode Click Computer Link No 413 Communication Format setting The default setting of communication format is as below Set the communication format to match the external device connected to the communication port The terminator and header cannot be changed Char Bit 8 bits Parity Odd Stop Bit 1 bit Terminator Setting disable Header Setting disable No 415 Baud rate setting The default setting for the baud rate is 9600 bps Set the value to match the external device connected to the communication port Select one of the values from 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 bps USB port The setting for the USB port is fixed The setting for the communication parameter is not available 7 4 4 1 1 Communication MEWTOCOL Slave Function Overview For a 1 1 computer link between the FPOR and a computer and RS232C cable is needed Communication is performed via commands from the computer and responses from the PLC Computer FPOR Response message So 5232 System register settings No 410 412 Computer link Communication format Char bit T bits 8 bits Parity None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bit Terminator Header No 415 Baud rate 2400 to 115200 bps No
88. output from the specified output in accordance F172 Pulse output PLSH with channel specification JOG operation F173 PWM output PWMH with channel specification with the contents of the data table that starts with S F174 Pulse output Outputs the pulses from the with channel specified channel according to specification the Selectable data data table specified by S table control Available X Not available Not available partially 1 The elapsed value area differs depending on used channels F171 Pulse output Positioning pulses are output with channel from the specified channel in specification accordance with the contents of Trapezoidal the data table that starts with S control and home return n S D 5 5 sd 15 59 Aur Name Boolean ope ber rand Description Steps FP e FPO FPOR 2 25 105 F175 Pulse output Pulses are output from channel in Linear accordance with the designated 5 NNN interpolation data table so that the path to the target position forms a straight line F176 Pulse output SPCH S n Pulses are output from channel in Circular accordance with the designated 5 NNN interpolation data table so that the path to the target position forms an arc Screen display instructions FP e screen SCR 1 S2 Register the screen displayed on display 53 54
89. possible Execution of F159 MTRN 2 When the terminator end code is received the reception done flag R9038 turns on Reception of any further data is prohibited When the terminator has been set to None the reception done flag does not turn on Check the number of received bytes to judge whehter the reception has completed or not 3 When an F159 MTRN instruction is executed the reception done flag R9038 turns off except the case when the terminator has been set to the number of received bytes is cleared and subsequent data is stored in order from the lower order byte For repeated reception of data perform the following steps 1 Receive data 2 Reception done R9038 on reception prohibited 3 Process received data 4 Execute F159 MTRN R9038 off reception possible 5 Receive subsequent data Prepare for reception RO 1 L Fi59 MTRN DT100 Ko Ki The reception done flag R9038 turns on when data reception from the external device is completed repeatedly perform only reception Reception of any further data is prohibited specify KO To receive subsequent data you must execute the F159 E MTRN instruction to turn off the reception done flag specification R9038 7 25 7 5 5 Flag Operation in Serial Communication Header No STX Terminator CR Receiving data The reception done flag the transmission done flag and the F159
90. power to the control unit the unit will detect the input fluctuations and may begin an unscheduled operation Be sure to supply power to the control unit and an expansion unit from the same power supply and turn the power on and off simultaneously for both 5 6 5 2 2 Grounding In situations of excess noise Under normal conditions the inherent noise resistance is sufficient However in situations of excess noise ground the instrument to increase noise suppression Exclusive grounding The grounding connection should have a resistance of less than 100Q The point of grounding should be as close to the PLC as possible The ground wire should be as short as possible If two devices share a single ground point it may produce an adverse effect Always use an exclusive ground for each device CORRECT EL device Other device IEF Note Depending on the surroundings in which the equipment is used grounding may cause problems Since the power supply line of the FPO expansion unit is connected to the function earth through a varistor if there is an irregular potential between the power supply line and earth the varistor may be shorted As for the FPOR control unit since its power supply line is connected to the function earth through a high voltage capacitor it is no problem 24 V DC Varistor 39 V FPOR power supply line Do not ground the function earth terminal
91. receivin FPOR p A Device with Device with RS232C port he terminator specified in the system register When data is being received the reception done Reception done flag on is automatically added to the data that has flag is controlled by the F159 MTRN instruction been sent No terminator is included in the stored data The maximum volume of data that can be The maximum volume of data that can be received sent is 2048 bytes is 4094 bytes Key Point In the compatibility mode with the FPO FPO compatibility mode the F159 MTRN instruction is changed to the F144 TRNS instruction Communication Port Tool port COM port RS232C port 7 5 2 Programming Example of General purpose Serial Communication The F159 MTRN instruction is used to send and receive data via the specified communication port F159 MTRN instruction Data is sent and received via the specified COM port FO 5 D FIS9MTRN DT100 Serial data communication Starting from DT100 the contents of 8 bytes sent from the communication K1 port Devices that can be specified for S Only data registers DT can be specified as the send buffer Devices that can be specified for n WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD I IO to ID K Devices that be specified for D Only the K constants KO and 1 only Sending data The amount of data specified by n is sent to the
92. set input X6 as high speed counter Incremental input X6 Decremental input X6 Two phase input X6 X7 Individual input X6 X7 Incremental decremental control input X6 X7 Do not set input X7 as high speed counter Incremental input X7 Decremental input X7 Note1 If the operation mode is set to Two phase incremental decremental or incremental decremental control the setting for CH1 or CH3 is invalid in system register 400 and the setting for CH5 is invalid in system register 401 Note2 If reset input settings overlap the CH1 setting takes precedence in system register 400 and the CH3 setting takes precedence in system register 401 Note3 If system register 400 to 403 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay the follwing lt Example gt When the high speed counter is being used in the addition input mode even if input XO is specified as an interrupt input or as pulse catch input those settings are invalid and XO functions as counter input for the high speed counter precedence order is effective High speed counter Pulse catch Interrupt input 15 7 Default F Descriptions value Normal output YO 1 Pulse output YO 1 Pulse output YO Y1 Home input X4 Pulse output YO Y1 Home input X4 Position control starting input XO PWM output YO Normal output 2 Pulse output Y2 Pulse output Y2 Y3 Home input X5 Pulse output Y4 Home input X5
93. temperature at 25 C Frequency may decrease depending on voltage temperature or operating condition 2 No of channels A total of 4 channels is available for pulse output and PWM output Frequency Pulse output can be specified up to 50 kHz PWM output can be specified up to 4 8 kHz An error on the pulse width that is a maximum of 40us may occur for the setting value depending on voltage temperature or operating condition 3 Guaranteed number of writing is up to 10000 times 4 Auto backup area when power is off Type C10 C14 C16 C32 T32 C1008 to 1023 C Contact EV C1008 to 1023 C Contact EV Backup Elapsed value Elapsed value area R2480 to 255F R2480 to 255F DT12000 to 12314 DT32450 to 32764 5 All the areas of timer counter internal relays link relays link registers and data registers be held Non hold areas and hold areas can be specified by the setting of system register 6 Notes about built in backup battery T32 only Secondary battery is used for this product It has not been charged when it is shipped from the factory Energize and charge it before you use it The secondary battery does not have a function to notify the battery voltage reduction However if the battery is out of charge and the hold area becomes indefinite the values in the hold areas will be cleared to 0 when the power is turned on next time We recommend to add a program for clearing the data to 0 when the values in hold areas becom
94. the real number data table between the area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D 1 D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 Searches the minimum value in the real number data table between the area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D 1 D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 The total value and the mean value of the real number data from the area selected with S1 to S2 are obtained The total value is stored in the D 1 D and the mean value is stored in the 0 3 0 2 The real number data from the area speciified by S1 to S2 are stored in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first Scaling linearization on a real number data table is performed and ej o the output Y to an input value X is calculated Q Available Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later FP10SH cannot be used 2 This instruction is available for 32k type 9 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 1 13 or later 15 66 277 Boolean Ope Description a rand m 2 CN A LL Time series processing instruction F355 PID processing PID 5 PID processing is performed depending on the control value mode and parameter specified by 510 42 8 4 0 5 10 9 919414 414
95. the FPO expansion bus Note Accuracy will change if an FPO thermocouple unit is used at the same time This is a link unit designed to make the FPO FPO I O Link Unit function as a slave unit to MEWNET F remote O 24VDC FPO IOL AFP0732 This manual system FPO A D Converter unit This is an RS485 adapter designed to allow use of C NET Adapter 2 2 the computer link function for connecting to host S2 type 15402 cmputer via comes with a 30 FPO ee tool port cable A power supply is not required ARCT1F96 This is an RS485 adapter designed to allow use of 100 to AFP8536 C NET Adapter the computer link function for connecting to a 240V TN f ter sid ia C t for computer side network connected PLC via C NET from a hos 24V DC computer EP Web Server2 Connected with FP series PLCs it conducts Ethemet unit communication sends e mail and displays the PLC data on FP WEB2 AFP0611 ARCT1F446 HTML pages 1 6 1 2 5 Power Supply Unit Produtnam Specifications PartNo ProductNo Input voltage 100 to 240 VAC Free input FPO Power supply unit 5 4 AFP0634 Output capacity 0 7A 24 V DC 1 2 6 Options and Repair Parts FP Memory loader Terminal screwdriver Molex connector pressure contact tool Multi wire connector pressure contact tool FPO Slim type mounting plate Relay output Molex type I O cable Transistor output type I
96. the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 7 82 x 16 4 32 1 130 44 ms Calculation example 2 When all stations have been added to a 16 unit link the largest station number is 16 relays and registers have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 096 Each 23 4 8 4 71 bytes Tpc Ttx x 0 096 x 71 6 82 ms Each Ts 5 6 82 11 82 ms Tit 0 096 x 13 2x 16 4 32 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 11 82 x 16 4 32 5 198 44 ms 7 49 Calculation example 3 When all but one station have been added to a 16 unit link the largest station number is 16 relays and registers have been allocated evenly and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 0906 Each Ts 5 6 82 11 82 ms 0 096 x 13 2 x 15 4 13 ms 0 96 400 0 67 5 407 ms Note The default value for the addition waiting time is 400 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 11 82 x 15 4 13 5 407 593 43 ms Calculation example 4 When all stations have been added to an 8 unit link the largest station number is 8 relays and register have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pem 23 8 16 x 4 119 bytes Tpc Ttx x Pem 0 096 x 119 11 43 ms Each Ts 5 11 43 16 43
97. to 46Hz 0 CWICCW 3 When the initial speed is 184 or higher the control up to 1 PLS SIGN Forward OFF Reverse ON 50kHz can be performed If the frequency n is set to a 1 PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF value below 184Hz it will be corrected to 184Hz Explanation of pulse output operation 72 Frequency Hz K constant Pulses are output using a duty of 25 fixedly 1 Hz to 50 kHz K1 to K50000 Unit Hz When outputting with the PULSE SIGN method pulses will be output approx 300ys later after the output of direction 3 Target value K constant signal The characteristics of a motor driver is considered K 2147483648 to 2147483647 4 Assignment of pulse output stop K constant KO Fixed 8 35 Pulse output diagram when the target speed is not changed Frequency speed Hz 2500 High speed 1000 counter elapsed value 0 1000 4000 9000 11000 distance Trigger mol 5 Pulse output i instruction flag R9120 8 36 8 4 10 Home Return F177 Instruction This instruction performs home return according to the specified data table The elapsed value area is cleared to zero after the completion of home return There are two kinds of control method which are type 0 and type 1 With the type 0 the home input is effective regardless of it is performed before the near home input during deceleration after the input or after t
98. value Target value Pulse output when Pulse output less than direction output is from CCW current value ON Example Pulse and direction forward ON reverse OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON Pulse output when direction output is OFF HSC counting method Decremental When the current position value of elapsed value area is 5000 the pulse of 4000 is output from CCW by executing the pulse output instruction with the target value 1000 and the current position will be 1000 Home return e When executing the F177 HOME instruction the pulse is continuously output until the home input X4 X5 X6 or X7 is enabled e To decelerate the movement when near the home position designate a near home input and set bit 4 of special data register DT90052 to off gt on off e deviation counter clear output be output when home return has been completed JOG operation e Pulses are output from the specified channel while the trigger for F172 PLSH instruction is in the ON state The change in the target speed while pulses being output or deceleration stop can be performed e he direction output and output frequency are specified by F172 PLSH instruction 8 21 8 4 3 I O Allocation Double pulse input driver CW pulse input and CCW pulse input method e Two output contacts are used as a pulse output for CW CCW e The I O allocation of pulse ou
99. within the same scan To prevent multiple read access to the special internal relay you should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program Explanatory diagram Data register DT LEE 3 Data reading Data reception LAAMA er ota tt ott te 2 Reception done R8038 ON Reception ready R9038 OFF External device 1 24 Explanation of data table Data sent from an external device connected to the communication port is stored in the data registers that have been set as the receive buffer The number of bytes Specify the data registers in system register 416 to received is stored in this area 419 The number of bytes of data received is stored in the starting address of the receive buffer The initial value Reception data is 0 The eircled numbers Received data is stored in the received data storage aa ce area in order from the lower order byte Reception process When the reception done flag R9038 is off operation takes place as follows when data is sent from an external device The R90368 flag is off during the first scan after RUN 1 Incoming data is stored in order from the lower order byte of the 2nd word area of the receive buffer Header and terminator start and end codes are not stored Beginning of reception Re opening Received data B e R9038 ON OFF Execution condition R10 Reception Reception is Reception is possible not possible is
100. 0 Hz 150 150 ms Near home sensor Home sensor XA ON xO ON X4 ON 8 5 PWM Output Function 8 5 1 Overview PWM output function With the F173 PWMH instruction the pulse width modulation output of the specified duty ratio is obtained System register setting When using the PWM output function set the channel CHO and CH3 with system registers 400 and 401 to High speed counter not used 8 5 2 PWM Output Instruction F173 X6 While X6 is on a pulse with a period of 1 ms and duty Fo Ki3 DT100 ratio of 50 is output from YO of specified channel CHO Fo MV K500 OT101 When the program runs the data table will be as F173 PWMH DT100 KO shown below Data table DT100 Control code 1 K13 DT101 Duty 2 50 1 Specify the control code by setting the K constant Period ms 6 166 67 75 133 33 80 00 7 5 40 00 20 00 10 00 5 00 2 50 6k ____ 600 12k 2 Specify the duty by setting the K constant Duty 0 to K999 1000 resolutions Ca Note e f a value outside the specified range is written to the duty area while the instruction is being executed a frequency corrected to the maximum value is output If written when instruction execution is started an operation error is occurred 8 45 8 46 Chapter 9 Security Functions 9 1 of Security Functions There are mainly Three functions as the security function of the FPOR
101. 00 0790302 X to to 2 phase X2 DT90301 DT90303 2 phase input X3 DT90308 DT90310 One input CH2 X4 R9112 to to 25us Direction X5 DT90309 DT90311 X6 7 distinction CH4 DT90316 DT90318 Note3 X R9114 to to None DT90317 DT90319 Related instructions FO MV High speed counter control F1 DMV Read write of elapsed value of high speed counter F165 CAMO CAM control 166 15 Target value match on F167 HC1R Target value match off F178 PLSM Input pulse measurement Note1 Reset input X2 can be set to either CHO or CH1 Reset input X5 can be set to either CH2 or CH3 12 Note2 Reference For information on minimum input pulse width see lt 8 3 3 Minimum Input Pulse Width gt Note3 It is not available for C10 type Note4 The maximum counting speed is the values when execuing the conditions of each item counting method or number of channels only They are the values when not executing the HSC match on off instruction and other pulse process simultaneously or not execuitng an interrupt program 8 4 Pulse output function Input output contact number used High nter iati gn peod counie CW or pulse CCW or sign channel Note2 output output input clear output ic poe a 7 0790052 Note3 Y axis Note3 a None or YB Memory area used High speed counter channel Position No contr
102. 000 for n the number of transmission bytes and execute the instruction Changing from general purpose to computer link R9032 RO Hor H 91 12 gt 59 MTRN DT100 H8000 Set to H8000 Specify the port to be changed K0 Tool port K1 COM RS232C port Changing from computer link to general purpose R9032 RO Hor 1 gt F159 MTRN 07100 H8000 KI Set to H8000 specify the port to be changed Tool port K1 COM RS232C port R9032 The COM port mode flag turns on when general purpose serial communication mode is selected note When the power is turned on the operating mode selected in system register 412 takes effect It is not possible to change to the MODBUS RTU mode 1 29 7 5 7 Setting Communication Parameters Tool port COM port RS232C port The settings for baud rate and communication format of the tool port are entered using a programming tool Setting with FPWIN GR Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Click Tool Port or COM Port from the left list Dialog box of PLC system register setting Tool port selection screen Configuration Untitlet Hold Non hold Action on Error 1 413 Communication Format Time 410 Unit No Link WO 0 412 Comm Mode Char Bit 8 Bits Link 0 1 Pari od
103. 00011001 00011010 00011011 00000000 00011100 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100111 00011101 00011110 00011111 00111111 11111111 00001111 1001 1001 15 7 ASCII Codes b 05 0 0 1 1 0 0 t 17 9 10o0 t 0 1 0 1 67 166 05 64 63 62 01 60 2 3 4 5 6 0000 o o P LI l IF SN TEREN m Z O gt QiOm ir rig U gt 15 83 15 84 Record of changes ARCT1F475E May 2009 First Edition ARCT1F475E 1 Sep 2009 Second Edition Please contact Panasonic Electric Works Co Ltd Automation Controls Business Unit Office 1048 Kadoma Kadoma shi Osaka 571 8686 Japan 81 6 6908 1050 Facsimile 81 6 6908 5781 panasonic electric works net ac All Rights Reserved 2009 COPYRIGHT Panasonic Electric Works Co Ltd ARCT1F475E 1 200909 Specifications are subject to change without notice Printed in Japan ACG M475E 1
104. 03 DT102 DT101 Upper byte Lowerbyte Upperbyte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte H32 H31 5 4 3 2 1 Receiving data The data of the receive area being read is ASCII code data Example The data 12345C4 is transmitted from a device with RS232C port If DT200 is being used as the receive buffer received data will be stored in the registers starting from DT201 in sequential order of first the lower byte and then the upper byte DT203 DT202 DT201 Upper byte Lower byte Upperbyte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte H32 H31 6 4 9 Q9 6 7 21 7 5 3 Sending Data Communication with external devices is handled through the data registers Data to be output is stored in the data register used as the send buffer DT and when the F159 MTRN instruction is executed the data is output from the communication port Data Data register DT Data transmission using writing F159 MTRN External device Data table for transmission send buffer When transmission begins K8 DT100 When transmission ends Reduces one by one at every transmission DT101 DT102 Data is transmitted in order DT103 from the low order byte Binary data can be transmitted DT104 Data table before transmission Sample program for sending data The following program transmits the characters ABCDEFGH to an external device using the communication port RO R10 ee 0 Data transm
105. 05 supplied with the unit 19 COM port RS232C port CTOCR C14CR C16C 2 T32C F32C This port is used to connect equipment with RS232C to enable data input output 1 expansion hook This hook is used to secure expansion units The hook on the right side is also used for installation on the flat type mounting plate 0804 2 Right side connector for FPO expansion This is used to connect the FPO cum FP2expnasion unit installed on the right side of control unit to the internal circuit The connector is located under the seal 3 DIN hook This hook enables the unit to attach to a rail at a touch It is also used to install the unit on the slim type mounting plate AFP0803 2 3 2 2 Input and Output Specifications 2 2 1 Input Specifications Input specifications for all types Mem For C10 6 points common For C14 C16 8 points common Output points per common For C32 T32 F32 16 points common Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common terminal Min on voltage Min on current 19 2 V DC 2 mA Max off off current 2 4 V DC 1 2 mA Inputimpedance i impedance 9 1 20 us or less OFF ON Note The input time constant can be set using system registers Response time 0 1 ms to 64 ms ON OFF Operating mode indicator LED display Note This specification is applied when the rated input a voltage is 24 V DC and th
106. 092 Turns off when Unit No 3 is in the PROG mode E Turns on when Unit No 4 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 4 is in the PROG mode Unit Turns on when Unit No 5 is in the RUN mode No 5 Turns off when Unit No 5 is in the PROG mode R9093 R9094 Turns off when Unit No 6 is in the PROG mode MEWNET No 7 Turns off when Unit No 7 is in the PROG mode Nos TunsofwhenUnNo Gis inthe PROG mode PC PLC Turns off when Unit No 8 is in the PROG mode operation Turns off when Unit No 9 is in the PROG mode Turns off when Unit No 10 is in the PROG mode Tum Uni Ne 11is inthe PROG mode Turns off when Unit No 11 is in the PROG mode Tums of when Unit No 12is inthe PROG made Turns off when Unit No 12 is in the PROG mode No13 Tums oft when Unit No 13 i in the PROG mode Turns off when Unit No 13 is in the PROG mode Nota TumsofwhenUntNo 14 Turns when Unit No 14 is in the PROG mode Tum when Unit No 18 i inthe PROG made Turns off when Unit No 15 is in the PROG mode Turns of when Unit No 16 is in the PROG mode Turns off when Unit No 16 is in the PROG mode Available N A Not available J 15 19 WR910 Description HSC CH1 completed R912 PLS CH Au Pulse output E eT Turns on while the pulses are being output using instruction F171 SPDH F172 PLSH F173
107. 1 52 Converts the ASCII code specified by P76 16 bit binary PABIN D 51 and S2 to 16 bits of binary data data and stores it in D 7 aG ojG OjOgjojo 00 1 F77 32 bit binary DBIA 51 52 Converts the 32 bits of binary data P77 data ASCII PDBIA D 51 1 51 to ASCII code and stores it in D area of S2 bytes F78 ASCII code gt DABI 91 S2 Converts the ASCII code specified by P78 32 bit binary PDABI D 51 S2 to 32 bits of binary data data and stores it in D 1 D F80 16 bit binary BCD S D Converts the 16 bits of binary data 80 data gt 4 digit PBCD specified by S to four digits of BCD BCD data data and stores it in D Example K100 H100 F81 4 digit BCD BIN S D Converts the four digits of BCD data P81 data 16 bit PBIN specified by S to 16 bits of binary data binary data and stores it in D Example H100 K100 D F82 32 bit binary DBCD 5 Converts the 32 bits of binary data P82 data 8 digit PDBCD specified by S 1 S to eight digits of BCD data BCD data and stores it in D 1 D F83 8 digit BCD DBIN S D Converts the eight digits of BCD data P83 data 32 bit PDBIN specified by S 1 S to 32 bits of binary binary data data and stores it in D 1 D 84 16 bit data INV Inverts each bit of data of P84 invert PINV a plement of 1 F85 16 bit data Inverts each bit of data of D and adds P85 compleme
108. 16 points WX2 WXA WX6 chO We to X2F to X4F T to X6F FPO analog 0 21 Input 16 points unit ch1 to X3F peo to X5F im to X7F CUBES depo e to Y2F a to Y4F to FPO A D Input 16 points converter unit chO 2 4 6 Bo to X2F hin to X4F ss to X6F FPO FPO TC4 unit ch1 3 5 7 ps to X3F to X5F hen to X7F EE ee X20 X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F converter unit 041 0 2 20 Y2F Y40 Y60 to Y6F Sr Ren ch1 3 Y30 Y50 to Y5F Y70 to Y7F FPO link FPO IOL Input 32 points X20 to X3F X40 to X5F X60 to X7F T 32 SE Y20 5 Y40 x Y60 to Y7F CHO 2 4 Bo s A x X60 to X6F RTD unit pow 5 X30 X3F S X70 to X7F Y20 to Y2F v Su Y60 to Y6F e he data of each channel for FPO ae converter unit FPO A80 FPO thermocouple unit FPO TCA FPO TC8 FPO D A converter unit FPO A04V P0 A041 is switched and read write using program that includes the flag for switching converted data e Regarding FPO CC Link slave unit please refer to the exclusive manual 13 8 13 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constants Number of points and range of Item memory area available for use Function External output 2 Internal relay 27 R This goes on when the timer reaches the specified time It corresponds to the timer number C1023 Pete Note2
109. 2 L2 Computer tue raten ie detis aea a 7 2 7 1 3 General purpose Serial Communication 7 2 EG qt 7 3 1 9 MODBUS R TU 7 3 1 2 eae 7 5 f v 7 5 12 PANISB POM EMI SUL UI Lad 7 5 1 23 COM Port IR9232G POM E 7 5 7 3 Communication Specifications nnnm reris 7 6 7 4 Communication Function 1 Computer Link 7 7 OVENIOW De 7 7 7 4 2 MEWTOCOL Slave 7 8 7 4 3 Setting Communication Parameters 7 12 7 4 4 1 1 Communication MEWTOCOL Slave Function 7 13 7 4 5 1 N Communication MEWTOCOL Slave 7 15 tto Er nnt der 7 16 7 4 7 Setting Compatiblity Mode with FPO FPO Compatibility Mode 7 18 7 5 Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication 7 19 ON C
110. 2 and FP2SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90002 DT90003 and abnormal I O unit Then check the unit Selection of operation status using system register21 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Sele Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro I O error ctable aro error in the status display function MEWNET TR communication error FP3 and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers FP3 DT9002 DT9003 FP10SH DT9 0002 DT90003 and the erroneous master unit and abnormal unit Then check the unit Selection of operation status using system register21 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at l O error the status display function A Available 15 74 Error code Name Intelligent unit error unit verify error Opera tion status Selec table Selec table Description and steps to take An abnormality in an intelligent unit FP Check the contetns of special data register DT90006 and locate the abnormal FP intelligent unit application cassette for FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90006 DT90007 and locate the abnormal intelligent unit Then check the unit referring to its manual Selection of operation status using system register22 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 FP3 Ch
111. 232 PC PLC ter 40 and 41 unit is in the reverse setting the registers System 40 to 45 and 47 corresponding to the DT90233 pus ter 42 and 43 home unit mentioned in the left column will ni is be changed to 50 to 55 and 57 and the DT90234 station System regis dt d Ne dor aD ter 44 and 45 system register 46 will be set as it is ene ie System regis Also the system registers 40 to 45 DT90235 ter 46 and 47 corresponding to other units will be System regis changed to the values which the received DT90236 ter 40 and 41 values are corrected and the registers 46 PC PLC and 57 in the home unit are set for the DT90237 link registers 46 and 47 Unit 2 No 5 or 13 xem DT90239 ystem regis ter 46 and 47 Setting contents of system register 15 33 FPOR A Available N A Not available ton A 15 34 System regis ter 40 and 41 PC PLC System regis link ter 42 and 43 Unit station System regis No 14 ter 44 and 45 System regis ter 46 and 47 System regis ter 40 and 41 PC PLC System regis link ter 42 and 43 Unit sta tion No 7 System regis or 15 ter 44 and 45 System regis ter 46 and 47 System regis ter 40 and 41 PC PLC System regis link ter 42 and 43 Unit sta tion No 8 System regis or 16 ter 44 and 45 System regis ter 46 and 47 The contents of the system register settings partaining
112. 41 S3 gt D 1 D F287 Deadband BAND 51 S2 When 51 gt 53 S3 S1 D 287 control PBAND S3 D When 52 lt 53 S3 S25D 10 xo Gala a 16 bit data When S1 or S3 lt or S2 02D F288 Deadband DBAND 1 52 When 61 1 1 S3 1 3 S341 P288 control PDBAND 53 0 3 S1 1 1 gt D 1 D 32 bit data When 52 1 52 lt 93 1 S3 S3 1 53 62 1 S2 gt D 1 D When S141 S1 or S341 S3 lt or 8241 S2 0 D 1 D F289 Zone control 52 When 53 lt 0 53 51 0 x P289 16 bit data S3 D When 53 0 05D 10 m x aara a s a When 8350 S34825D F290 Zone control 51 52 When S341 53 lt 0 S3 1 P290 32 bit data PDZONE S3 D S3 S1 1 S1 D 1 D z When S341 S3 20 05S D 1 D 16 4 x Oaya a a When S3 1 S3 gt 0 S3 1 3 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D BCD type real number operation instructions F300 BCDtype sine BSIN SIN S1 1 1 gt 0 1 D P300 operation PBSN _ ex ix xjxixjo o BCD type BCOS S D 5 51 1 S1 5 D 1 D cosine PBCOS operation BCD type BTAN S D TAN S1 1 1 gt 0 1 D tangent PBTAN X xX KK KX Oo Oo operation BCD type BASIN 1 1 1 gt 0 1 D arcsine PBASIN operation F304 BCD type BACOS S D COS 51 1 1 gt 0 1 D P304 arccosine PBACOS operation BCD type BATAN S D TAN 51 1 1 gt 0 1 D arctangent PBATA
113. 49 Notused NA 07900506 Notused J J 079051 Notused J NA NA The pulse output instruction can be continued or cleared by writing a value with MV instruction FO Control code setting FPOR type 15 12 43210 RR EL DET DT90052 High speed counter Channel setting A A control flag HSC 0 to 5 CHO to CH5 HSC 0 HSC High speed counter instruction 0 Continue 1 Clear HSC Hardware reset Note 0 Enable 1 Disable HSC Count 0 Enable 1 Disable HSC Software reset 0 1 Yes 15 24 0190052 Pulse output control flag FPOR A Available N A Not available m A value be written with FO MV instruction to reset the high speed counter disable counting continue or clear high speed counter instruction Control code setting FPOR type 6543210 Channel setting PLS O 3 GHO GH3 PLS Position control start request 0 Disable 1 Enable PLS Deceleration stop request 0 Disable 1 Enable PLS Near home input 0 Disable Enable PLS Pulse output 0 Continue 1 Clear PLS Pulse output control match ON OFF 0 Continue 1 Cancel PLS Count 0 Enable 1 Disable PLS Software reset 0 No 1 Yes 15 25 FPOR A Available N A Not available Hour and minute data of the clock calender are stored here This data is read only data It Clockiealender be overwritten DT90053 monitor hour mi
114. 5 Count for reset input Incremental input mode or X1 X3 or hh 2 5 count is is prohibited The reset input is executed by the interruption at 1 on edge and 2 off edge 1 on edge Count disable Elapsed value clear 2 off edge Count enable DT90052 bit2 able disable setting of the input can be set by the reset input 8 3 3 Minimum Input Pulse Width For the period T 1 frequency a minimum input pulse width of T 2 single phase input or T 4 two phase input is required lt Single phase gt lt Two phase gt macte PLP LAL 2 2 44 4 4 8 12 8 3 4 I O Allocation e As shown in the table in the previous section 8 2 1 the inputs and outputs used will differ depending on the channel number being used e The output turned on and off can be specified from YO to Y7 as desired with instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R When using CHO with incremental input and When using CHO with two phase input and reset input reset input FPOR Count input A phase input B phase input Reset input Reset input vn ON and OFF output and OFF output The output turned on and off when the target The output turned on and off when the target value is reached can be specified from YO to Y7 value is reached can be specified from YO to Y7 as desired as desired Reference
115. 50 and DT51 Set the read data DT60 and DT61 FO MV H2 DT100 FO MV H 1001 07101 MV HO WRO F1DMV HO DTs0 1 HFFFFFFFF DT60 R1 is the transmission condition of write command transmission condition and 31F R2isthe transmission condition of read command R9044 RO R1 I R R2 Compares the write data DT50 and DT51 with the read data DT60 and DT61 before 39 sending the write command and updates the write data if they are matched R1 I 1F61DCMP DT50 R1 R900B oH m 1 F36 D 1 DT50 Sends a command to write the data DT50 and DT51 of the local unit to the DTO and 55 DT1 in the unit number 01 from the communication port R1 F145 SEND DT 100 0750 DTO 20 H1 70 Sends a command to read the data DTO and DT1 in the unit number 01 from the communication port and stores the result in the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit R2 I F146 DT 100 KO DT60 FO MV HO WRO A Reference For the information on the F145 SEND F146 RECV instructions lt Programming Manual ARCT1F313E gt 7 57 Flow chart Data initialization DT50 and DT51 is equivalent to DT60 and DT61 Increments DT50 and DT51 b F145 Sends a data Sends a data Execute F146 SEND instruction write command read command RECV instruction Turns RO off Completion
116. 5mm Use the above wires shielded it is recommended to ground the shielded part Also if usign a pole terminal refer to 5 5 Wiring of Terminal Block Type Wiring method 1 Remove a potion of the wire s insulation 3 Tighten the screw For tightening the terminal block When tightening the COM port RS232C port use a screwdriver Phoenix Contact Co Product No 1205037 with a blade size of 0 4 x 2 5 Part No SZS 0 4x2 5 The tightening torque should be 0 22 to 0 25 Nem 2 3 to 2 5 kgf cm or less Notes for wiring 1 When removing the wire s insulation be careful not to scratch the core wire 2 Do not twist the wires to connect them 3 Do not solder the wires to connect them The solder may break due to vibration 4 After wiring make sure stress is not applied to the wire 5 In the terminal block socket construciton if the wire is fastened upon counter clockwise rotation of the sccrew the connection is faulty Disconnect the wire check the terminal hole and then re connect the wire Clockwise Counter clockwise 5 8 Safety Measures 5 8 1 Safety Measures Precautions regarding system design On the system using PLC malfunction may occur for the following reasons Power on timing differences between the PLC and input output or mechanical power apparatus Response time lag when a momentary power drop occurs Abnormality in the PLC unit external power supply or other de
117. 8 to 2 147 483 647 Coded 32 bit binary e The built in high speed counter is a ring counter Consequently if the counted value exceeds the maximum value it returns to the minimum value Similarly if the counted value drops below the minimum value it goes back to the maximum value and continues counting from there 2 147 483 647 32147465545 2 147 483 646 Min value 2 147 483 648 Ca Note When the linear interpolation instruction F175 is used the value for the target value or the amount of travel should be set so that it is within the range indicated below 8 388 608 to 8 388 607 Coded 24 bit binary 8 2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items 8 2 1 Specifications High speed counter function input output contact No being Memory area being used PENOLA ee specifications used High speed counter number value in Control Elapsed Target CERE input pulse counting parenthesis is flag value area value area Note2 Note1 width speed reset input DT90300 DT90302 X2 to to DT90301 DT90303 X DT90304 DT90306 X2 to to DT90305 DT90307 DT90308 DT90310 A to to d a DT90309 0790311 6CH DT90312 DT90314 H 50 kHz Decremental X4 X5 to to DT90313 DT90315 X6 DT90316 DT90318 None to to DT90317 DT90319 DT90320 DT90322 X7 None 0190321 01790323 01903
118. 90412 DT90413 DT90414 DT90415 DT90416 DT90417 DT90418 DT90419 15 38 value area Target value Target value area for match ON OFF Corrected speed of initial speed minimum Acceleration forbidden area starting position Elapsed value area Target value Target value area for match ON OFF Corrected speed of initial speed nim minimum nim Acceleration forbidden area starting position Lower words Higher words Lower words Higher words PLS CHO PLS CH1 FPOR A Available N A Not available Read Description ing Available for the transistor output type only Note When controlling the pulse output CH by F166 HC1S F167 HC1R EXE instructions the target value is stored The target value for match ON OFF is stored The initial speed of the calculated result is stored The minimum speed for the change of speed If the elapsed value corsses over this position when hac changing the speed acceleration cannot be 202 performed Available for the transistor Output type only Note When controlling the pulse output CH by F166 HC1S 167 1 instructions the target value is stored target value for match ON OFF is stored The initial soeed of the calculated result is stored The minimum speed for the change of speed If the elapsed value corsses over this position when changing
119. A miniB 5 Note Windows 2000 or later OS is required for the communication with a USB fn USB A type Male USB miniB type 5 pin Male PC side PLC side Reference Chapter 6 Preparation of USB Port Chapter 2 Specifications and Functions of Control Unit 2 1 Part Names and Functions 2 1 1 Part Names and Functions C10RS C14RS C10RM C14RM Common to all control units C10CRS C14CRS C10CRM C14CRM Terminal block type Connector type 3 3 5 o Operation monitor LEDs These LEDs display the current operation status of PLC such as RUN STOP and ERROR ALARM LED and operation status Lights In the RUN inodo The program is being PROG LEDs flash alternately Lights In the PROG mode The operation has stopped The forced input output is being executed in the PROG mode Flashes The forced input output is being executed in the RUN mode The RUN and PROG LEDs flash alternately Flashes An error is detected during the self diagnostic function ERROR Lights hardware error occurs or operation slows because of the program and the watchdog timer is activated ALARM PROG Green ERROR ALARM Red 2 RUN PROG mode switch This switch is used to change the operation mode of PLC Switch 2 Operation mode RUN Position Up RUN mode program is executed and the operation begins PROG Position Down PROG mode The operation stops In th
120. Also the No 1 receive area can receive data from the No 2 and No 3 send areas No 4 is allocated as a receive area only and can receive data from No 1 No 2 and No 3 but cannot transmit it to other stations 7 43 For PC PLC link 1 Link relay allocation FPOR FP2 FP2SH FP X Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 WL64 Send area Receive area Receive area Send area 127 System registers Setting for various units No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 Range of link relays used Starting No of word for link relay transmission Link relay transmission size 20 20 2 lo Note 50 range of link relays used must be set to the same range for all the units Link register allocation FPOR FP2 FP2SH FP X Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 0128 send area 167 168 Receive area Receive area Receive area Send area System registers 51 Range of link registers used Starting No for link register transmission Link register transmission size 40 48 Wo Note No 51 range of link registers used must be set to the same range for all the units When link areas are allocated as shown above the No 1 send area can be sent to the No 2 No 3 and No 4 receive areas Also the No 1 receive area can receive data from the No 2 and No 3 send areas No 4 is allocated as a receive area only and can receive data from No 1 No 2 and No 3 but cannot transmit it to other stations
121. BCCeror ss A transfer error occurred in the received data M1 Formaterror 00 A command was received that does not fit the format 142 No support error A command was received that is not supported L1 NE diii MN procedure error frames Uoc NN Link setting error uH route number by designating the transmission station LI NN NN time out error transmissition buffer is congested disable Transmission processing to another device is not possible Link unit runaway etc Command process cannot be received because of multiple Busy error frame processing Or cannot be received because command being processed is congested 160 Parameter _____ Content of spacified parameter does not exist or cannot be used There was a mistake in the contact data area data number Data error l desigination size designation range or format designation Registration over Operation was does when number of registrations was exceeded error or when there was no registration PC command that cannot be processed was executed during PC mode error RUN mode Link system error 15 79 Description An abnormality occurred when loading RAM to ROM IC memory card There may be a problem with the ROM or IC memory card When loading the specified contents exceeded the capacity Write error occurs ROM or IC memory card is not installed ROM or IC memory card does not conform to specifications ROM or IC memo
122. C link MEWNET W O with the FPOR Exclusive internal relays link relays L and data registers link registers LD are shared between the connected PLCs Turning on a link relay contact in one PLC turns on the same link relay all other PLCs on the same network Likewise if the contents of a link register in one PLC are changed the values of the same link register are changed in all PLCs on the same network The status of the link relays and link registers in any one PLC is fed back to all of the other PLCs connected to the network so control of data that needs to be consistent throughout the network such as target production values and type codes can easily be implemented to coordinate the data and the data of all units are updated at the same time FPOR FP gt FP2 FP2SH FP X Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 Send area Receive area Receive area Receive area Receive area The link relays and link registers of the PLCs contain areas for sending and areas for receiving data These areas are used to share data among the PLCs 7 38 Operation of PLC link Turning on a link relay contact in one PLC turns on the same link relay in all other PLCs on the same network Likewise if the contents of a link register in one PLC are changed the values of the same link register are changed in all PLCs on the same network Link relay Link relay LO for unit no 1 is turned on st
123. C1008 to C1023 32765 words 440 words 0790000 to DT90443 Link data register LD 14 words 256 points 256 labels Differential points Number of points that is within the program capacity Number of step ladder 1000 stages Number of subroutines 500 subroutines Avaialble Smapling by commands Sampling at regular time intervals Sampling trace For one sampling 16 bits 3 words C10 C14 C16 300 samples C32 T32 F32 1000 samples High speed counter HSC At single phase 6 points Max 50 kHz or second phase 3 points 15 kHz Pulse output points Max 50 kHz PWM output points Max 4 8 kHz Pulse catch input 8 points in total including HSC and interrupt input Interrupt program Input 8 programs C10 only Input 6 programs Periodical 1 program Pulse match 4 programs Periodical interrupt 0 5 ms unit 0 5 ms to 1 5 s 10 ms unit 10 ms to 30 s 0 5 ms unit 0 5 ms to 600 ms 13 4 wem 10 514 6 C32 132 F3 Backup by F12 Flash P13Instruction Counter 16 points aoe Internal relay 128 points Data register 315 words All areas RAM backup Built in All areas All areas backup battery i Clock Calendar p Avalabe Communication port Tool port USB port COM port RS232C port Only type with C Self diagnosis functions Watchdog timer Approx 690 ms program syntax checking 1 The specification is when rated input voltage is at 24 V DC and
124. COM 2 46 indi receive e Receives the data from the slave station P146 as the MEWTOCOL master via COM 4 B port F147 Converts the ASCII code data in the area starting with S for printing and outputs it to the word external output relay WY specified by D F148 Self ERR Stores the self diagnostic error number P148 diagnostic PERR n k100 in DT9000 turns R9000 and error set 299 turns on the ERROR LED Displays the character constant of S in P149 display the connected programming tool Available X Not available puse Not available partially 1 The instruction is available for FPO T32 type V2 3 or later 2 This instruction is available for FP X V1 20 or later and FP 32k type 3 This instruction is available for FP X V2 50 or later and FP V3 20 or later 4 4 This instruction is available for FPO V1 20 or later 15 55 o gt lt P Description o a 2 2 LL LL Peo co intelli gent unit PREAD n D intelligent unit intelli gent unit PWRT n D unit 53 Data read from RMRD 51 52 Reads the data from the MEWNET F intelligent unit at the MEWNET F X e slave station remote slave station Data write into RMWT 51 52 Writes the data into the intelligent MEWNET F unit at t
125. COM port SEND RECV be executed or not R9044 Off None of the above mentioned instructions can be executed instruction execution fla During executing the instruction z On One of the above mentioned instructions can be executed COM port Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the execution of SEND RECV the F145 SEND or F146 RECV instructions as follows R9045 instruction Off No abonormality detected execution end On An abnormality detected communication error flag End code DT90124 R9046 Notusd R9047 Notused J R9048 R9049 Notused R904A Notused RO04B Notused to R904F A Available N A Not available Note R9040 to R904F can be changed during 1 scan WR905 FPOR Relay HOS RS _ MEWNET WO PLC link Turns on when there is an error in the PLC link area settings error flag R9051 to R905F When using MEWNET WO Turns on when a transmission error occurs at PLC link 15 15 WR906 FPOR Relay No MEWNET WO PC PLC link 0 trans mission assurance A Available N A Not available 15 16 Description Turns on when Unit No 1 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 2 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not
126. D display Response time 3 4 Terminal layout diagram E8RS ESRM E Output 0 3 3 6 Model No Terminal layout diagrams Input No input for E8YT Front view of connector Note Two COM terminals of the input circuit are connected internally Input No input for E16YT mn ERRE Output No output for E16X sYa RR ESEE ant pue vm SR ee ome 39 9 eio view TNR Note Two terminals of the input circuit are connected internally Two terminals of the output circuit are connected internally Two terminals of the output circuit are connected internally Terminal layout diagrams Input No input for E8YP Front view of connector Note Two COM terminals of the input circuit are connected internally Two terminals of the output circuit are connected internally Two terminals of the output circuit are connected internally Chapter 4 I O Allocation 4 1 I O Allocation FPOR control unit XO XF YO YF L In TE Er demi g nea HHE DODEEKKX z FPO expansion unit X20 X3F T move Expansion unit 1 40 5 40 5 X60 X7F Y60 Y7F Expansion unit 2 Expansion unit 3 Note The usable I O numbers ar
127. DT Example 10 0 IOWY1 IOWRO 105 0 IOEV2 007100 Constants can be also modified lt Example gt 10 10 10 1001 An index register cannot modify another index register Example 1010 1011 When using index modification with instruction which handles 32 bit data specify with 10 In this case 10 and 11 are handled together as 32 bit data Higher 16 bit area Lower 16 bit area Contents of 11 Contents of IO In 1 In 12 3 3 Example of Using Index Register Repeatedly reading in external data lt Example gt Writing the contents of input WX3 to a sequence of data registers beginnig from RO H DFH FO MV KO 10 F R1 HoF H WX3 IODTO 5 1 10 1 When RO turns 0 is written to index register l0 2 When the R1 turns on the contents of input WX3 is transferred to the data register specified by JODTO 3 Add 1 to IO In this case the contents of 10 will change successively and the destination data register will be as follows Input times of R1 Contents of 10 Destination data register 1st 0 DTO 2nd 1 DT1 3rd 2 DT2 Inputting and outputting data based on a number specified by an input Example 1 Setting a timer number specified by a digital switch RO HK DF F81 BIN wX1 10 1986 set timer number F81 BIN WX0 105 0 ss 2 Digital switches 1 Convert the BCD timer number data WX1 t
128. EE 0 Time chart 1 AQ A1 YO X1 was on when XD became off The input condition X1 for the DF instruction has not changed since the time of the previous execution thus derivative output is not obtained Time chart 2 AD A1 YO X1 was off when became off The input condition X1 for the DF instruction has changed from off to on since the time of the previous execution thus derivative output is obtained Example 2 Using the CT instruction between JP and LBL instructions RO ee XO CT 100 X1 LBL 1 Time chart 1 RO xO Counting operation 1 Final timing at which the previous JP instruction was not executed The count is not incremented because the final timing at which the previous JP instruction was not executed has not been change and the execution condition XO for the counter input has not changed Time chart 2 R AD Counting operation Final timing at which pal The count is not incremented because the count input changed previous JP instruction from off to on after the final timing at which the previous JP was not executed instruction was not executed 12 11 12 6 Precautions for Programming Programs which are not executed correctly Do no write the following programs as they will not be executed correctly lt Example 1 gt ANS X0 x1 YO H DF X2 When X1 was on prior to YO will not be on even if becomes lt Example 2 gt
129. Exclusive Product name Specifications No manual FPO Thermocouple K J T R thermocouples resolution 0 1 C FPO TCA AFP0420 ARCT1F366 unit J T R thermocouples resolution 0 1 FPO TC8 AFP0421 lt Input specifications gt No of channels 2 channels Input range Voltage to 5 V 10 10V Resolution 1 4000 FPO Analog I O unit Current 0 to 20 mA Resolution 1 4000 FPO A21 AFP0480 ARCT1F390 Output specifications No of channels 1 channel Output range Voltage 10 to 10 V Resolution 1 4000 Current O to 20 mA Resolution 1 4000 Input specifications No of channels 8 channels Input range Voltage to 5 V 10to 10V 100 to 100 mV 80 AFP0401 ARCT1F321 Resolution 1 4000 Current 0 to 20 mA Resolution 1 4000 lt Output specifications gt No of channels 4 channels FPO D A Converter Output range Voltage output type 10 to 10 V ARCT1F382 unit Resolution 1 4000 FP0 A041 AFP04123 Current output type 4 to 20 mA Resolution 1 4000 FPO RTD Resistance Pt100 Pt1000 Ni1000 FPO RTD6 AFPO430 ARCT1F445 temperature detector Resolution 0 1 0 01 Switch type unit 1 2 4 Link Units PONES Product Exclusive Product name Specifications No manual This unit is for making the FPO function as a slave unit of the CC Link FPO CaN Only one unit can be connected to the furthest 2AVDC FPOCCLS AFP07943 ARCT1F380 Slave unit right edge of
130. Form A normally open contact in S825 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt 2 1 52 or 51 1 51 52 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in _ Os 1 82 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the AND lt 32 bit data compare OR h h ORD gt ORD lt ORD lt D amp 2 81 52 ipe comparative condition S1 1 51 lt 52 1 52 or S14 1 51 52 1 52 Available gt lt Not available Not available partially h 15 46 FP2SH FP10SH EN Floati Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 is ae t bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 point 52 1 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 51 lt 52 1 52 or 1 1 51 gt 52 1 52 data STF T Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 LET 5152 1 pit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt 2 1 S2 Start STF gt Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 E 77 S S bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 51 gt 52 1 52 or 51 1 51 52 1 52 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 STF 25 5 9 gie op HE S
131. II E A D rc 7 19 7 5 2 Programming Example of General purpose Serial Communication 7 20 7 9 PE 7 22 TOF Receiving Dl cuiii uS 7 24 7 5 5 Flag Operation Serial Communication 7 26 7 5 6 Changing Communication Mode Using F159 MTRN Instruction 7 29 7 5 7 Setting Communication Parameters 7 30 7 5 8 Connection with 1 1 Communication General purpose Serial COMMUNICATION 7 31 7 5 9 1 4 Communication General purpose Serial Communication 7 35 7 5 10 Settings in Compatibility Mode with FPO FPO Compatibility Mode 7 36 7 6 Communication Function 3 PC PLC link Function 7 38 TC EM 7 38 7 0 2 Setting or Unit NUImDOES 7 40 7 6 3 Setting Communication Parameters PC PLC Link 7 41 7 6 4 Link Area Allocation sit mM tUe 7 42 7 6 5 Setting the Largest Unit Number for PC PLC 7 47 th 7 48 7 6 7 PC PLC Link Response 7 49 7 7 Communication Function 4 M
132. It could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation Do not touch the terminal while turning on electricity It could lead to an electric shock Use the external devices to function the emergency stop and interlock circuit Connect the wires or connectors securely The loose connection could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation Do not allow foreign matters such as liquid flammable materials metals to go into the inside of the product It could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation Do not undertake construction such as connection and disconnection while the power supply is on It could lead to an electric shock Copyright Trademarks This manual and its contents are copyrighted You may not copy this manual in whole or part without written consent of Panasonic Electric W orks Ltd Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries All other company names and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Matsushita Electric Works Ltd pursues a policy of continuous improvement of the Design and performance of its products therefore we reserve the right to change the manual product without notice BATN Table of Contents Before You Start Programming Tool Restrictions When Using FPO Programs 1 Functions and Restrictions of the Unit 1 1 1 1 Feature
133. L by n of the double words data 32 flag R9009 data bits specified by D 1 D to the left together with carry flag R9009 data Bit manipulation instructions re oe DU e 5 the data of D to 1 P reset pata reset PBTR the data of D to 0 NE RAE SRM PBTI the data of D 16 bit data bittest D n Test the value of bit position n of PBTT to R900B Number of on 1 BCU S D Store the number of on bits in the Available Not available Not available partially 15 54 Num Boo Ope Name ber lean rand Number of DBCU S D Store the number of on bits in the data of on 1 bits in PDBCU 5 1 S in D 32 bit data Ha Auxiany SWR SD Tum on he spectied ouputand FOOD Basic function instruction F137 Auxiliary STMR Turn on the specified output and R900D timer 16 bit after 0 01 s x set value Hni M MHa Special instructions F138 Hours min Converts the hour minute and second P138 utes and sec data of S 1 S to seconds data and Alololaloalo onds to the converted data is stored in D 1 D seconds data Seconds to Converts the seconds data of S 1 S to hours hour minute and second data ololalolo minutes and 2i the converted data is stored in D 1 seconds data fo 55 P140 R9009 set PSTC NEED EE
134. N Unit mm 14 2 10 AFP15205 AFP1523 End of life EOL product 8 pin Male D ED pin 1 n ooooocooo 2 3000x747 Unit mm D SUB15 pin Male D SUB15 pin Female TANEN RDA RSA RSA 20026000 5520 5523 3000 14 10 14 2 12 AFP8550 End of life EOL product D SUB 25 pin Female D SUB 15 pin Male Power is supplied from GPU 25Pin 15Pin RS232C connector RS422 connector PC side FP series CPU side Unit mm 14 11 14 12 Chapter 15 Appendix PPOMOUN 15 1 15 2 15 1 System Registers Special Internal Relays Special Data Registers 15 3 15 1 1 Table of System Registers for 15 5 15 1 2 Table of Special Internal Relays for 15 11 15 1 3 Table of Special Data Registers for 15 21 15 2 Table of Basic Instructions 040088 15 40 15 3 Table of High level 15 48 154 Table OU Error COOOS urina been iE Eden 15 68 15 5 MEWTOCOL COM Communication Commands 15 81 15 6 Hexadecimal Biriary BGOD
135. N x xX KK xX a oOo operation Floating point type real number operation E E Be tee a P309 type data move PFMV 2 2 ivpe dala PF die 2 addition type data D 14 o0 2 72 subtraction ed u v v Bonnin type data PF D 14 7 QO a a Boc 2 2 multiplication Floating point F 51 52 141 1 2 1 2 gt 0 1 D alo type data 14 el G GJ ajaj a division Available X Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 2 or later 2 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 21 or later FPO V2 1 or later 15 63 ber lean rand 0 0 CN A LL Floating point type S D SIN S 1 S gt D 1 D 10 1 data sine operation Floating point type COS 5 COS S 1 5 0 1 D alo data cosine PCOS aa ajajdjdijcd operation Floating point type TAN S D TAN S 1 S gt D 1 D alo data tangent PTAN a operation F317 Floating point type SIN S41 S gt D 1 D P317 data arcsine 10 operation F318 Floating point type ACOS COS S41 S gt D 1 D olo P318 data arccosine PACOS 10 ex operation Floating point type ATAN S D TAN S1 S gt D 1 D olog data arctangent PATAN 10 4 GJ ojaa a operation Floating point type LN N S 1 S gt D 1 D data natural PLN
136. No STX End code CR CR LF None ETX Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Computer link Master Slave Modem initialization General purpose communication MODBUS RTU Master Slave PC PLC link A maximum of 16 units can be connected by converting to 5485 Communication function Factory default Data length Tool port 9600 bit s 8bts 04 tbt Odd tbi COM port RS232C 9600 bit s 13 6 13 2 I O Number Allocation 13 2 1 I O Numbers for FPOR Control Unit The I O allocation for the FPOR control unit is fixed Unit type Allocation points No 10 Input 6 points to X5 Output 4 points YO to Y3 Input 8 points to X7 C16 Output 6 points YO to Y5 Input 8 points XO to X7 Output 8 points YO to Y7 2 32 32 Input 16 pomis XO to XF Output 16 points YO to YF 13 7 13 2 2 Numbers for FPO Expansion Unit e numbers do not need to be set as I O allocation is performed automatically by the PLC when an expansion unit is added e he allocation for expansion units is determined by the installation location Unit type Allocation points PXP nsion Expansion Expansion FPO E8X Input 8 points X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67 Input 4 points X20 to X23 X40 to X43 X60 to X63 FPO E8R Output 4 points Y20 to Y23 Y40 to Y43 Y60 to Y63 FPO E8YT P FPO EBYR Output 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67 FPO E16R FPO E16T P Input
137. O points onec i No type o dius RUE FPO EBX AFP03003 Input 8 points common connector E i FPO E8RS AFP03023 4 MVDO Relay output Points common Molex Output 4 points GORGE FPO ESRM AFP03013 FPO E8 Exe 0908 2 output Terminal unit Output 8 points block Peers EE output NPN FPO EBYT 03040 Output 8 points 0 1A Transistor output PNP FPO E8YP 03050 0 1A E 8 points Output 8 points Terminal ES 24VDC Relayoutput block pone DC common 2A Molex Output 8 points FPO E16RM AFP03313 connector 16 points Transistor MIL Input 8 points oe output NPN FPO E16T AFP03343 16 common connector Output 8 points 16 points Transistor unit MIL Input 8 points e output PNP FPO E16P AFP03353 Output 8 points Transistor i MIL mu NM output NPN FPO E1GYT AFP03340 Output 16 points connector 0 1A Transistor i MIL MI output PNP FPO E16YP AFP03350 Output 16 points connector 32 points Transistor 24V D MIL Input 16 points li output NPN 2 543 2 common connector Output 16 points 32 points Transistor it 24V D MIL Input 16 points output Connector 2 AFPO3553 Output 16 points 7 1 5 1 2 3 Intelligent Units Product
138. ODBUS Communication 7 53 Tal NOVEIVIEW OI FUNCION us oce a 7 53 7 7 2 Setting Communication Parameters 7 56 MODBYUS MASE costes et ee ene MUSIC ELE 7 57 8 High speed counter Pulse Output and PWM Output functions 8 1 3 1 OVerview of Each FUNCUONS 8 2 8 1 1 Three Pulse Input Output FUNCTIONS 8 2 8 1 2 Performance of Built in High speed 8 3 8 2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items 8 4 DECINICAUONS TEE Em 8 4 8 2 2 Functions Used and Restrictions 8 8 8 3 High speed Counter 8 11 8 3 1 Overview of High speed Counter Function 22 2222 8 11 8 3 2 INPULMOdeS and COUNT suoi ed 8 11 8 3 3 Minimum Input Pulse 8 12 mode PAO CANO eR cp 8 13 8 3 5 Instructions used with High speed Counter Function 8 13 1 FOAM no ance eae eed ecg ees 8 16 9 4 Pulse Output FUNCTION 8 19 8 4 1 Overview of Pulse Output Function 2 8 19 8 4 2 Types of Pulse Output Method and Operation Modes
139. OG operation There are two operation modes for the FPOR JOG operation which are type 0 and type 1 Those operation specifications for the specified target value vary Type 0 Regardless of the settings for the target value the JOG operation is performed when the trigger is on Pulse output instruction flag A i Trigger Change Change in target speed ma speed i ae Initial target speed Time Deceleration stop starts when the trigger is off Deceleration stop starts when the trigger is off Type 1 Even if the trigger is on the deceleration stop is performed according to the settings of the target value Trigger Change Change in target speed 1 target speed P value Specified No of pulses Initial target speed Time Deceleration stop starts when the trigger is off 8 34 8 4 9 Arbitrary Data Table Control F174 Instruction Pulses are output from the specified cahnnel according to the specified data table RO When the trigger R10 is on pulses at a F1 10000000 DT100 Control code H10000000 BID frequency of 1000 Hz are output from YO FiDMV 1000 DT104 Target value 1 1000 pulses and positioning will start F1DMV 2500 DT106 Frequency 2 2500 Hz F1DMV K 3000 DT108 Target value 2 3000 pulses Positioning IS performed sequentially F1 DMV
140. OR with the USB a personal computer which supports USB with the OS supporting the USB Windows2000 XP Vista is required The FPOR connected to the USB is recognized by the PC as that is connected through the COM port The COM port number of the COM port allocated for the USB is fixed unless you change the number When multiple FPOR units are connected to one PC with the USB they cannot communicate with the PC simultaneously The PC can communicate with the FPOR that was connected first only and it cannot communicate with the other FPOR 6 8 Chapter 7 Communication 7 1 Functions and Types 7 1 1 Communication Modes and Communication Ports On the FPOR four different communication modes are available According to the communication mode to be used the usable communication ports vary Communication mode Usable communication port Computer link Tool port USB port COM port RS232C port General purpose serial Tool port communication COM port RS232C port PC PLC link COM port RS232C port MODBUS RTU COM port RS232C port 7 1 2 Computer Link Computer link is used for communication with a computer connected to the PLC Instructions command messages are transmitted to the PLC and the PLC responds sends response messages based on the instructions received A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL COM is used to exchange data between the computer and the PLC The PLC answers automatically t
141. PLC Status Press the Error Clear button An error can be cleared by turning the power off and on in PROG mode however the contents of the operation memory except the hold type data will be cleared An error can also be cleared by executing a self diagnostic error set instruction F148 If the mode selector is set to RUN RUN will resume as soon as the error is cleared So if the cause of the error is not removed the error may seem not to be cleared 12 7 12 4 4 Points to Check in Program 1 Check if an extraordinarily large value or negative value was stored in the index register Example When a data register is modified using an index register RO F0 DTO 10070 In this case index register modifies the address of data register However it my exceed the addressable range of the data register depending on the data in 10 If the value exceeds the range operation error will occur The same is true when the contents of IO are a negative value 2 Is there any data which cannot be converted using BCD lt gt BIN data conversion Example When BCD to BIN conversion is attempted RO _ F81 BIN DT100 In this case if DTO contains a hexadecimal number with one of the digits A through F such as 12A4 conversion will be impossible and an operation error will result Example When BIN to BCD conversion is attempted RO F80 BCD DT1 DT101 In this case if DT1 contains a neg
142. PWMH F174 5 PLS CH2 E475 SPSH F177 HOME instructions PLS CH3 R9124 to R912F PLS CHO Turns on the channel of pulse output during the control Turns on the channel of high speed counter during the control using F165 CAMO 166 15 F167 HC1H F178 PLSM instructions Turns off when the control is cleared or this instruction is High speed counter control flag Pulse output PLS CH1 using 166 15 F167 HC1R instructions R9132 control flag PLS CH2 Turns off when the control is cleared or this instruction is R9133 PLS CH3 completed R9134 to R913F A Available N A Not available 15 20 15 1 3 Table of Special Data Registers for FPOR FPOR A Available N A Not available ing Self diagnostic error The self diagnostic error code is stored here DT90000 code when a Self diagnostic error occurs DT9000 DT90002 0790003 Notused DT90004 DT90005 DT90006 DT90007 DT90008 0790009 Notused J 2 NA NA When the state of installation of FPO expansion unit has changed since the power was turned on the bit corresponding to Extension right side the unit No will turn on Monitor using binary DT90010 I O verify error unit display A N A 0 to 3 15 11 3210 Bit No 3210 Unit No ON 1 Error OFF 0 Normal 0190011 Notused A A NA NA DT90012
143. Panasonic PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER FPOR User s Manual ARCT1F475E 1 2009 09 panasonic electric works net ac Panasonic Electric Works Safety Precautions Observe the following notices to ensure personal safety or to prevent accidents To ensure that you use this product correctly read this User s Manual thoroughly before use Make sure that you fully understand the product and information on safety This manual uses two safety flags to indicate different levels of danger WARNING If critical situations that could lead to user s death or serious injury is assumed by mishandling of the product Always take precautions to ensure the overall safety of your system so that the whole system remains safe in the event of failure of this product or other external factor Do not use this product in areas with inflammable gas It could lead to an explosion Exposing this product to excessive heat or open flames could cause damage to the lithium battery or other electronic parts Battery may explode if mistreated Do not recharge disassemble or dispose of fire CAUTION If critical situations that could lead to user s injury or only property damage is assumed by mishandling of the product To prevent excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation use this product at the values less than the maximum of the characteristics and performance that are assured in these specifications Do not dismantle or remodel the product
144. Position control Trigger starting request Pulse output instruction flag To change the target speed keep the trigger ON 8 30 8 4 7 JOG Positioning 1 F171 Instruction This instruction performs the deceleration stop outputting the specified number of pulses with the target speed being changed when the position control starting input is input externally or the position control start is requested internally during the pulse output Two target speeds can be specified RO H DF F1 DMV H10110000 DTO 1 Pulses output from YO at an initial soeed 1 DMV K1000 DT2 1 of 1000 Hz target speed of 7000 Hz F1 DMV K7000 an acceleration time of 300 ms F1 DMV K300 DT6 During the pulse output the number of 1 pulses specified for the target value will be output with the speed being changed to the F1 DMV K450 DT12 1 target speed 2 from the time that the position F1 DMV 100000 0114 1 control start is requested the fie A deceleration stop will be performed a eA as When this program ie executed the E DF MV H140 0790052 positioning table and the pulse output TODAS NONEM I start request diagram will be as shown below F1 DMV K10000 DT8 F1 DMV K150 DT10 Position control Positioning data table JOG positioning type 1 SOHO Cone Incremental CW CCW DT2 1000 Hz DT4 7000
145. R9009 reset PCLC Description Steps FP e FPO FPOR 2 25 105 amp tb F142 Watching WDT The time allowable scan time for the P142 dog timer PWDT system 1 dog timer is x x x x x update changed to S x 0 1 ms for that scan Partial I O IORF D1 D2 Updates the I O from the number update PIORF specified by D1 to the number specified by D2 Serial data TRNS port received flag R9038 is communica set to off to enable reception tion control Beginning at S bytes of the data registers are sent from the Data send 51 52 Sends the data to another station in the pag SEND DLN network MEWNET Maium S1 S2 Receives the data to another station x x P146 PRECV in the network MEWNET via link unit i Data send 61 52 Sends the data to the slave station as x x fol the MOD bus master via port amp 2 F146 Data receive ae S2 Receives the data from the slave station fo fat eae as the MOD bus master via COM port 2 F145 Data send SEND Sr 52 Sends the data to the slave station of the x xlo A P145 MOD bus master type Il 3 Sad bora inal OCHRE me of the MOD bus master type ll 3 send ES Sends the data to the slave station as the MEWTOCOL master
146. Receiving data Data can be received when the reception done flag is off The received data is stored in the receive buffe specified by the system register When the reception of the data is completed the terminator is received the reception done flag R9038 turns on and subsequently receiving data is prohibited To receive the next data execute the F144 TRNS instruction and turn the reception done flag R9038 off to clear the number of received bytes to O To receive data continuously without sending data clear the number of transmitted bytes to 0 set n to K0 and then execute the F144 TRNS instruction udi Reference Programming Manual ARCT1F353E gt 1 36 Setting Communication Parameters Confirm that the model of the programming tool is FPO Usable communication port COM port RS232C port COM port RS232C port settings Dialog box of PLC system register setting Hold Non hold Action on Error No 412 Port Selection General Communication Time High Speed Counter No 413 Communication Format No 414 Baudrate Interrupt Input sBs 90 Parity Check Odd No 415 Unit No Stop Bit 1 1 Y Terminator 41 iode m En abled Header STX not exist No 417 Receive Buffer Starting amp ddress DT 0 0 1659 418 Receive Capacity 1660 0 1660 Cancel Initialize 412 Communication mode Selec
147. S 1 pit data in the comparative condition S1 1 51 lt 52 1 52 type real uli lt gt 51 52 5 _ number Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 STF lt 2 81 52 9 9 9 two lt LE 7 1 pit data in the comparative condition S1 1 51 lt 52 1 52 51 1 51 52 1 52 Floating Connects a Form A normally open contact pF 51 52 4 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the x x O point comparative condition 51 1 S1 S2 1 52 type real Connects a Form A normally open contact Fc S1 52 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the A A number L 1 comparative condition S141 S1 S241 52 xX X Ol wy ay TX data or 51 1 51 gt 52 1 52 open contact P 5 3 4 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the x x O AND comparative condition 61 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 gt Connects a Form A normally open contact gt 51 52 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the L 1 comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 mm pans 1 or S141 1 S2 1 S2 ANFe Connects a Form A normally open contact _Fs 51 52 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the X X O x x comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 52 M Ne lt Connects a Form A normally open contact F 51 52 serially by comp
148. T T32P 32 T32CP Differences between the specifications of FPO compatibility mode and FPO Basically the FPO programs do not need to be modified to activate the FPO programs in the FPO compatibility mode however as for the following items the specifications are different Check the contents and change the programs if necessary 1 P13 PICWT instruction specifications EEPROM FROM write instruction The execution time of this instruction differs Depending on the number of write blocks the execution time may be longer or shorter No of write blocks No of words FPO FPO compatibility mode 33 blocks 2112 words Approx 165ms Approx 200ms 41 blocks 2624 words Approx 205ms Approx 200ms 64 blocks 4096 words Approx 320ms Approx 200ms 96 blocks 6144 words Approx 480ms Approx 300ms 256 blocks 16320 words Approx 800ms Approx 800ms 2F170 PWM instruction specifications PWM output instruction The settable frequencies differ Especially the setting for the low frequency band cannot be specified FP0 1 FPOcompatibiity mode H11 H3 48 203 J 96 167 X H6 206 1667 Error occurs 3 Data size of elapsed value and target value of pulse output and high speed counter The data size is changed FPO 24 bits FPO compatibility mode 32 bits 4 F144 TRNS instruction specifications Serial data communication The following 2 items in the specifications for sen
149. T110 F1 DMV K2000 DT112 F175 SPSH DT100 KO When this program is executed the positioning table and the pulse output diagram will be as shown below Positioning data table DT100 Gonirolicode i Linear interpolation Incremental CW CCW DT102 Composite speed Initial speed 2 500 Hz DT104 Composite speed Target speed 5000 Hz DT106 Acceleration time 3 axi A Positioning path Y axis CH1 2000 5000 X axis CHO 8 40 1y Control code lt H constant H 10 Fixed m Control assignment 0 Interpolation 3 Acceleration time and deceleration time K constant K1to K32760 Unit ms Acceleration time from the initial speed to the target speed and deceleration time from the target speed to the initial speed Specify the same value for the acceleration time and m Type deceleration time in the linear interpolation control 0 Linear interpolation 4 Target value K constant K 8388608 to K8388607 Output assignment When operating only one axis 0 Pulse output a In incremental mode set the target value for the axis which 1 Calculation only will not be operated to 0 b In absolute mode set the target value for the axis which Operation mode assignment will not be operated to the same as the current value 0 Increment 1 Absolute 5 Component speed m Output type assignment Initial speed and target speed of each axis
150. This goes on when the counter increments It Counter C corresponds to the counter number Special internal relay 224 points from R9000 Doy wen Tan Som Ob oN based on Specie conditions and is used as a flag Note Code for speciyfying 16 external input points as External input WX 110 words WXO to WX109 one word 16 bits of data External output 96 Code for specifying 16 external output points as WY Tig words ee Clo 103 one word 16 bits of data Note2 Code for specifying 16 internal relay points as Internal relay WR 256 words WRO to WR255 one word 16 bits of data Code for specifying 16 link relay points as one Link relay WL 128 words WLO to WL127 word 16 bits of data eee e Os Data memory used in program Data is handled Data register DT DTO to DTO to dd gram DT12314 DT32764 one wor This is a shared data memory which is used Link register 9192 LD within the PLC link Data is handled in 16 bit units word Data memory for storing a target value of a timer 1024 words 5 0 to SV1023 and setting value of a counter Stores by timer counter number Data memory for storing the elapsed value 1024 words EVO to EV1023 during operation of a timer counter Stores by value area EV timer counter number Special data register 440 words Data memory for storing specific data Various DT DT90000 to DT90439 settings and error codes are stored Index reg
151. YE 0 50mm 7 20 0 5 6 WH AWGH18 Al075 6GY Contact Co 0 75mm AWG 18 Al 0 75 6 GY 1 00mm AWG 18 Al 1 6 RD 2 AI TWIN 2x 0 5mm x2 AWG 20 for 2 pcs 0 5 8 WH Pressure welding tool for pole terminals Model No of Phoenix Contact Model No Product No Phoenix Contact Co CRIMPFOX UD 6 1204436 For tightening the terminal block When tightening the terminals of the terminal block use a screwdriver Phoenix Contact Co Product No 1205037 with a blade size of 0 4 x 2 5 Part No SZS 0 4x2 5 The tightening torque should be 0 22 to 0 25 N m 2 3 to 2 5 kgf cm or less Wiring method 1 Remove a potion of the wire s insulation 7 Insert the wire into the terminal block until it contacts the back of the block socket and then tighten the screw clockwise to fix the wire in place The tightening torque 0 22 to 0 25 N m 2 3 to 2 5 kgf cm Notes for wiring When removing the wire s insulation be careful not to scratch the core wire Do not twist the wires to connect them Do not solder the wires to connect them The solder may break due to vibration After wiring make sure stress is not applied to the wire In the terminal block socket construciton if the wire is fastened upon counter clockwise rotation of the sccrew the connection is faulty Disconnect the wire check the terminal hole and then re connect the wire Clockwise Counter clock
152. a PLC error occurs select PLC System Register setting under Option on the menu bar and click on the Action on Error tab The screen shown below is displayed PLC Configuration Untitlel No 20 Disable settings for duplicated output Time Link 0 0 Link 0 1 Controller input settings 5 Controller output settings PLS PwM Interrupt pulse catch settings Interrupt edge settings No 26 Stop when an operation error occurs Time constant setting 1 of CPU input Time constant setting 2 of CPU input Tool Port COM Port No 23 Stop when an 1 0 verification error occurs Cancel Initialize Help Example1 When allowing duplicated output Turn off the check box for No 20 When operation is resumed it will not be handled as an error Example2 When continuing operation even a calculation error has occurred Turn off the check box for No 26 When operation is resumed it will be continued but will be handled as an error 11 2 11 2 Troubleshooting 11 2 1 If ERROR ALARM LED is Flashing Condition The self diagnostic error occurs Procedure 1 Check the error contents error code using the programming tool Using FPWIN GR With the FPWIN GR if a PLC error occurs during programming or debugging and the RUN mode is changed to the PROG mode the following status display dialog box is displayed automatically Check the contents of the self diagnosed error Status display dialog box Status D
153. able by F1 DMV instruction only Writing in the target value area is available by F166 15 and F167 HC1R instructions only Note1 HSC CH5 a gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt lt lt lt lt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt E gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 15 36 FPOR Available N A Not available Address Description When HSC control is executed by FO MV S DT90052 instruction Control flag monitor the setting value for the target CH area is stored in each CH DT90375 HSC CH5 A N A 01903796 Notused f CNA NAA DT90377 Notused A3 A NA 79378 Notused NA 20790379 Notused 0190380 Control flag monitor When pulse output control is DT90381 o PLS CH1 executed by FO MV S DT90052 DT90382 PLS CH2 instruction the setting value for the output type only 0790383 PLS CH3 target CH is stored in each CH DT90384 DT90385 DT90386 Notusd 2 Notused Notused 0 790347 Notused Notused DT90389 Notused 15 37 Address DT90400 DT90401 DT90402 DT90403 DT90404 DT90405 DT90406 DT90407 DT90408 DT90409 DT90410 DT90411 DT
154. ads the specifications of the programmable controller and error codes if an error occurs Switches the operation mode of the programmable controller RUN mode lt gt PROG mode Register or Reset contacts monitored Remote control 7 4 3 Setting Communication Parameters Tool port COM port RS232C port The settings for baud rate and communication format are entered using a programming tool Note When the MEWTOCOL master is used also select Computer Link COM port only Setting with FPWIN GR Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Click Tool Port or COM Port from the left list Dialog box of PLC system register setting Tool port selection screen Contieuration Untitet x Hald Man hold Action on Error 1 Ma 413 Communication Format Time 410 Unit Mao Link V D 0 Ma412 Comm Char Bit Bits Lirik 0 1 Computer Link Controller input settings HSC ee Parity 099 Madem Enabled Stop Bit Terminator Controller output settings PLS PP Header 15 TX not exist Ma 115 Baudrate 8600 bps Starting address data received of j 4096 12314 sernal data communication made Bi Moz Buffercapacity setting for date recenyed ar de monas pial ti Za 0 2046 seral data communication mode el Cancel Head PLE Initialize 410 Unit
155. am and the FPOR data registers Image processing device Sending data using F159 MTRN Data is sent by transferring the data to Data register DT a data register and then transmitting it E using the F159 MTRN instruction i i Receiving data Data is received by transferring the data from the communication port to the data register specified in the system register as the receive buffer and then being stored there automatically Received data Sending and receiving data with the external devices is carried out via the data register Outline of operation To send data to and receive it from an external device using the general purpose serial communication function the data transmission and data reception functions described below are used The F159 MTRN instruction and the reception done flag are used in these operations to transfer data between the PLC and an external device Sending data Receiving data Data to be transmitted from the PLC is stored Data received from the communication port is stored in the data register used as the send buffer in the receive buffer specified in the system register DT When F159 MTRN is executed the data and the reception done flag goes on Data can be is output from the communicaton port received whenever the reception done flag is off Data Data register DT Data transmission using Data register DT F158 MTRN pr ranzmitled data Data
156. an be corrected without stopping the system It also supports Downloading during RUN function which enables to rewrite all comments and programs as well as Rewriting during RUN function which enables to change programs of a maximum of 512 steps Enhanced security It supports the 8 digit password alphameric and upload protection function and the security has been tightened more Facilitates program development and management The FPOR fully supports our Programming tool software FPWIN Pro Using FPWIN Pro enables partializing structuring programs or multiplingual programming and it enables to achieve more efficient program development and program management FPO compatibility The FPO compatibility mode enables the programs that have been used on the existing model FPO to be activated on the FPOR as they are Also the shape and terminal layout is the same as the FPO therefore there is no need to review the installation place or to change the wiring 1 2 Unit Types 1 2 1 FPOR Control Units Bou Specifications COM No of I O Product No ints supply po voltage Terminal 16k D DOSE 24V 24VDC Relayoutput block E Pree Input 6 points Molex Output 4 points B eges AFPORC10RM C10 connector 10 points Terminal Available AFPORC10CRS 16k 24V 24V DC Relay output block Input 6 points PAS Output 4 points 2 SOOTY 2 Available AFPORC10CRM connector Terminal 16k 24VDC Relay out
157. and click on the Settings button Set PLC password dialog box Home Settings Current status Password is not set Close Available retry counts 3 counts digit number 4 digits Hex 8 digits alphanumeric Match case Help Operation Mode Access Protect Unprotect 8 digits password Enter in alphanumeric oce Setting for FP memory loader option Allow the download in case of same password Set that PLC cannot be uploaded Using FPWIN Pro 1 Select Security Settings under Online on the menu bar 2 The security setting dialog box shown below is displayed Input the password in the field of PLC access and click the Login button Security Settings Security Settings Status Information Password protection Password retry count Upload Protection C Enable upload protection PLC Protection Password Please enter up to 8 characters Enter old password Enter new password Repeat new password FP Memory Loader C Enable upload protection dialog box Password set and user logged in 3 M Clear Protection Allow download to PLC only if password in the PLC is the same PLC Access Please enter up to 8 characters Enter password 11 2 6 PROG Mode does not Change to RUN Condition A syntax error or a self diagnosed error th
158. aring two 32 bit data in the L L comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 52 4154 or 51 1 S1 S2 1 S2 Connects Form normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the point comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 type real Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the number comparative condition S1 1 S1 S241 S2 data or S14 1 51 gt 2 1 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact in 81 82 J parallel by comparing two 32 bit data the OR comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the A A OET Floating comparative condition 51 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 or S141 51 52 1 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in EEI parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the E E i comparative condition 51 1 1 lt 2 1 S2 or S14 1 51 52 1 52 Available X Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP X V1 10 or later and FPX 32k type 15 47 15 3 Table of High level Instructions The high level instructions are expressed by the prefixes F o
159. ased up donw i input Shift Shifts one bit of 16 bit word internal register ift relay WR data to the left Left right F119 i EE Shifts one bit of 16 bit data range shift LRSR specified by D1 and D2 to the left or register to the right 02 Control instructions Master control relay Starts the master control program M e nH Qe Master control ama L Master M Ends the master control program control relay end J C CE Jump P The program jumps to the label instruction and continues from there Label LBL LBL BL Auxiliary F19 The program jumps to the label jump SJP instruction specified 5 and LEL n continues from there Label Loop LOOP The program jumps to the label LBL n instruction and continues from there the number of jumps is set in 5 Label L Break Stops program execution when the predetermined trigger turns on in the TEST RUN mode only 2 Available X Not available Not available partially 1 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when internal relay WR240 or higher is used the number of steps is the number in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the specified internal relay number word address has an index modfier the number of steps is the number in parentheses 2 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n in a jump instruction has an index modifier the number of steps isthenumber in parentheses 3 In t
160. at caused operation to stop has ocurred Procedure 1 Check if the ERROR ALARM LED is flashing 12 Example If the ERROR ALARM LED is flashing check lt 11 2 1 If ERROR ALARM LED is Flashing gt Procedure 2 Execute a total check FPWIN GR or check compile FPWIN Pro to determine the location of the syntax error Using FPWIN GR Select Debug on the menu bar and select Totally check program Click on the Execute button in the total check dialog box Using FPWIN Pro Select Compile All under Project or Check under Object on the menu bar As the dialog box is displayed check the contents Chapter 12 Precautions During Programming 12 1 Use of Duplicated Output 12 1 1 Duplicated Output What is duplicated output Duplicated output refers to repeatedly specifying the same outptu in a sequence program If the same output is specified for the OT and KP instructions it is considered to be duplicated output Even if the same output is used for multiple instructions such as the SET RST instruction or high level instruction such as data transfer it is not regarded as duplicated output If you enter RUN mode while the duplicated output condition exists it will be normally flagged as error The ERROR ALARM LED will flash and the self diagnostic error flag R9000 will go on How to check for duplicated use You can check for duplicated outputs in the program using the programming tool
161. ative value or a value greater than 9999 an operation error will occur 3 Check if the devisor of a division instruction is 0 Example RO F32 DT100 07200 In this case if the content of DT100 is an operation error will occur 12 8 12 5 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method 12 5 1 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method Instructions using the leading edge detection operation DF leading edge differential instruction Count input for CT counter instruction Count input for F118 UCD up down counter instruction Shift input for SR shift register instruction Shift input for F119 LRSR left right shift register instruction NSTP next step instruction Differential execution type high level instruction P13 NOOR WD Leading edge detection method An instruction with a leading edge detection method operates only in the scan where its trigger execution condition is detected switching from off to on 1 Standard operation Trigger Operation of ON instruction m OFF Executed every scan 2 Leading edge detection operation Trigger Operation of ON instruction OFF only one time How to perform leading edge detection The condition of the previous execution and the condition of the current execution are compared and the instruction is executed only if the previous condition was off and the
162. atus Information RUN Mode REMOTE Mode u PROG Mode 5 BREAK Mode Break Enabled Output Enabled Step Mode Force Active PLC Message Interrupt Enabled PLC Message Station HOME PLC Memory Partitions Program Size Steps Basic Error Messages Self Diagnostic Error Operation Error B First Error Step 17 gt 17 Task 1 Last Error Step 17 gt 17 Task 1 Battery Error Battery Error hold Hardware Error Hardware Error Slot Status Verify Error I O Verify Error Slot Status Intelligent Unit Error Intelligent Unit Error Slot Status Self Diagnostic Error Error 45 3elf Check Operation Error Procedure 2 lt For error code is 1 to 9 gt Condition There is a syntax error in the program Operation 1 Change to PROG mode and clear the error Operation 2 Execute a total check function using FPWIN GR to determine the location of the syntax error Or execute a check or compile using FPWIN Pro to determine the location of the syntax error lt For error code is 20 or higher gt Condition A self diagnostic error other than a syntax error has occurred Operation Use the programming tool in PROG mode to clear the error Using FPWIN GR FPWIN Pro Click on the Clear Error button in the Status display dialog box Error code 43 and higher can be cleared e In the PROG mode the power supply can be turned off and then on again to clear the error but all of the cont
163. atus change is fed back to the programs of the other units and YO of the other units is set to TRUE J FPoR Commercial converter FP X A FP2 FP2SH FP X No 2 Link register 77 No 3 Link register No 4 Link register RO Fo mv k100 00 oof 119 No 1 Link register Link register A constant of 100 is written to link register LDO of unit no 1 The contents of LDO in the other units are also changed to a constant of 100 Communication port It is available for the COM port RS232C port only 1 39 7 6 2 Setting of Unit Numbers By default the unit number for the communication port is set to 1 in the system registers In a PC PLC link that connects multiple PLCs on the same transmission line the unit number must be set in order to identify the different PLCs The unit number is specified either by using the SYS1 instruction or the system register Note1 The priority order for unit number settings is as follows 1 SYS1 instruction 2 System registers Note2 Unit numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively starting from 1 with no breaks between them If there is a missing unit number the transmission time will be longer Note3 If fewer than 16 units are linked the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest unit number in system register no 47 Unit no p uu gt t E Dai Dr
164. bed Avoid overlapping send areas When sending data from a send area to the receive area of another PLC there must be a link relay and link register with the same number in the receive area on the receiving side In the example shown below there is an area between No 2 and No 3 which is overlapped and this will cause an error so that communication cannot be carried out Example of link relay allocations FPOR FPE FP X Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 TT WLO Mo 1 Receive area T Receive area No 2 Send area 39 _ 30 mmm Receive area Send area System registers No Name ae d ME Range of link relays used Starting No of word for link relay transmission 19021202132 Link relay transmission size Invalid allocations The allocations shown below are not possible neither for link relays nor for link registers Send area is split Send area Receive area send area Send and receive areas are split into multiple segments Receive area Receive area Send area Send area 7 46 Receive area Send area 7 6 5 Setting the Largest Unit Number for PC PLC Link The largest unit number can be set using system register no 47 using system register no 57 for PC PLC link 1 Sample setting 1st unit Unit no 1 is set 2nd unit Unit no 2 is set A largest unit no of 2 is set for each 1st unit Unit no
165. ble output permission has been selected For instructions which must be used in a pair such as jump JP and LBL one instruction is Not paired either missing or in an incorrect position error Change to PROG mode and enter the two instructions which must be used in a pair in the correct positions An instruction has been written which does not agree with system register settings For example the number setting in a program does not agree with the timer counter range setting Change to PROG mode check the system register settings and change so that the settings and the instruction agree An instruction which must be written in a specific area main program area or subprogram area has been written to a different area for example a subroutine SUB to RET is placed before an ED instruction Change to PROG mode and enter the instruction into the correct area Duplicated output error Parameter mismatch error Program area error A Available Note This error is also detected if you attempt to execute a rewrite containing a syntax error during RUN In this case nothing will be written to the CPU and operation will continue 15 70 Error code Opera Name tion status Compile memory Stops full error High level instruction Stops type error High level instruction operand Stops combina tion error No program Stops error Rewrite during RUN Conti nues syntax error De
166. by the following method Using FPWIN GR Select the Debug Totally Check Program the menu bar and click Execute If there are any duplicated outputs an error message and the address will be displayed Using FPWIN Pro If there are any duplicated outputs an error message and the address will be displayed when compiling programs Enabling duplicated output If you need to use output repeatedly due to the content of the program duplicated output can be enabled In this case change the settign of system register 20 to enable When this is done an error will not occur when the program is executed 12 1 2 When Output is Repeated with OT KP SET or RST Instruction Condition of internal and output relays during operation When instructions are repeatedly used which output to internal and output relays such as transfer instructions and OT KP SET and RST instructions the contents are rewritten at each step during operation lt Example gt Processing when SET RST and OT instructions used 0 to 2 all on This section of the program is processed as if RO are on This section of the program is processed as if RO are off This section of the program is processed as if RO are on The output is determined by the final operation results If the same output is used by several instructions such as the OT KP SET RST or data transfer functions the output obtained at the I O up
167. celeration time from the initial speed to the target speed 1 change time from the target speed 1 to the target speed 2 and deceleration time from the target speed 2 to the initial speed 4 Target value K constant K 2147483648 to 2147483647 8 31 Pulse output diagram Frequency TkHz No of output pulses LR6 4 Ni cue XE M gt Time 300ms i 450ms Trigger Position control start request Pulse output instruction flag 8 32 8 4 8 JOG Operation F172 Instruction This instruction is used to output pulses of the specified parameter from the specified channel while the trigger execution condition is on It is possible to change the target speed during the pulse output or perform the deceleration stop There are two kinds of control method which are type 0 and type 1 Using the type 0 disable the setting of the target value and using the type 1 enables the setting When using the type 1 even if the trigger execution condition is on the deceleration stop will be performed according to the target value uz When the trigger R1 is on pulses are output from YO at an DF F1 DMV H10000000 DTO ion E a a initial of 1000 Hz target speed of 7000 Hz tee acceleration time of 300 ms If the trigger R1 is off the deceleration stop will be LF1 DMV K300 performed with a decelerat
168. cessary for the connection with the FPWIN GR etc 6 1 3 Communication with Programming The following communication setting should be specified to perform the communication with a programming tool FPWIN GR FPWIN Pro using the USB 1 Display the Communication Setting window from the programming tool Using FPWIN GR Select Communication Setting under Option from the menu bar Using FPWIN Pro Select Communication Setting under Online from the menu bar Communication Setting lUntitlel E X Network type C NET RE232C port cows Cancel Baud rate Initialize Data length 7 bits 8 bits Help Step bil 1 bit C 2 bits Faiy papa aaa Man Odd C Even 0 Time out sec Parameter for automatic Baud rate Data Length Parity 2 Specify the communication setting as the table below Once the setting has been completed the communication with the USB becomes available Network type C NET RS232C COM port number allocated for the USB Baud rate The baud rate cannot be specified Even if any rate is selected the setting will be invalid USB2 0 FullSpeed Data length Stop bit Parity 04 6 1 4 Restrictions on USB Communication There are restrictions on the USB Communication For connection the FP
169. changed Note2 416 417 is the COM RS232C port No 420 421 is the tool port 1 1 communication with Micro Imagechecker Overview The FPOR and Micro Imagechecker A200 A100 are connected using an RS232C cable The results of the scan are stored in the data registers of the FPOR Communication mode General purpose serial communication Scan result 1012345Cn is received After the scan start code 5 has been sent from the FPOR side the scan result is returned from the Micro Imagechecker as the response Communication mode Mormal mode Micro Imagechecker 1 200 100 7 31 Communication format settings for Micro Imagechecker To set the communication mode and communication format settings for the Micro Imagechecker select ES SO under 5 ENVIRONMENT on the main menu and the set the following items Name Set Value Serial settings Baud rate 9600 bps Char DIE ue ceri 8 bits SIOD DIE 1 bit Parity None Odd Flow control None Serial output settings Output digit 5 column Invalid Digit Repl 0 Read End None Process End None Numerical calculation Output Judgment Output u Key Point If Del is specified for the invalid processing parameter zero suppression processing will be carried out on the output data and the output format will be changed Always make sure Repl 0 is specified W
170. check box input a Setting for FP memory loader option 3 8 digit password and then click Setting The setting has completed Unprotect Allow the download in case of same password Set that PLC cannot be uploaded This function is available only when a 8 digit password has been set 9 5 Table of Security Settings Cancel For the settings on the FPOR control unit Status of security set protection password password Upload protection 4 digitpassword Sets Cancels M A Available N A Not available Chapter 10 Other Functions 10 1 P13 PICWT Instruction Data registers of 32765 words can be stored and used in the built in ROM F ROM data area control unit using the P13 PICWT instruction Note the followings for the use 1 Restrictions on the number of writing Writing can be performed within 10000 times If writing continues for more than that the correct operation cannot be guaranteed 2 The power supply turns off when the P13 PICWT instruction is being executed If the power supply turns off during this instruction is being executed the hold type area may not be kept Also when the power is shut off during rewriting in the RUN mode the same event may occur 10 2 10 2 Sampling Trance Function 10 2 1 Overview The sampling trace function is available for the FPOR Using this function enable
171. check function automatically activates and eliminates the possibility of incorrect operation from syntax errors in the program When a syntax check error is detected ERROR turns on or flashes Operation will not begin even after swirching to the RUN mode Remote operation cannot be used to change to RUN mode Clearing a syntax check error By changing to the PROG mode the error will clear and the ERROR will turn off Steps to take for syntax error Change to the PROG mode and then execute the total check function while online mode with the programming tool connected This will call up the content of error and the address where the error occurred Correct the program while referring to the content of error 15 68 Self diagnostic Error This error occurs when the control unit CPU unit self diagnostic function detects the occurrence of an abnormality in the system The self diagnostic function monitors the memory abnormal detection I O abnomal detection and other devices When a self diagnostic error occurs The ERROR turns on or flashes The operation of the control unit CPU unit might stop depending on the contect of error and the system register setting The error codes will be stored in the special data register DT9000 DT90000 In the case of operation error the error address will stored in the DT9017 DT90017 and DT9018 DT90018 Clearing the self diagnostic error At the STATUS DISPLAY execute th
172. ck the wiring of the input devices Procedure 2 Check that the power is properly supplied to the input terminals e f the power is properly supplied to the input terminal there is probably an abnoramlity in the input unit Please contact your dealer e f the power is not supplied to the input terminal there is probably an abnormality in the input device or input power supply Check the input device and input power supply Check of input condition 2 Input indicator LEDs are on Procedure Monitor the input condition using a programming tool e f the input monitored is off there is probably an abnormality with the input unit Please contact your dealer e f the input monitored is on check the leakage current at the input devices e g two wire type sensor and check the program again Check 1 Check for the duplicated use of output Check whether the output has been rewritten using the high level instruction 2 Check the program flow when a control instruction such as MCR or JMP is used 11 2 5 A Protect Error Message Appears When a password function is used Procedure Enter a password in the Set PLC Password menu FPWIN GR Security settings menu FPWIN Pro and change it to the state to enable Access Using FPWIN GR 1 Select Set PLC Password under Tool on the menu bar 2 The PLC password setting dialog box shown below is displayed Turn on the radio button next to Access enter a password
173. codes written with an FO MV instruction are stored by channel in special However settable channels vary according to the models Refer to the table below data register DT90380 to DT90383 Position control request Note The output counting value of the JOG positioning 0 Invalid 1 Valid elapsed value area may be different from the Deceleration stop request 0 Invalid 1 Valid input counting value of the motor side if the Near home input 0 Invalid 1 Valid pulse output is stopped by the Continue stop of pulse output After the pulse output stops execute the home return The pulse output control is available when Count 0 Permit 1 Prohibit controlling the pulse output ch with RU UIT Rn a Te VRE 166 15 or F167 HC1R instruction Stop of Pulse output 0 Continue 1 Stop Note Clear of Pulse output control 0 Continue 1 Clear Pulse output control flag monitor area DT90382 DT90383 Reference lt 8 2 1 Table of specifications gt for information on the special data register Elapsed value write and read instruction F1 e This instruction is used to read the pulse number counted by the pulse output control e Specify this F1 DMV instruction together with the pulse output elapsed value area after the special data register DT90400 e f the F1 DMV instruction is executed specifying DT90400 the elapsed value will be stored as 32 bit data in the combined area of special data registers DT90400
174. compatibility mode Using this mode enables to use the programs of the FPO as they are In the FPO compatibility mode the programs except some programs can operate with the same specifications as the FPO Note The FPO compatibility mode is not available for the F32 type The speed of arithmetic processing in the FPO compatibility mode is the same as the FPOR so the timing for processing the program may differ from the original timing for the FPO program If you want to execute the program in the condition close to the original timing set a constant scan or insert a program that does not affect the external operation to adjust the timing How to use FPO compatibility mode Download the programs uploaded from the FPO or the programs that the model code is created as the FPO using an applicable programming tool for the FPOR A confirmation message will be shown on the tool and the mode will be automatically changed to the FPO compatibility mode Tools supporting FPO compatibility mode FPWIN GR Ver 2 80 or later FPWIN Pro Ver 6 10 or later Restrictions on switching to FPO compatibility mode For downloading the FPO programs to the FPOR in the FPO compatibility mode the model setting for the FPO programs should match the model type of the FPOR as the table below Model setting for FPO program Applicable FPOR model C10RM C10RS C10CRM C10CRS C14RM C14RS C14CRM C14CRS 16 C16P C16CT C16CP C32 C32T C32P C32CT C32CP T32
175. control instructions F1 Pulse output control instruction FO e his instruction is used for resetting the built in high speed counter stopping the pulse output and setting and resetting the near home input e Specify this MV instruction together with special data register DT90052 e Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again Example 1 Enable the near home input during home return operations and begin deceleration In case of CHO i HDF FO MV 110 0790052 D H 100 DT90052 In case of CH2 i HDF FO H2110 0790052 D Fo MV H2100 0790052 Example 2 Performing a forced stop of the pulse output In case of CHO ii MV 108 0790052 FO MV H 100 DT90052 In case of CH2 E HDF F0 MV H2108 0790052 FO MV H2100 DT90052 In these programs the near home input is enabled in step 1 and 0 is entered just after that in step 2 to perform the preset operations The output counting value of the elapsed value area may be different from the input counting value of the motor side if the forced stop is executed by these programs 8 23 u Key Point pulse output control flag area of FPOR 15 12 11 8 The area DT90052 for writing channels T 4 3 0 DT90052 and control codes is allocated as shown m the left figure Fixed at H1 PLS Control
176. copied to DTO R9038 DF Reception done detection The internal relay R10 is turned on when the reception done contact R9038 turns R10 D201 DT204 The contents of the four words from DT201 to DT204 R10 The received data in the receive buffer is read from the area in which it is stored i DT201 and sent to J eee Preparing to receive the next data 1 To prepare to receive the next data the i F159 instructon resets the buffer writing point and turns off the reception done contact 9038 F159 MTRM 100 data in the receive buffer is not cleared Starting from 07100 The program described above is executed in the following sequence 1 The data sent from external devices is stored in the receive buffer 2 The reception done contact R9038 is turned on 3 The received data is sent from the receive buffer to the area starting with data register DTO 4 The F159 MTRN instruction is executed with no data to clear the number of received bytes and to turn off the reception done contact R9038 The system is now ready to receive the next data in the receive buffer is not cleared Note Be aware that the reception done flag R9038 changes even while a scan is in progress e g if the reception done flag is used multiple times as an input condition there is a possibility of different statuses existing
177. ctuation of the voltage Procedure 3 Disconnect the power supply wiring to the other devices if the power supplied to the FP X control unit is shared with them e f the LED on the control unit turn on at this moment increase the capacity of the power supply or prepare another power supply for other devices e Please contact your dealer for further questions 11 2 4 Diagnosing Output Malfunction Proceed from the check of the output side to the check of the input side Check of output condition 1 Output indicator LEDs are on Procedure 1 Check the wiring of the loads Procedure 2 Check if the power is properly supplied to the loads e f the power is properly supplied to the load there is probably an abnormality in the load Check the load again e f the power is not supplied to the load there is probably an abnormality in the output section Please contact your dealer Check of output condition 2 Output indicator LEDS are off Procedure 1 Monitor the output condition using a programming tool e f the output monitored is turned on there is probably a duplicated output error Procedure 2 Forcing on the output using forcing input output function e f the output indicator LED is turned on go to input condition check e f the output indicator LED remains off there is probably an abnormality in the output unit Please contact your dealer Check of input condition 1 Input indicator LEDs are off Procedure 1 Che
178. cy q 1 Absolute Output type assignment 0 CWICCW 1 PLS SIGN Forward OFF Reverse ON 1 PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF TkHz No of output pulses 100 000 mom mom oum 1kHz i Rum M ne 2 Frequency Hz lt constant Time 1 Hz to 50 kHz K1 to K50000 Unit Hz 450ms 300ms 3 Acceleration time and deceleration time K constant Trigger K1 to K32760 Unit ms When using the type 0 Pulse output Acceleration time from the initial speed to the target speed and instruction deceleration time from the target speed to the initial speed flag zn When using the type 1 Acceleration time from the initial speed to the maximum speed 50 kHz and deceleration time from the maximum speed 50 kHz to the initial speed 4 Target value K constant K 2147483648 to 2147483647 Note the following characteristics according to the specified initial speed 1 When the initial speed is 1 or higher and lower than 46Hz the control up to the maximum frequency to the degree of 10kHz can be performed If the frequency is higher than that the speed error will be larger 2 When the initial speed is 46 or higher and lower than 184Hz the control up to 50kHz can be performed 3 When the initial speed is 184 or higher the control up to 50kHz can be performed The speed error around 50kHz will be smallest Change of speed during pulse output 1 With the t
179. cycles YF A Available N A Not available 15 12 WR902 FPOR Relay No Name Description Turns off while the mode selector is set to PROG tag Turns on while the mode selector is set to RUN R9021 Not used R9024 Notused R9026 Message flag Turns on while the F149 MSG instruction is executed R9028 Notusd R9029 Forcing flag Turns on during forced on off operation for input output relay timer counter contacts R902A Interrupt enable Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by the flag instruction R902B Interrupt error flag Sampling by the instruction 0 end flag When the sampling operation starts 0 LH 000008 trigger When the sampling stop trigger stops 0 or gee e flag When sampling stops 0 A Available N A Not available Turns on when an interrupt error occurs 15 13 WR903 FPOR Relay No Name Description R9030 Not used Turns on when the general purpose communication function is being used Goes off when the MEWTOCOL COM or the PLC link function is being used COM port communication mode flag Off Printing is not executed execution flag On Execution is in progress RUN overwrite Goes on for ony the first scan following completion of a rewrite complete flag during the RUN operation Notusd 2 936 Goes is a transmission error occurs during data communication Goes off when a request is made to send
180. d 2 Unit number The unit number of the PLC that processed the command is stored here 3 Text The content of this varies depending on the type of command If the processing is not completed 2 2 Pi here so that the content of the error be checked OR t If the read command was used the data that was read is stored here If normal Command name If error occurs Error code Response code If normal ASCII code H24 If error occurs ASCII code H21 4 Check code BCC block check code for error detection using horizontal parity The BCC starts from the header and checks each character in sequence using the exclusive OR operation and replaces the final result with character text 5 Terminator End code There is always a ASCII code HOD at the end of the message cS ae Note When reading If no response is returned the communication format may not be correct or the command may not have arrived at the PLC or the PLC may not be functioning Check to make sure all of the communication specifications e g baud rate data length and parity match between the computer and the PLC If the response contains an instead of a the command was not processed sucessfully The response will contain a communication error code Check the meaning of the error code Unit number and command name are always identical in a command and its corresponding response see belo
181. d Controller input settings HSC arity Controller output settings PLS Modem Enabled Stop Bit Interrupt pulse catch settings Interrupt edge settings Terminator Time constant setting of CPU Header STX not exist Mo415 Baudrate 9600 bps E Mo 420 Starting address for data received of 4096 9 serial data communication mode BT Mo 421 Buffer capacity setting for data received of 2048 serial data communication mode 57209 Cancel Read PLE Initialize No 410 Unit number The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 99 No 412 Communication mode Select the operation mode of communication port operation mode Click General communication No 413 Communication Format setting The default setting of communication format is as below Set the communication format to match the external device connected to the communication port The terminator and header cannot be changed Char Bit 8 bits Parity Odd Stop Bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist No 415 Baud rate setting The default setting for the baud rate is 9600 bps Set the value to match the external device connected to the communication port Select one of the values from 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 bps No 416 Starting address for data received For the tool port No 420 No 417 Buffer capacity setting for data received For the tool p
182. d counter can be changed by the setting of system register 5 The number given in the table are the numbers when system register 5 is at its default setting Timer 2 T 1024 points to T1007 C1008 to Memory area Timer Counter set value area N SV c i 23 gt m o Constant Floating point type F 13 9 13 4 Power Supply Unit and I O Link Unit Specifications 13 4 1 Power Supply Unit Specifications AFP0634 Item Description Rated operating voltage 100 240 V AC Operating voltage range 85 264 V AC Rated frequency 50 60 Hz Inrush current 30 0 or less Cold start 20000h at 55 C 13 4 2 O Link Unit Specifications 0732 Communication method Two wire half duplex communication Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system Duplex cable twsited pair cable or VCTF 0 75 2 x 2C lt JIS gt or equivalent Max 700 m when using twisted pair cable Max 400 m when using VCTF cable Baud rate 0 5Mbps No of I O points per one link unit 64 points Input 32 points Output 32 points Remote map allocation 32X 32Y Interface RS485 compliant Transmission error check CRC method Note Those numbers of points the numbers that can be used for I O link via a host computer and the network MEWNET F When setting the output of the I O link error flag to ON available it is 63 points 31 input poi
183. d counter function counts the input signals and when the count reaches the target value turns on and off the desired output e To turn on an output when the target value is matched use the target value match ON instruction F166 HC1S To turn off an output use the target value match OFF instruction F167 HC1R e Preset the output to be turned on and off with the SET RET instruction Setting the system register In order to use the high speed counter function it is necessary to set system register numbers nos 400 and 401 8 3 2 Input Modes and Count Incremental input mode ON o EDEMEN EELT ENER X1 X3 X4 X6 X7 Count epe 22 2 SENS F Two phase input mode increment input CW ON ae X6 ON TAR Fel ess X4 X7 _ Decrement input CCW i FS I X3 X6 ON sf Lee X4 X7 Direction discrimination og X3 X6 i X1 OFF X4 X7 E ER Increasing Decreasing he Decremental input mode ON M X1 X3 X4 X6 X7 cont 15 F Incremental decremental input mode FLELELEL X6 Increasing Decreasing Increasing Decreasing 359
184. d pulse output instructions maintains that state during pulse and to verify completion of an action The output from CHO to CH3 This flag is completion of linear interpolation operation the same for instructions F166 to is judged by the completion of each F176 operation of X axis and Y axis Pulse output control flag R9120 CHO R9121 CH1 R9122 CH2 R9123 CH3 Ca Note he above flags vary during scanning Example If the above flags are used for more than one time as input conditions there may be the different states in the same scan Replace with internal relays at the beginning of the program as a measure Flag operation when the instruction is executed Start Input up OFF Target value match Target value match Continuous data start up Execution um condition R9120 LI R9121 __ L 8 39 Linear interpolation F175 instruction The linear interpolation controls positioning with two axes according to the specified data table Execute F175 instruction for X axis CHO or 2 R11 Pulses are output from the X axis CHO and the Y axis 1 OF E i 1 so that the composite speed is an initial speed of 500 Hz the maximum speed of 5000 Hz and the F1 DMV K5000 011044 1 acceleration deceleration time of 300 ms The two axes F1 DMV K300 DT106 are controlled so that a linear path is followed to the F1 DMV K300 DT108 1 target position F1 DMV K5000 D
185. data using the COM port R9037 communication error flag F159 MTRN instruction COM port reception done flag during Turns on when the terminator is received during general general purpose purpose serial communication communication COM port transmission done R9039 flag during general purpose serial communication Goes on when transmission has been completed in general purpose serial communication Goes off when transmission is requested in general purpose serial communication R903A R903B R903C R903D TOOL port reception R903E done flag during Turns on the terminator is received during general purpose general purpose serial communication communication TOOL port uis Goes on when transmission has been completed in general transmission done 9 purpose serial communication Goes off when transmission is requested in general purpose serial communication flag during general purpose serial communication A Available N A Not available Note R9030 to R9030F can be changed during 1 scan 15 14 WR904 FPOR Relay No Name Description TOOL port Turns on when the general purpose communication function is being R9040 operation mode used flag Goes off when the computer link function is being used COM BOTE PEG von Whiletne PLC link 5 used link flag R9042 R9043 Monitors whether the F145 SEND or F146 RECV instructions can
186. date is determined by the final results of the operation Example Output to the same output relay YO with OT KP SET and RST instructions XO YO YO ON x YO lt gt YO ON X2 YO R gt YO OFF When XO to X2 are all on YO is output as off at I O update f you need to outptu a result while processing is still in progress use a partial update instruction F143 12 3 12 2 Handling BCD Data 12 2 1 BCD Data BCD is an acronym for binary coded decimal and means that each digit of a decimal number is expressed as a binary number lt Example gt Expressing a decimal number in BCD Decimal number 6 4 5 Each digit is converted to a binary BCD 0110 0100 0101 Binary coded decimal 12 2 2 Handling BCD Data in the PLC When inputting data from a digital switch to the PLC or outputting data to a 7 segment display with a decoder the data must be in BCD form In this case use a data conversion instruction as shown in the examples below BCD arithmetic instructions F40 to F58 also exist which allow direct operation on BCD data however it is normally most convenient to use BIN operation instructions F20 to F38 as operation in the PLC takes place binary Input from a digital switch Use the BCD to BIN conversion instruction F81 SS So Digital switch E eo BCD Conversion using F81 BIN instruction 1 9 9 2
187. different FPO The value in the hold area of data memory will be unstable FPO compatibility mode The value in the hold area of data memory will be cleared to 0 Chapter 1 Functions and Restrictions of the Unit 1 1 Features and Functions of the Unit Microcompact PLC which realizes high speed processing with large capacity memory Further high speed processing and large capacity has been realized with the same body size as the FPO Basic capability is as below and high speed processing is possible 0 08 s Basic instruction Up to 3000 steps of program 0 58us Basic instruction From 3001 steps of program Also large capacity memory is provided for the program and data register capacities so that complex arithmetic processing can be executed Program memory 16k steps C10 C14 C16 32k steps C32 T32 F32 Data register 12k words C10 C14 C16 32k words C32 T32 F32 Equipped with a USB 2 0 tool port The tool port supports USB2 0FullSpeed and it enables a super high speed communication with programming tools As a very large program of 32k steps can be downloaded in approx 5 seconds it enables more efficient program development Large capacity separate comment memory A separate comment memory area is equipped aside from the program area comments of 100 000 points can be stored Program management and maintenance is easy Also as the area is separated from the program area program development can be proceeded wit
188. ding data are changed 1 Processing of starting data of send buffer FPO Stores the number of unsent bytes every one byte transmission FPO compatibility mode Stores 0 after the completion of all data transmission 2 Restriction on the number of sent bytes FPO No restriction FPO compatibility mode 2048 bytes 5 F169 PLS instruction specifications Pulse output JOG operation The following 2 items in the specifications are changed 1 Operation mode and direction output setting process FPO 00 No counting mode is selectable FPO compatibility mode 00 No counting mode is not selectable Performs the same operation as the one when specifying 10 Incremental counting mode with not direction output 2 Pulse width specification FPO It is possible to set the fixed pulse width 80us or duty ratio FPO compatibility mode The settings are invalid and the duty ratio of pulse width is fixed at 25 6 F168 SPD1 instruction specifications Positioning control The specifications during pulse output are changed FPO Not count FPO compatibility mode Count 7 Real number calculation process As the accuracy of real number calculation has been improved the calculation result in the FPO compatibility mode may differ from the result in the existing FPO program 8 Process when a secondary battery is out of charge T32 type only If the secondary battery installed in the T32 type is out of charge the next power on process will be
189. e error clear Error codes 43 and higher can be cleared You can use the initialize test switch to clear an error However this will also clear the contents of operation memory Errors can also be cleared by turning off and on the power while in the PROG mode However the contents of operation memory not stored with the hold type data will also be cleared The error can also be cleared depending on the self diagnostic error set instruction F148 ERR Steps to take for self diagnostic error The steps to be taken will differ depending on the error contents For more details use the error code obtained above and consult the table of aself diagnostic error codes MEWTOCOL COM Transmission Errors These are error codes from a PC or other computer device that occur during an abnormal response when communicating with a PLC using MEWTOCOL COM 15 69 Table of Syntax Check Error Opera tion Description and steps to take status A program with a syntax error has been written Change to PROG mode and correct the error Two or more OT Out instructions and KP Keep instructions are programmed using the same relay Also occurs when using the same timer counter number Change to PROG mode and correct the program so that one relay is not used for two or more OT instructions Or set the duplicated output to enable in system register20 A timer counter instructon double definition error will be detected even if dou
190. e Online screen 2 Select or Upload settings under Tool on the menu bar The following display will be shown X Select Set that PLC cannot be uploaded UE Close Click Execute f iSet that PLC cannot be uploaded Release the upload protection by compulsion Help 9 4 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader The following two functions of the FP memory loader AFP8670 AFP8671 can be set through the FPOR Available for the FP memory loader Ver 2 0 or later Limited distribution function Programs can be downloaded only to the units which the same password has been set When downloading a program from the memory loader the program can be downloaded only when the program stored in the memory loader matches the password set for the PLC with this function enabled FP memory loader Program Password 01234567 Limited distribution function ON eee Download is possible FE 5 oe SE Password 01234567 Password abcdefgh Password None Upload protection setting function If this function is valid the PLC will be in the upload protection state by downloading a program to the PLC from the FP memory loader FP memory loader Program Password 01234567 n Upload protection function ON rs AALS gt Program 5 Password 01234567 Upload is prohibited FP m
191. e indefinite Relation between charging time and backup time 100 80 50 days at 25 Backup time Battery capacity recovery rate 0 8 16 24 48 72 Charging time h Backup time When ambient temperature is 70 C 14 days When ambient temperature is 25 C 50 days When ambient temperature is 20 C 25 days Predicted backup life When ambient temperature is 55 C 430 days When ambient temperature is 45 C 1200 days When ambient temperature is 40 C 2100 days When ambient temperature is 35 C 3300 days When ambient temperature is 34 C or lower 10 years The temperature when the power is off has little influence on the battery life 7 Precision of Clock Calendar T32 only When ambient temperature is 0 C Less than 104 seconds per month When ambient temperature is 25 C Less than 51 seconds per month When ambient temperature is 55 C Less than 155 seconds per month 13 5 13 1 3 Communication Specifications Tool port 4 Descption Transmission format Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Communication function Computer link Slave Modem initialization General purpose communication In the RUN mode only USB port 42 Deseptin O Standard Baud rate USB2 0 Fullspeed Computer link Slave COM port RS232C port C10CR C14CR C16C C32C T32C F32C 72 Deseptin O Half duplex communication Data length 7 bits 8bits Parity None Even Odd Communication format Start code STX
192. e between the values of the two points absolute value x 10 67 us Elapsed time between the two points Note The exact value is 10 67 us DT90017 DT90018 DT90019 DT90021 Note1 It is renewed once at the beginning of each one scan Note2 As DT90020 is renewed even if FO MV DT90020 and D instruction is being executed it can be used to measure the block time 15 22 FPOR Available N A Not available RR The current scan time is stored here Scan Scan time current time Is calculated using the formula DT90022 value 9 Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1 ms Example K50 indicates 5 ms The minimum scan time is stored here Scan Scan time minimum time Is calculated using the formula DT90023 value No Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1 ms Example K50 indicates 5 ms The maximum scan time is stored here The Scan time maximum scan time is calculated using the formula DT90024 value No Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1 ms Example K125 indicates 12 5 ms The mask conditions of interrupts using the instruction can be stored here Monitor using Mask condition binary display 0025 Monitoring register 5 4 7 ee INTO to 11 3 0 INT No interrupt disabled 1 interrupt enabled 0790026 Notused J The value set by instruction is stored DT90027 terval INT24 periodical interrupt is not used A
193. e cata area Writes data to a data area Register or Reset data monitored Registers the data to be monitored Monitorina start Monitors a registered contact or data using the 9 Embeds the areaof a specified range 16 Preset contact area fill command SC Pese ge point on and off pattern Wri h h f Preset data area fill command SD rites the same contents to the data area of a specified range Read system register IRR Reads the contents of a system register Write system register opecifies the contents of a system register Read the status of PLC Reads the specifications of the programmable controller and error codes if an error occurs Switches the operation mode of the Remote control programmable controller Aborts communication Read contact area Write contact area 15 81 15 6 Hexadecimal Binary BCD BCD data 15 82 OIN O OO PWN 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00000010 00000011 00000100 00000101 00000110 00000111 00001000 00001001 00001010 00001011 00001100 00001101 00001110 00001111 00010000 00010001 00010010 00010011 00010100 00010101 00010110 00010111 00011000
194. e control up to 50kHz can be performed 3 When the initial speed is 184 or higher the control up to 2 can be performed The speed error around 50kHz will be smallest Change of speed during pulse output 1 If the target value is set to a value larger than 50kHz it will be corrected to 5OkHz 2 If the elapsed value crosses over the acceleration forbidden area starting position during accelerating acceleration cannot be performed For information on the acceleration forbidden area starting position check with the special registers from DT90400 3 For deceleration the speed cannot be lower than the deceleration minimum speed For information on the deceleration minimum speed check with the special registers from DT90400 Explanation of pulse output operation Pulses are output using a duty of 25 fixedly When outputting with the PULSE SIGN method pulses will be output approx 300us later after the output of direction signal The characteristics of a motor driver is considered 8 29 Pulse output diagram when the target speed is not changed Frequency 7kHz No of output pulses 100 000 1kHz Position control Trigger starting request Pulse output instruction flag To change the target speed keep the trigger ON Pulse output diagram when the target speed is changed Frequency 7kHz No of output pulses 100 000 1kHz ime
195. e different depending on the units Regarding I O number Specifying X and Y numbers On the FPOR the same numbers are used for input and output Example te gt The same numbers are used for input and output Expression of numbers for input output relays Since input relay X and output relay Y are handled in units of 16 points they are expressed as a combination of decimal and hexadecimal numbers as shown below X Decimal 1 2 3 9 Hexadecimal 1 2 Bec 9 A B F 4 2 1 0 Allocation for Control Unit 4 2 1 Numbers of FPOR Control Unit The I O allocation of FPOR control unit is fixed Type of control unit Number of allocation O number C10 Input 6 point to X5 Output 4 points YO to Y3 Input 8 points to X7 Output 6 points YO to Y5 Input 8 points to X7 Output 8 points YO to Y7 C32 T32 F32 Input 16 points XO to XF Output 16 points YO to YF 4 3 4 3 Numbers of FPO Expansion Unit numbers do not need to be set as I O allocation is automatically performed when an expansion unit is added The I O allocation of expansion unit is determined by the installation location Number of Expansion Expansion Expansion d allocation unit 1 unit 2 unit 3 FPO E8X Input 8 points X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67 FPO EBR Input 4 points X20 to X23 X40to X43 X60 to X63 Output 4 points Y20 to Y23 40 to Y43 Y60 to Y63 FPO
196. e instruction Also more than one sampling can be executed in one scan Timing for the execution of the F155 SMPL instruction can be set by the ladder sequence Note It is not possible to activate the sampling at regular time intervals and the sampling by the F155 SMPL instruction simultaneously How to stop sampling Methods of the stop trigger request Following two methods are available 1 Deactivate request by the tool software 2 Deactivate request by the F156 STRG instruction If the stop trigger activates the PLC will continue to take samplings for the specified number of delay and then stop the sampling operation Once the sampling operation stops the data will be automatically retrieved by the tool software and will be indicated in a time chart It is possible to adjust whether to see before or after the trigger point by the setting of the number of delay Operation image of sampling trace Trace memory PLC N sampling data Back to the biginning If exceeding the area 10 2 3 How to Use Sampling Trace Eu Aue Lou ff FPWIN GR Untitle1 2 Monitoring Time Chart ig File View Online Settings Option Help 8 x e SFE uo Comment 2 Remark FP216K Online PLO REMOTE RUN Monitor stopping Home FREE Sampling Times 1000 Times Sampling Rate 100ns Delay mames 100 Times Sampling data display
197. e temperature is 25 C Limiations on number of simultaneous input on points Keep the number of input points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature T32 16 Number of points per commen which are simulta neous on at 24 V DC at 26 4 V DC Ambient Temperature Circuit diagram xn Internal circuit COM 1 9 1 2 1 2 2 2 Output Specifications Transistor output specifications For C32 T32 2 16 points common 0 1 ms or less Load current 0 5 mA or more Response time ON OFF 40 us or less Load current 5 mA or more OO came orks 00000 0 External power and terminals C32 T32 F32 60 mA or less C32 T32 F32 70 mA or less Limiations on number of simultaneous output on points Keep the number of output points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature T32 at 24 V DC t 26 4 V DC Number of 5 points which simulta neous on 424 29 Ambient Temperature Circuit diagram NPN M terminal Outupt terminal External power 8 supply 5 Load in p 8 Load power NS NE terminal a 24V DC a g
198. e three functions available when using the high speed counter built into the FPOR High speed counter function Encoder output is input to the high speed counter Roller Motor Encoder Inverter LEES STOP signal Tape lead wire Pulse output function Stepping motor Servo motor FPOR Pulse output CW Pulse output CCW Motor a UL driver 1 Pulse output CW zB RR Pulse output CCW Motor UUL driver 2 stepping motor Servo motor PWM output function G When you increase the pulse width 1 Heating increases G When you decrease it Heating decreases The high speed counter function counts external inputs such as those from sensors or encoders When the count reaches the target value this function turns on off the desired output Combined with a commercially available motor driver the function enables positioning control With the exclusive instruction you can perform trapezoidal control home return and JOG operation By using the exclusive instruction the PWM output function enables a pulse output of the desired duty ratio 8 1 2 Performance of Built in High speed Counter Number of Channel e There are six channels for the built in high speed counter e The channel number allocated for the high speed counter will change depending on the function being used Counting range 2 147 483 64
199. e to check 2 When boolean mode A ladder editing is cleared Set it to the offline edit mode and carry out the editing operation again After the operation change to the online edit mode to check When the timeout error occurs using the through mode in GT series programmable display Extend the timeout time of the programmable display using the GTWIN The default setting is 5 seconds p SPELT x Select Transfer from File in the menu bar The Transfer data screen will open Select Condition to open Communication COM Cancel Setting screen Network type Baud rate 5200 bps Change the value for Timeout Click OK button to complete the change of setting It will be set as the following value automatically Data Length 8 Stop Bit 1 Even Time out sec Parameter For automatic setting Baud rate Parity 12 14 Cases where rewriting is not possible during RUN 1 When the result of rewriting is a syntax error lt Example gt When executing the rewriting which does not form the following pair of instructions 1 Step ladder instructions SSTP STPE 2 Subroutine instructions SUB RET 3 Interrupt instructions INT IRET 4 JP LBL 5 LOOP LBL 6 MC MCE Also rewriting is not possible during RUN in case of other syntax error 2 During the forced input output operation Interrupt restrictions When using interrupt high speed counter pulse ou
200. e values written to the special data registers DT90054 to DT90057 which are allocated as the clock calender setting area are sent 2 A value of H8000 is written to DT90058 Note The value can be sent using the differential instruction DF or by changing H8000 to 0000 Example showing the date and time bing written Set the time to 12 00 00 on the 5th day when the turns on C HDF Fo DT 90054 Inputs 0 minutes and 0 seconds _ Fo Mv H512 90055 12th hour Sth day Fo mv 8000 DT90058 F Setthetime 00000 j Lc ae Note As the value is unstable in the initial state write the value using a programming tool As a day of the week is not automatically set on programming tools fix what day is set to 00 and set the value for 00 Example showing the clock calender being used Sample program for fixed schedule and automatic start In the example shown here the clock calender function is used to output YO signal for one second at 8 30 a m every day Here the Hour minute data stored in the special data register DT90053 is used to output the signal at the appointed time R9010 ee ee ee ee eee F60 DT 90053 H830 f Data comparison instruction value of the special data register DT90053 pt c a M R900B RO RO TO YO 0 e c M
201. eck the contents of special data registers DT9006 DT9007 and locate the abnormal intelligent unit Then check the unit referring to its manual Selection of operation status using system register22 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at l O error the status display function I O unit Expansion unit wiring condition has changed compared to that at time fo power up Check the contents of special data register FPO DT9010 FP DT90010 DT9001 1 and locate the erroneous expansion unit It checks whether an expansion connector is in agreement Check the contents of special data register FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH DT90010 DT9001 1 FP3 DT9010 DT901 1 Selection of operation status using system register23 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at l O error the status display function FP e FPO FPOR FPX FP X FP2 FP2SH FP10SH A Available 15 75 tion Description and steps to take T gt lt status E LL LL LL MEWNET F A A Scan time required for program execution exceeds the setting of the system watching dog timer System Check the program and modify it so that watching Selec the program can execute a scan within the A dog timer table specified t
202. econds the 32 bit DSTM H s aH F output and R900D are set to Time constant EU the filter processing for the processing 1 S2 3 ij specified input Decrements from the preset value 2 Available Not available Not available partially 1 The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models 2 The allowable number of using the PSHS and RDS instruction depends on the models 8 For FP2SH FP10SH and FP X Ver2 0 or later any device can be set for the setting value of counter or timer instruction 4 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later 5 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when using Y1280 1120 special internal relay included L1280 or anything beyond for the KP instruction the number of steps is shown in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a relay number has an index modifier the number of steps is shown in parentheses 6 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when timer 256 or higher or counter 255 or lower is used the number of steps is the number in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a timer number or counter number has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses For the and FP X the number of steps varies according to the specified timer number or counter number 15 41 7 UP DOWN F118 UP DOWN supe Increments or decrements from the counter UDC preset value 5 b
203. ects a Form A normally open contact AND _ 575 525 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S12 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact fp 8152 7 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact _ 25 5 9 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 or 51 52 Connects a Form A normally open contact _ 5 9 7 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 lt Connects a Form normally open contact _ 852 4 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the 5 comparative condition S1 lt S2 or 51 52 16 bit Connects a Form A normally open contact in data parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition 51 52 Connects Form A normally open contact in OR 81 24 parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S12 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in 91 5 7 parallel by comparing two 16 bit data the comparative condition S1 gt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in 51 82 parallel by comparing two 16 bit data the comparative condition S1 gt S2 or S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the c
204. ed counter instruction 0 Continue 1 Clear Note In the reset input setting the reset Reset input setting Note input X2 or X5 allocated in the high speed 0 Available 1 Not available counter setting of the system registers are Count defined to enable disable 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Software reset 0 1 Yes High speed counter control flag monitor area DT90372 DT90373 CH4 DT90374 CH5 DT90375 Elapsed value write and read instruction 1 e This instruction writes or reads the elapsed value of the high speed counter e Specify this instruction together with the elapsed value area of high speed counter after the special data register DT90300 e f the F1 DMV instruction is executed specifying DT90300 the elapsed value will be stored as 32 bit data in the combined area of special data registers DT90300 and DT90301 e Use this F1 DMV instruction to set the elapsed value Example 1 Writing the elapsed value XT Set the initial value of K3000 in the high speed DF DMV K3000 DT90044 counter Example 2 Reading the elapsed value XT Read the elapsed value of the high speed DF F1 DMV DT90044 01100 counter and copies it to DT100 and DT 101 Target value match ON instruction F166 Example 1 XA If the elapsed value DT90300 and DT90301 F166 15 Ko 10000 7 for channel 0 matches K10000 output Y7 turns on Example 2 XB If the elapsed value DT90308 and DT90309 HDF
205. eed is 184 or higher the control up to 00 Fixed 50kHz can be performed The speed error around 50kHz will m Operation mode assignment be smallest 0 Forward Explanation of pulse output operation 1 Reverse Pulses are output using a duty of 25 fixedly Output type assignment When outputting with the PULSE SIGN method pulses will 0 CWICCW be output approx 300ys later after the output of direction 1 PLS SIGN Forward OFF Reverse ON signal The characteristics of a motor driver is considered 1 PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF 2 Initial speed target speed Hz K constant 1 Hz to 50 kHz K1 to K50000 Unit Hz 73 Acceleration time and deceleration time KK constant gt 1 to K32760 Unit ms Acceleration time from the initial speed to the target speed and deceleration time from the target speed to the creep speed 74 Deviation counter clear signal output time ms lt K constant KO to K200 x 0 5 ms Setting range 0 5 ms to 100 ms KO Not output deviation counter clear signal 8 37 Pulse output diagram Frequency 1OkHz Creep speed Pig rae aie E 500Hz F 300ms 450ms Pulse output instruction flag Trigger Near home input Home input Home return operation modes There are two operation modes for a home return with the FPOR Type 0 and Type 1 TypeO The home input is effective regardless of whether or not here is a near
206. either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue Anyway 6 The next message is shown and the installation of the USB driver completes Click Finish Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for E Panasonic Electric Works PLC Virtual UART Click Finish to close the wizard The installation of the USB driver has been completed 6 4 6 1 2 Confirming COM Ports The USB connected to the FPOR is recognized by the PC as a COM port It depends on your PC environment to which COM port the USB is allocated Therefore it is necessary to confirm the COM port number allocated Procedure for displaying Device Manager Displaying Device Manager Displays Device Manager when the FPOR is connected to the PC with the USB cable The display method varies depending on the OS in the PC to be used With Windows XP My computer View System information Click Hardware tab Click Device Manager With Windows 2000 My computer Control panel gt System Click Hardware tab Click Device manager gt Click View menu Device by type Procedure for confirming COM ports 1 Display Device Manager Device Manager Action View Help FFOR Computer Set Disk drive
207. emory loader Precautions when downloading When downloading a program to the FPOR from the FP memory loader the password thta has been already set on the unit may be changed Note the followings Status of FP memory loader Password setting for FPOR after download No password setting The password will be cleared 4 digit password setting The password will be overwritten with a new 4 digit password 8 digit password setting Limited distribution setting Off The password will be overwritten with a new 8 digit password 8 digit password setting The password will not change Limited distribution setting On The program itself will not be downloaded 9 4 1 Setting with FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the samte time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select Set PLC Password under Tool on the menu bar x 1 Select 8 digits for Digit number Curent status Password te not set Close 2 Check the functions to be used of Options Available retry counts 3 counts Eee se for memory loader digit number Limited distribution function grid Allow the download in case of same Operation Made password Access f Protect Enable the upload protection setting Set that PLC cannot be uploaded digits password 4 Em 3 After setting the above
208. ents of the operation memory except hold type data arecleared e An error can also be cleared by executing a self diagnostic error set instruction F148 ERR u Key Point When an operation error error code 45 occurs the address at which the error occurred is stored in special data registers DT90017 DT90018 If this happens click on the Operation Err button in the Status display dialog box and confirm the address at which the error occurred before cancelling the error 11 2 2 If ERROR LED is ON Condition The system watchdog timer has been activated and the operation of PLC has been activated Procedure 1 Set the mode selector of PLC from RUN to PROG mode and turn the power off and then on f the ERROR ALARM LED is turned on again there is probably an abnormality the FPOR control unit Please contact your dealer e f the ERROR ALARm LED is flashed go to chapter 11 2 1 Procedure 2 Set the mode selector from PROG to RUN mode e f the ERROR ALARM LED is turned on the program execution time is too long Check the program Check 1 Check if instructions such as JMP or LOOP are pgrogrammed in such a way that a scan never finish 2 Check if interrupt instructions are executed in succession 11 2 3 ALL LEDs are OFF Procedure 1 Check wiring of power supply Procedure 2 Check if the power supplied to the FP X control unit is in the range of the rating e Be sure to check the flu
209. er 1 1 must be installed to install the upgrade version Note2 Ver 2 0 can be upgraded to Ver 2 1 or later free of charge at our web site http panasonic denko co jp ac Use the latest version Note3 The small type can be used only for each series of FP e FP2 FPO and FP X Note4 If Windows 95 is being used a USB cable cannot be used for the connection Conforms to IEC61131 3 programming tool software FPWIN Pro Ver 6 Type of software OS Operating system Hard disk capacity Windows 2000 2 English 100 AFPS50560 iani Windows Vista Note1 The small type and upgrade version is not available for Ver 6 Note2 Ver 6 0 can be upgraded to Ver 6 1 or later free of charge at our web site http panasonic denko co jp ac Use the latest version of computer and suitable cable For the connection between a personal computer RS232C and the control unit RS232C D sub connector cable Type of PC Ss gusts PLC side connector Specifications Product No connector Female Mini DIN round 5 pin L type 3 m AFC8503 DOS V machine 0 9 pin Female Mini DIN round 5 pin Straight type 3 85035 Note A USB RS232C onversion cable is necessary to connect with a personal computer without a serial port using a PC connection cable For the connection between a personal computer USB and the control unit USB USB cable Use a commercial cable Cable type USB 2 0 cable
210. eration stop can be performed EET contol F174 _ control in accordance with the specified Enables the linear interpolation control by specifying the Linear interpolation F175 composite speed acceleration time deceleration time X axis target value and Y axis target value Homeretum 0 F177 Enables automatic home return operation The pulse output function be used with the transistor output type only Setting the system register When using the pulse output function set the channels corresponding to system registers 400 and 401 to Do not use high speed counter 8 4 2 Types of Pulse Output Method and Operation Modes Clockwise counter clockwise output method Forward Reverse Control is carried out using two pulses a forward rotation pulse and a CW CW pulse YO E f t F reverse rotation pulse Y2 fess es Incremental counting Decremental counting Pulse direction output method forward OFF reverse ON p Forward EE Reverse Control is carried out using one pulse output to specify the speed and Pulse Pulse vo another to specify the direction of Y2 rotation with on off signals In this OFF ON mode forward rotation is carried out when the rotation direction signal is OFF Incremental counting Decremental counting Pulse direction output method forward ON reverse OFF pe Forward
211. ers must be installed to connect the unit with the USB The installation procedures differ depending on the OS in the PC to be used Note For the PC with more than one connector it may be requested to reinstall these two drivers if the positions of the USB connectors are changed In that case reinstall the drivers With Windows XP 1 Turn on the power supply of the FPOR and connect the FPOR with a PC using the USB cable USB cable Commercial PC 2 After the connection the PC recognize the USB driver automatically As the following message is shown select No not this time and click Next Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by looking on your computer on the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web site with your permission Read our privacy policy Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software O Yes this time only Yes now and every time connect a device Click Next to continue 3 As the following message is shown select Install from a list of specific location and click Next Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for FPOR If your hardware came with an installation CD or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do Install the software automatically Recommended Click Next to continue
212. es depending on commands CRC 16 bits END 3 5 character time Differs depending on baud rate Refer to reception judgement time Response in normal status The same message as a command is returned for single write command A part of a command message 6 bytes from the beginning is returned for multiple write command Response in abnormal status In case a parameter disabled to be processed is found in a command except transmission error Slave address unit number Function code 80H One of either 1 2 or 3 Error code CRC Error code contents 1 Function code error 2 Device number error out of range 3 Device quantity error out of range Reception done judgment time The process for receiving a message completes when the time that is exceeding the time mentioned below has passed after the final data was received Approx 0 8 ms Approx 0 6 ms Approx 0 3 ms Note The reception done judgment time is an approx 32 bit time 7 54 Supported commands E Code Name MODBUS Remarks instructions for EP Name for FPOR master decimal original Reference No F146 RECV Read Coil Status Read Y and R Coils F146 RECV 02 Read Input Status Read X Input F146 RECV Read Holding Registers Read DT 4 F146 Read Input Registers Read WL and LD F145 SEND Force Single Coil Write Single Y and R F145 SEND iis aingle Register Write DT 1 Word Cannot be issued Loopback Test
213. floating point type converted data is stored in D 1 data D Available Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 21 or later FPO V2 1 or later o o o 15 64 Floating point type data to 16 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal point down to integer Floating point type data to 32 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal point down to Floating point type data to 16 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal point off to Floating point type data to 32 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal point off to Floating point type data round ding the first decimal point down Floating point type data round ding the first decimal point off Floating point type data sign changes Floating point type data absolute F337 P337 Floating point type data degree radian F338 P338 Floating point type data radian gt degree Boolean Description ne Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data with sign 11 the first decimal point down and the converted data is stored Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point down and the converted data is stored in D 1 D ROFF S D Converts real number data specified PROFF by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data w
214. format based on the MEWTOCOL COM communication procedures Data is sent in ASCII format The computer has the first right of transmission The right of transmission shifts back and forth between the computer and the PLC each time a message is sent Computer Transmission program Reception processing program Command message 4 The unit number of the PLC _ that sent the response 5 Confirmation of whether or not the processing was carried out successfully The unit number of the PLC 8 The type of command to which the command is 9 processed being sent lf the command was used to read data the data that was _ read 8 If an error occurred and the command could not be processed successfully the 2 The type of command 3 Any settings and data required in order to execute the command v content of the error The command and data are sent to the PLC with the specified unit number A response is returned and processed by the computer e g the computer retrieves the data that was sent Response message _ Check Termi 8 code nator Format of command and response Command message All command related items should be noted in the text segment The unit number must be specified before sending the command Header 2 Unit no of destination 01 to 99 decimal Text Content depends on type of command NENNEN 4 Check code hexadecimal amp Terminato
215. formation stored in the special data registers DT90053 to DT90057 can be read using the transmission instruction and used in sequence programs Special data Higher bytes Lower bytes Reading Writing Hour data Minute data DT90053 HOO to H23 HOO to H59 Available Not available Minute data Second data 01790054 HOO to H59 HOO to H59 Available Available Day data Hour data 0190055 HO to H31 HOO to H23 Available Available Year data Month data DT90056 HOO to H99 to H12 Available Available Day of the week data Setting of Clock Calender Function Setting using a programming tool Using FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the samte time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select Set PLC Data and Time under Tool on the menu bar Set PLC Date and Time dialog box Eat PLC Dane The above steps display the Set PLC Date and Time dialog PLC Hamre box shown at the left Input the date and time and click on the OK button Dais erem GD Tima Hele Using FPWIN Pro 1 Select Online Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the Shift and Esc keys at the samte time to switch to the Online Mode screen 2 Select Special Relay Special Data Register under Monitor on the menu bar 3 The screen will appear to set various parameters Setting and changing using program 1 Th
216. g forcibly Releaseing the protect of PLC Programs are retained xi Ashe dialog box is shown select as below RE Hone Digit number Current status digits Protect Close Select 4 digits or 8 digits Available retry counts counts Force Cancel digt number He Operation Mode 4 digits Hex Select Unprotect 8 digits alphanumeric Match case Ocala Mode 4 digits or 8 digits password Access Input a password to be set C Protect Click Settings 8 digits password Enter in alphanumeric Setting for FP memory loader option Allow the download case of same password Set that PLC cannot be uploaded xi The setting has completed A The protect of was released Note The protection cannot be released if the access is not allowed Executing the force cancel Programs and Security information are all deleted Em PLC Password Untitlel 3 Click Force cancel Click Yes If the current status is Password is not set this procedure has completed All programs and security information were deleted 9 3 Upload Protection This function is to prohibit reading programs and system registers by setting to disable program uploading If the upload protection is set note that the ladder programs and system registers will be disalbed to be uploaded after t
217. h the E button stop by the Trigger Break in the menu or stop by the F156 instruction FPWIN GR 2 Read Trace data Sure 7 Read Sample Trace Window Reading sample trace data Please wait for a while Reference lt FPWIN GR gt 10 5 10 3 Time Constant Processing The input time constants for 16 points of the CPU inptu to can be set by the system registers 430 to 433 If this setting is specified an operation like the equivalent circuit below will be performed By the setting the noises or chatterings of input will be removed CXn Input signal of Xn contact Xn Image memory of input Xn CXn Timer processing Xn Setting value System 5 register setting value Timer processing Xn Setting value System R register setting value Note he input signal of X contact is retrieved at the timing of the normal 1 0 update If the partial update instruction is executed for the input in the time constant processing the time constant processing will be invalid and the input status at the time will be read out and set The time constant processing can be performed for the input other than XO to XF add on cassettes or expansion units by the F182 FILTR instruction The timer instruction is not used for the timer processing in this equivalent circuit The time constant processing is invalid when the high speed counter
218. half Range of link relays used for PC PLC link 0 Oto64words Range of link data registers used for PC PLC link 0 01128 48 53 Link relay transmission size Oto 64 Words 5 Link data register transmission size 10 0127 words 5 Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET WO 1 to 16 PC PLC link Note The same maximum unit number should be specified for all the PLCs connected in the PC PLC link Link area configuration word word For L for 1024 points 154 half For PC LD for 128 words 1st half link 0 link 0 127 128 For PC L for 1024 points 2ndhalf For PC LD for 128 words 2nd half link 1 link 1 255 For link relay For link register Link areas consist of link relays and link registers are divided into areas for PC PLC link 0 and PC PLC link 1 and used with those units he link relay which can ben used in an area for either PC PLC link 0 or PC PLC link 1 is maximum 1024 points 64 words and the link register is maximum 128 words ae Note The PC link 1 can be used to connect with the second PC link WO of the FP2 Multi Communication Unit MCU At that time the link relay number and link register number for the PC link can be the same values as the 2 from WL64 from LD128 2 wal Reference For the information on FP2 MCU lt Chapter 5 Communication Function PC PLC Link in FP2 Multi Communication Unit Technical Man
219. hat However editing the files that are controlled with a PC can be carried out online using the programming tool Note that the programs will be broken if the programs are not absolutely matched When using this function store ladder programs as files without fail Unperformable operations on the FPOR set to prohibit uploading programs 1 Uploading ladder programs and system registers to PCs 2 Transferring programs to the memory loader The setting for this function can be cancelled using the programming tool however all ladder programs system registers and password information will be deleted when the setting is cancelled Note When cancelling this setting forcibly All programs and security information will be deleted when the upload protection setting is cancelled We cannot restore the deleted programs even if you ask us We cannot read the data of the control units that are set to prohibit uploading Keeping your programs is your responsibility Interaction with the password protect function The password setting can be specified for the FPOR that this function is set at the same time Also this function can be specified for the FPOR that a password is set 9 3 1 Upload Protection Setting The upload protection is set in the control unit using the programming tool Setting using FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to th
220. he FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number in a loop instruction has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses ojo o ojo 15 42 The operation of program is ended Indicates the end of a main program Conditional CNDE operation of program is ended when end ONDE H the trigger turns on EJECT I enl Adds page break fo ruse when printing 1 Step ladder instructions NSTL NSTP Clear step Clear multi ple steps Step end Subroutine instructions Subroutine FCAL call mm entry return Interrupt instructions o NN Interrupt IRET Output off type subroutine call 221 n4 2 return Interrupt ICTL DE ICTL 51 52 mmi ae The start of program n for process control Start the specified process n and clear the process currently started Scan execution type Start the specified process n and clear the process currently started Pulse execution type Resets the specified process n Resets multiple processes specified by n1 5 and n2 End of step ladder area When the trigger is on Executes the subroutine When the trigger is off Not execute the subroutine The output in the subroutine is maintained When the trigger is on Executes the subroutine When the trigger is off Not execute the subro
221. he MEWNET F remote falloff fe slave station I O slave station LII eme the trigger of this gt LII PSTRG instruction turns on the sampling a stops F157 Time addition 52 The time after S241 S2 P157 PCADD elapses from the time of 81 2 51 1 S1 is stored in 0 2 0 1 D CSUB 52 The time that results from substruction PCSUB E subtracting 824 1 52 from the time 8142 51 1 S1 is stored in D 2 D 1 D Serial port MTRN S n D This is used to send data to an communication PMTRN external device through the specified CPU COM port or MCU COM port MCU serial port MRCV S Data is received from external reception PMRCV D2 equipment via the COM port of x x x x x the specified MCU BIN arithmetic instruction 160 Double word DSQR 5 160 32 bit data PDSQR 5 gt 0 7 ixx i square root High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FPO FP e gt S O High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FPO FP e High speed MV 5 Performs high speed counter and counter and DT9052 Pulse output controls according Pulse output to the control code specified by controls S The control code is stored in DT9052 Change and DMV 5 Transfers S 1 5 to high speed read of the DT9044 counter and Pulse output elapsed 7 OQ GO N NN elapsed value value area of high speed DT9044 Transfers value in high speed counter and D coun
222. he backup battery for IC memory card lowers The BATT LED does not turn on Charge or replace the backup battery of IC memory card The contents of the IC memory card cannot be guaranteed The IC memory card installed is not compatible Replace the IC memory card compatible with FP2SH FP10SH MEWNET W2 MCU MEWNET W2 link unit or MCU Multi communication unit is not installed in the slot specified using the configuration data Either install a unit in the specified slot or change the parameter The error specified by the F148 ERR P148 PERR instruction is occurred Take steps to clear the error condition according to the specification you chose gt gt gt gt MANN A Available Table of MEWTOCOL COM Communication Error Error Description code E NACK error Link system error 122 WACK error Link system error 93 Unit No overlap Link system error Transmission format error Link unit hardware Link system error error 126 Unit No setting error Link system error S O 127 Link Link system error error 128 No response error Link system error 129 Buffer closed error Linksystemerror O 130 Time outerror Link system error _ 000 Transmission Link system error impossible error 133 Communication stop Link system error 36 No destination error Link system error Other communication Link system error error 140
223. he completion of deceleration With the type 1 the home input is effective only after deleceleration started by near home input has been completed R11 Pulses are output at an initial speed of 200 Hz a target EE RDN H oO speed of 2000 Hz and an acceleration time of 300 ms L F1 DMV K500 DT102 when the trigger R11 is on F1 DMV K10000 DT104 F1 DMV K300 DT106 When this program is executed the positioning table and F1 DMV 450 DT108 the pulse output diagram will be as shown below F1 DMV K2000 DT110 L F1 DMV DT112 F177 HOME DT100 KO 1 Positioning data table 0 DT100 Control code 1 Forward CW CCW DT102 Initial speed 500 Hz DT104 Target speed 10000 Hz DT108 Deceleration time DT110 Creep speed 2000 Hz DT112 Deviation counter clear signal output time 4 1 Control code lt H constant 22 72 2 Note the following characteristics according to the specified initial speed Mee 1 When the initial speed is 1 or higher and lower than Control assignment 46Hz the control up to the maximum frequency to the 0 JOG degree of 10kHz can be performed If the frequency is Control assignment type higher than that the speed error will be larger 0 Home return type 0 2 When the initial speed is 46 or higher and lower than 0 Home return type 1 184Hz the control up to 5OkHz can be performed 3 When the initial sp
224. he order RET SUB CALL Delete in the order CALL SUB RET Write in the order IRET INT Delete in the order INT IRET Item Operation of each instruction JP LOOP LBL FPWIN GR Ladder symbol mode A distance with the same number cannot be defined twice An SSTP instruction cannot be written in a subprogram Be sure to write the instruction for setting the loop number before LBL LOOP instructions FPWIN GR Boolean mode Writing and deletion of a single instruction is not possible for a program with no step ladder area Write or delete both instructions simultaneously in FPWIN GR ladder symbol mode In the case of an SSTP instruction only writing and deletion of a single instruction is possible for a program with a step ladder area Write in the order JP LBL or LOOP LBL Delete in the order LBL JP or LBL LOOP 12 17 12 8 Processing During Forced Input and Output 12 8 1 Processing When Forced Input Output is Initiated During RUN Forced set reset processing External input X External output Y omm am Input output update i Forced set reset processing Forced set reset processing Peripheral service 1 Processing of external input X Regardless of the state of the input from the input device forced on off operation will take precedence at a contact specified for forced input output in the above procedure B At this time the input LED will n
225. he register x 2 5ms The maximum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms The number of times the receiving operation is performed The current interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms The minimum inerval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90146 DT90147 DT90148 DT90149 DT90150 DT90151 The maximum interval between two receiving MEWNET WO operations value in the register x 2 5ms N A link 1 status The number of times the sending operation is DT90152 performed DT90153 The current interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90154 The minimum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90155 The maximum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms Area used for measurement of receiving DT90157 PC PLC link 0 status 2 for measurement of sending 15 31 FPOR A Available N A Not available Area used for measurement of receiving PC PLC link 1 DT90159 C PLC link 1 status Area used for measurement of sending interval MEWNET WO DT90160 PC PLC link 0 unit No Stores the unit No of PC PLC link 0 MEWNET WO DT90161 link 0 error Stores the error contents of PC PLC link 0 A N A flag DT90162 N A N A to DT90169 Duplicated destination for PC PLC inter link address are detected dur
226. hen outputting data to an external device numerical calculation is required so Output should be specified for the Numerical calculation parameter With the above settings the following data will be output from the Micro Imagechecker 1012345 Cr Terminator end code Results of numerical calculation No 1 Judgment output No 2 0 NG Judgment output No 1 1 OK Examples of connection Micro Imagechecker side FPOR side 3 pin terminal CHR Shield Cover FPOR side Micro lmagechecker side Mini DIN 5 gt Red 50 White 2 Yellow CS 4 8e DR 5 768 0070 2222 Grey ER 8 nea Cover 7 32 Procedure of communication In the following example the Micro Imagechecker is connected to the communication port Micro Imagechecker Start command 5 is sent 3 in send buffer gt 3 Data transmission with F159 MTRN R9039 off and 29038 off Receive buffer writing point reset E gt Start command S p tra Labs 5 Transmission done flag R9039 on 6 Transmission 4 4 52 result 10123458 is received e Reception done flag R9038 on Data read 10123455 e e O Data transmission with F159 Blank data Reception R9039 off and R9038 off Receive buffer writing point reset 7 33 Sample progra
227. here are any unitss that have not been added to the link the setting should not be changed as long as a longer link transmission cycle time does not cause any problem 5 51 instruction should be executed at the beginning of the program at the rise of R9014 The same waiting time should be set for all linked PLCs waiting time should be set to a value of at least twice the maximum scan time for any of the PLCs connected to the link If a short waiting time has been set there may be PLCs that cannot be added to the link even if their power supply is on The shortest time that can be set is 10 ms 7 51 Error detection time for transmission assurance relays The power supply of any given PLC fails or is turned off it takes as a default value 6 4 seconds for the transmission assurance relay of the PLC to be turned off at the other stations This time period can be shortened using the 5 51 instruction Programming example of SYS1 instruction gt SYS1 M PCLK1T1 100 Function Setting SYS1 to change the time that the PC PLC link transmission assurance is off from the default value of 6400 ms to 100 ms Keywords Setting for key word no 1 PCLK1T1 Permissible range for key word no 2 100 to 6400 100 ms to 6400 ms Note Enter one space after M and then enter 12 characters to be aligned to the right If the second keyword is 3 digits put 2 spaces and if it is 4 digits no space is needed Note The sett
228. home input whether deceleration is taking place or whether deceleration has been completed Without near home input With near home input Speed Home input ON Speed Near home Home ixi input input speed speed Initial speed Initial speed Home input is effective at any time Home input ON during deceleration Speed input ON Home Max speed input ON Y Initial speed Mi a adi 1 In this mode the home input is effective only after deceleration started by near home input has been completed The operation stops when the home input has turned ON during the deceleration operation Speed Near home input speed Initial speed OHz Home input is effective only after deceleration 8 38 8 4 11 Linear Interpolation F175 Instruction This insturction is used to output pulses from 2 pulse output channels to make a linear path is followed to the targe position according to the specified paramter while the execution condition is on Linear interpolation of 2 systems can be executed on FPOR Precautions when programming Special l internal relay Operations of relays The uses of the relays in the program Turns on during execution of pulse Use this to prohibit the simultaneous output instructions that include a linear execution of other high speed counter interpolation instruction and then instructions an
229. hout concern for the capacity of comment memory Enhancement of high pseed counter and pulse output functions High speed counter function 1 phase Max 50 kHz x 6 channels 2 phase Max 15 kHz x 3 channels Pulse output function Max 50 kHz x 4 channels Max 50 kHz linear interpolation x 2 systems All the channels for the high speed counter and pulse output be controlled simultaneously Supports various positioning functions Target speed change function 2 JOG positioning function JOG operation No of target pulses Speed change instruction Positioning start trigger 3 Deceleration stop function 4 Acceleration deceleration time individual setting function No of target pulses Acceleration time Deceleration time Deceleration stop trigger An additional unit in the lineup which enables the backup of all data without battery F32 type On the F32 type all the data memories internal relays data registers timer counter can be automatically held without battery Maintainability has been dramatically improved as there is no need to change a battery Enriching of various communication functions Supports PC PLC link supports MEWNET WO MEWTOCOL master function Supports MODBUS RTU master slave General purpose serial communication is available via the tool port COM port RS232C both Enriching of editing functions during RUN More useful functions are provided so that programs c
230. ime register24 AJAJA system error Selection of operation status using system to continue operation set 1 Operation became impossible when a high level instruction was executed Selection of operation status using system register26 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO The address of operation error can be confirmed in either special data registers Operation Selec DT9017 and DT9018 or DT90017 and error table 0790018 It varies according to the model to be used DT9017 DT9018 FP e FPO Error code FP2SH FP10SH Slave staiton connectin 4 9 Selec time error for The time required for slave station connection exceeds the setting of the system register 35 Selection of operation status using system table register25 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 to stop operation set 0 A FPOR FPO mode DT90017 DT90018 FP X FPOR FPOR mode FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Verification is possible FPWIN GR Pro error the status display function A Available 15 76 tion Description and steps to take status Error code S LINK error Occurs only in FPO SL1 When one of the S LINK errors ERR1 or 4 has been deteced error code E46 remote Selec I O S LINK communication error is stored table Selection of operation status using system register27 to contin
231. in the possible conversion range 3 Parameter error In an instruction requiring the specification of control data the specified data is outside the possible range 4 Over area error The data manipulated by a block instruction exceeds the memory range 12 4 2 Operation Mode When an Operation Error Occurs Normally the operation stops when an operation error occurs When you set system register 26 to continuation the control unit operates even if an operation error occurs Using FPWIN GR 1 Set the mode of the CPU to RPOG 2 Select the Option in PLC Configuration option from the menu bar 3 On the PLC Configuration menu select Action on error This displays system registers 20 to 26 4 Remove the check of system register 26 5 Press the OK to write the setting to the PLC Using FPWIN Pro 1 Change the mode to offline 2 Select Action on error from the system register table of the project navigator 3 Change the setting of No 26 12 4 3 Dealing with Operation Errors lt Procedure gt 1 Check the location of the error Check the address where the error occurred which is stored in DT90017 and DT90018 and make sure the high level instruction for that address is correct and appropriate 2 Clear the error Use a programming tool to clear the error When using FPWIN GR select Online gt Status Display the menu bar Execute Clear Error When using FPWIN Pro select Monitor
232. ing reception received data occurred occurred DT90180 DT90189 0790190 Notused J NA 79191 Notused J NA 0790192 Notused DT90193 Notused NA DT90194 DT90218 15 32 FPOR Available N A Not available I Unit No Station No 0 Unit No Station No 1 to 8 DT90219 selection for DT90220 to 1 Unit No Station No 9 to 16 DT90251 praca ae PC PLC redis 0790221 link ter 42 and 43 Unit DT90222 station System regis The contents of the system register settings ter 44 and 45 partaining to the PLC inter link function for No 1 or 9 0190223 System regis the various unit numbers stored as ter 46 and 47 shown below ter 40 and 41 S 0190225 link ep wets ter 42 43 ou Syst i Higher byte Lower byte DT90226 station rU i ter 44 and 45 a as 2 1 No 2 or 10 Sue DT90243 ystem 15 Unit Station DT90228 40 42 44 and 46 PC PLC Stem regi ae y er DT90229 link M nd Unit ter 42 and 43 A N A DT90230 station System regis e When the system register 46 in the home No 3 or 11 ter 44 and 45 unit is in the standard setting the values in System regis the home unit are copied in the system ter 46 and 47 registers 46 and 47 System regis When the system register 46 in the home DT90
233. ing should not be changed as long as a longer transmission assurance relay detection time does not cause any problems 5 51 instruction should be executed at the beginning of the program at the rise of R9014 The same time should be set for all linked PLCs The time should be set to a value of at least twice the maximum transmission cycle time when all of the PLCs are connected to the link short time has been set the transmission assurance relay may not function properly The shortest time that can be set is 100 ms 7 52 7 7 Communication Function 4 MODBUS Communication 7 7 1 Overview of Functions The MODBUS RTU protocol enables the communication between the FPOR and other devices including our FP X FP e Programmable display GT series KT temperature control unit and MODBUS device made by other companies Enables to have conversations if the master unit sends instructions command messages to slave units and the slave units respond response messages according to the instructions Enabels the communication between the devices of max 99 units as the master function and slave function is equipped About MODBUS RTU The MODBUS RTU communication is a function for the master unit to read and write the data in slave units communicating between them There are ASCII mode and RTU binary mode in the MODBUS protocol however the FPOR is supported with the RTU binary mode only Master fu
234. ion File register bank number change Over File register bank number change over with remembering preceding bank number Changes file register bank number back to the bank before F415 CBFL P415 PCBFL instruction Available X Not available Not available partially This instruction is available for FP X V 1 20 or later and FP 32k type This instruction is available for FPO V2 1 or later 15 67 15 4 Table of Error codes Difference in ERROR display There are differences in the way errors are displayed depending on the model Model ss Display gt FPOR FP X ERROR ALARM Flashes contunually lit Screen display Continually lit Error Confirmation When ERROR Turns When the ERROR on the control unit CPU unit turns on or flashes a self diagnostic error or syntax check error has occurred Confirm the contents of the error and take the appopriate steps Error Confirmation Method Procedure 1 Use the programming tool software to call up the error code By executing the STATUS DISPLAY the error code and content of error are displayed 2 Check the error contents in the table of error codes using the error code ascertained above Syntax check error This is an error detected by the total check function when there is a syntax error or incorrect setting written in the program When the mode selector is switched to the RUN mode the total
235. ion Untitlet 6 x Pic Hoe E RE Hone Upload status Password is not set Close Available retry counts 3 counts Force Carel Password Password not set 22 digit number Hel FP Memory Loader option status e 4 digits Hex digis alphanumeric Match case Allow the download in case of same password Invalid PLE cannot be uploaded Invalid Protect Unprotect B digits password Enter in alphanumeric Setting for FP memory loader option Allow the download in case of same password Set that PLC cannot be uploaded 9 2 Password Protect Function This function is used to prohibit reading and writing programs and system registers by setting a password on the FPOR There are two ways to set a password as below 1 Sets using the programming tool 2 Sets using an instruction SYS1 instruction ae Note Precautions on the password setting Do not forget your password If you forget your password you cannot read programs Even if you ask us for your password we cannot crack it 9 3 9 2 1 Password Setting Setting using FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select or Set PLC Password under Tool on the menu bar The following display will be shown Security informati
236. ion time of 450 ms However if F1 DMV K450 DT8 the trigger is turned on again it will accelerate to the target F1 DMV KO DT10 speed again R1 m F172 PLSH DTO LII LII LII When this program ie executed the positioning table and the pulse output diagram will be as shown below Positioning data table JOG operation type 0 Initial speed 2 1000 Hz Target speed 2 7000 Hz Acceleration time 3 Deceleration time 3 DT10 Target value 4 0 pulse 1 Control code lt H constant H 10 Fixed Control assignment 0 JOG Control assignment 2 0 Type 0 without target value 1 Type 1 wth target values 0 Fixed Output assignment 0 Pulse output 1 Calculation only Movement direction In case of Type 0 without target value 0 Forward 1 Reverse In case of Type 1 without target values 0 Incremental 1 Absolute m Output type assignment 0 CW CCW 1 PLS SIGN Forward OFF Reverse ON 1 PLS SIGN Forward ON Reverse OFF 72 Frequency Hz K constant 1 Hz to 50 kHz K1 to K50000 Unit Hz 73 Acceleration time and deceleration time K constant K1 to K32760 Unit ms Acceleration time from the initial speed to 50kHz and deceleration time from 50kHz to the initial speed 4 Target value K constant K 2147483648 to K2147483647 Note the following characteristics according to the specified initial speed 1
237. is detected Leading Connects a Form A normally open contact in edge OR ud Vul parallel only for one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected 2 Trailing Connects a Form A normally open contact in edge OR parallel only for one scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is detected Leading Outputs the operated result to the specified output only for one scan when leading edge of the trigger is detected for pulse relay Trailing Outputs the operated result to the edge out OTL output only for one scan when trailing edge of the trigger is detected for pulse relay Alterna ALT YRLE Inverts the output condition on off Tm time m gt the leading edge of the trigger is detected 444442 E Connects the multiple instruction blocks H serially 1 aia Connects the multiple instruction blocks in Eum I o eme Available Not available Not available partially 7 The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models 2 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later and FPX Ver 3 10 or later 8 In the FP2 FP2SH 10SH when using X1280 Y1280 R1120 special internal relay included L1280 T256 C256 or anything beyond for the ST ST OT AN AN OR and instructions the number of steps is shown in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a relay number has an index modifier the number of steps is shown parentheses For
238. is longer if there is one station that has not been added to the link As a result the PC PLC link response time is longer 5 51 instruction can be used to minimize thte transmission cycle time even if there are one or more stations that have not been added to the link 7 50 Reducing the transmission cycle time when there stations that have not been added If there are stations that have not been added to the link the time link addition processing time and with this the transmission cycle time will be longer 1 152 Tsn Tit Tso link addition command sending time Twt addition waiting time Tls link error stop command sending time Tso master station scan time With the SYS1 instruction the link addition waiting time Twt in the above formula can be reduced Thus SYS1 can be used to minimize the increase in the transmission cycle time Programming example of SYS1 instruction gt SYS1 M 1 0 100 Function Setting SYS1 to change the waiting time for a link to be added to the PC PLC link from the default value of 400 ms to 100 ms Keywords Setting for key word no 1 PCLK1TO Permissible range for key word no 2 10 to 400 10 ms to 400 ms Note Enter one space after M and then enter 12 characters to be aligned to the right If the second keyword is 2 digits put 2 spaces and if it is 3 digits put one space ae Note If t
239. is mode programming be done using a tool software Switching between RUN and STOP can be also performed by the remote operation from a programming tool When performing remote switching from the programming tool the setting of the mode switch and the actual mode of operation may differ Verify the mode with the status indicator LED Restart the power supply to operate in the mode set with the RUN PROG mode switch 3 USB connector Mini USB B type 5 pin This connector is used to connect a programming tool A commercial USB cable USB2 0 cable A miniB can be used 4 Tool port RS232C This connector is used to connect a programming tool A commercial mini DIN 5 pin connector is used for the tool port on the control unit Pin No Signal name Abbreviation Signal direction SignalGround 56 b o o Send Data SD gt External device 3 j ReceveData RD Unite External device Not used CNN Unit gt External device The followings are the default settings when the unit is shipped from the factory The system register should be used to change these Baud rate 9600bps Char Bit 8 bits Parity check Odd parity Stop bit 1 bit Note The unit number of the tool port should be set by the system register 5 Input connector 6 Input status LEDs 7 Output connector 8 Output indicator LEDs 2 Power supply connector 24 V DC Supply 24 V DC It is connected using the power supply cable AFPG8
240. isplay Untitlel Program Information Program Size Machine Lanquage File Reaister Size 1 0 Comment Size Block Comment Remark Size PLC Connection 16000 OK 1 Rest Of OK Of 0K 100000P Rest 100000 P 50001 Rest 5000 L 5000P Rest 5000 P PLC Type FPOR 16K Station Home Version 5806 Scan Time Condition Normal Min PLC Mode REMOTE PROG Max PLC Error Flag Self 1 Volt Dip D 140 Error zn Advance Unit 0 Self Diagnosis Error M Eror Code 45 0 4 msec 0 3 msec 7 7 msec PLC Mode Flag 170 RUN Mode Battery TEST Mode Hold Break Mode pe Err Break Enable Force flaq essage Operation Error Occurred OUT Refresh STEP RUN Message Remote External El u Key Point To display the status display dialog box select Status Display under Online on the menu bar Using FPWIN Pro Clear Error this d ialog box 1 0 Error Adyvn Err Verifi Err Operation Err PC link We link VE link Help If the error is an operation error the error address can be confirmed in With the FPWIN Pro the contents of the self diagnostic error can be echked in the following PLC status dialog box Select PLC status under Monitor in the menu to display this dialog box PLC status dialog box PLC Status CPU Type FPOR 16k C10 C14 C16 Version 1 06 Connection Link Unit No Network Scan Time Current 0 4 ms Minimum 0 4 ms Maximum 0 6 ms PLC St
241. ission command internal relay R10 is turned when the R10 transmission condition RO tums on eu F95 ASC M ABCDEFGH conversion The characters are converted to an ASCII code and written to DT101 to DT104 F159 MTRN DT 100 Starting from DT100 the contents of 8 bytes are sent from communication port K1 K8 r Data transmission The data in the send buffer is sent from the COMI port J The program described above is executed in the following sequence 1 ABCDEFGH is converted to an ASCII code and stored in a data register 2 The data is sent from the communication port using the F159 instruction Explanatory diagram 1 The characters are converted to ASCII Data register DT ers and the data is stored in the send buffer mm M 2 Data transmission using F159 MTRN IE External device 7 22 Explanation of data table The data table for transmission starts at the data register specified in S At the beginning of transmission the number of bytes to be transmitted is set 0 is set on completion of transmission Transmitted data Storage area The circled numbers indicate the order of transmission Use an FO MV or F95 ASC instruction to write the data to be transmitted to the transmis
242. ister 1 14 words 10 to ID Register can be used as an address of memory area and constants modifier Master control relay points MCR 256 points Number of labels 256 points JP and LOOP P Number of step ladders 1000 stages Number of subroutines 500 subroutines C10 11 programs 6 external input points 1 periodical interrupt point 4 pulse match Number of interrupt points programs Other than C10 13 programs 8 external input points 1 periodical interrupt point 4 pulse match points K 32 768 to K32 767 for 16 bit operation Integer type K H F 1 175494 x 10 to F 3 402823 x 10 1 175494 x 10 to F 3 402823 x 10 Note1 The number of points noted above is the number reserved as the calculation memory The actual number of points available for use is determined by the hardware configuration Note2 There are two types one is the hold type that the last state is stored even if the power supply turns off or the mode is changed to PROG mode from RUN mode and the other is the non hold type that the state is reset For C10 C14 C16 C32 The hold type areas and non hold type areas are fixed For information on the sections of each area refer to the performance specifications For T32 F32 The settings of the hold type areas and non hold type areas can be changed using the system registers On T32 if the battery has run out the data in the hold area may be indefinite Not cleared to O Note3 The points for the timer an
243. ite the data DT50 and DT51 2 words of the local unit to SST the address No H7788 in the unit number 07 from R1 F145 SEND DT 100 0750 H7788 K2 MV WRO 70 Sends a command to read the address H7788 in the unit number 07 from 1 and stores the result in the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit R2 F146 DT 101 H7788 K2 DT60 FO MV HO WRO 1 A Reference For the information on the F145 SEND F146 RECV instructions lt Programming Manual ARCT1F313E gt 7 59 Flow chart For Il Data initialization DT50 and DT51 is equivalent to DT60 and DT61 Increments DT50 and DT51 F145 Sends a data Sends a data Execute F146 SEND instruction write command read command instruction Turns RO off Completion The above program executes the operation 1 to 3 repeatedly 1 Updates the write data if the write data DT50 and DT51 and the read data DT60 and DT61 are matched 2 Writes the DT50 and DT51 of the local unit into the data No H7788 in the unit number 07 from the RS232C port 3 Reads the data No H7788 in the unit number 07 into the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit from the RS232C port 1 60 Chapter 8 High speed counter Pulse Output and PWM Output functions 8 1 Overview of Each Functions 8 1 1 Three Pulse Input Output Functions There ar
244. ith sign rounding the first decimal point off and the converted data is stored in D DROFF S D Converts real number data specified PDROFF by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point off and the converted data is stored in D 1 D FINT S D The decimal part of the real number PFINT data specified in S 1 S is rounded down and the result is stored in D 1 D FRINT S D The decimal part of the real number PFRINT data stored in S 1 S is rounded off and the result is stored in D 1 F S D The real number data stored in S 1 PF S is changed the sign and the result is stored in D 1 D FABS S D Takes the absolute value of real PFABS number data specified by S 1 S and the result absolute value is stored in D 1 D RAD S D The data in degrees of an angle PRAD specified in S 1 S is converted to radians real number data and the result is stored in D 1 D S D The angle data in radians real number data specified in S 1 S is converted to angle data in degrees and the result is stored in D 1 D Floating point type real number data processing instructions FPX Floating point P346 type data band compare I o Floating point type data compare FCMP S1 S141 1 S241 52 gt R900A on PFCMP S141 1 2 1 52 gt R900B on S141 S1 S241 52 gt R900C o
245. l relay which is off during the first scan and turns on at the second scan lt Example 1 gt DF leading edge differential instruction AD YO V Add R9014 XO R9014 RUN Power on X0 YO Even if was initially on the input condition for the DF instruction is off to on at the second scan therefore derivative output is obtained Example 2 gt CT counter instruction _ 100 VES R9014 XO R9014 100 RUN Power on CT100 counting operation Even if was initially on the input condition for the counter is off to on at the second scan therefore the count is incremented 12 10 12 5 3 Precautions When Using Control Instruction leading edge detection instruction is in a control instruction it will be executed only under the following condition The leading edge detection instruction was off when the execution condition of the previous control instruction was reset and the leading edge detection instruction is on when the execution condition of the current control instruction becomes on When a leading edge detection instruction is used with an instruction which changes the order of instruction execution such as MC MCE JP or LBL the operation of the instruction may change as follows depending on input timing Take care regarding this point Example 1 Using the DF instruction between MC and MCE instructions X0 0 0
246. l external fuses on every circuit in order to prevend the output ciruict to be burned out when the output is shorted However in some cases such as shortcircuit the element of the unit may not be protected 5 3 3 Precautions Regarding Input and Output Wirings Separate the input output and power lines Be sure to select the thickness dia of the input and output wires while taking into consideration the required current capacity Arrange the wiring so that the input and output wiring are separated and these wirings are separated from the power wiring as much as possible Do not route them through the same duct or wrap them up together Separate the input output wires from the power and high voltage wires by at least 100 mm 5 10 5 4 Wiring of MIL Connector Type Supplied connector and suitable wires The connector listed below is supplied with the unit Use the suitable wires given below Also use the required pressure connection tools for connecting the wires Suitable wires Twisted wire Size cross sectional area Insulation thickness Rated current AWGH22 L3mm Dia 1 5 to dia 1 1 3A AWG 24 0 2 Supplied connector AFP0807 Manufacturer and product No vum ee eei Works Co Ltd SmI COVEI Contact 7221 AWG 22 24 Pressure connection tool Manufacturer Product No Panasonic Electric Works Co
247. l port 9600 bits 8 04 bit port RS232C port 9600 bits 888 04 tit 7 4 Communication Function 1 Computer Link 7 4 1 Overview Computer link is used for communication with a computer connected to the PLC Instructions command messages are transmitted to the PLC and the PLC responds sends response messages based on the instructions received A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL COM is used to exchange data between the computer and the PLC The PLC answers automatically to the commands received from the computer so no program is necessary on the PLC side in order to carry out communication There are a MEWTOCOL master function and a MEWTOCOL slave function for the computer link The side that issues commands is called master and the side that receives the commands executes the process and sends back responses is called slave Computer Command message Resp onse message r L IEF Note It is necessary to set the system register of the communicatio nport to the computer link for using this function Both the master and slave functions are available for the FPOR however only the slave function is available for the tool and USB ports MEWTOCOL master function This function is to carry out the communication on the master side side that issues commands of the computer link It is executed with the PLC s instruction F145 SEND or F146 RECV It is n
248. le program Sets the communication port to COM1 the remote unit No to 01 and No of processing 0 words to 2 in the DT100 and DT101 Clear the WRO to send the write command first Clear the write data DT50 and DT51 Set the read data DT60 and DT61 R9013 Fo Mv DT100 FO MV H 1001 DT101 FO MV HO WRO 1 HO DTs0 1 HFFFFFFFF DT60 R1 is the transmission condition of write command transmission condition and 31 R2 is the transmission condition of read command R9044 RO R1 RO R2 Compares the write data DT50 and DT51 with the read data DT60 and DT61 before 39 sending the write command and updates the write data if they are matched R1 F61 DT50 R1 R900B sH 1 F36 D 1 DT50 Sends a command to write the data DT50 and DT51 of the local unit to the DTO and 95 DT1 in the unit number 01 from the communication port R1 F145 SEND DT 100 a FO 1 WRO 70 Sends a command to read the data 1 in the unit number 01 from the communication port and stores the result in the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit R2 F146 DT 100 FO MV HU WRO 1 d gt Reference For information on the F145 SEND F146 RECV instructions lt Programming Manual ARCT1F353E gt 7 16 Flowchart Data initialization DT50 and DT51 is equi
249. link 1 This relay goes on if a problem is detected during transmission 16 15 14 3 2 9 17 T 15 T4 T3 12 1 Conditions When a transmission error has occurred in the PC PLC link or when there is an error for on off in the setting for the PC PLC link area OFF When there is no transmission error u Key Point Monitoring the link status Using a programming tool the PC PLC link status items such as the transmission cycle time and the number of times that errors have occurred can be monitored Using FPWIN GR Select Status Display under Online in the menu Click the PC link button after the Status Display screen is shown Using FPWIN Pro Select PLC Link Status under Online in the menu c2 Note Remote programming of the linked PLCs is not possible from the programming tool 7 48 7 6 7 PC PLC Link Response Time The maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle can be calculated using the following formula T 1 TS2 Tsn Tit Tso link addition processing time D Ts transmission time per station TSO master station scan time link table sending time The various items in the formula are calculated as described below Ts transmission time per station Ts scan time PC PLC link sending time Tpc Ttx sending time per byte x Pcm PLC link sending size Ttx 1 baud ra
250. lses and cycle of pulses to be input to the high speed counter of the specified channel FP2SH FP10SH NNSNNNS N ber xe Description Steps FP e FPO FPOR 2 25 105 High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FPX FP X High speed MV 5 DT90052 Performs high speed counter counter and and Pulse output controls Pulse output according to controls the control code specified by 5 The control code is stored in DT90052 Change and read DMV Transfers S 1 5 to high speed of the elapsed S DT90044 counter and Pulse output value of high elapsed value area 0790045 speed counter 5 DT90300 DT90044 and Pulse output FP Transfers value in high speed DT90044 D counter and Pulse output FP X elapsed value area DT90045 DT90300 D DT90044 to D 1 D Target value HC1S n S D Turns output Yn on when the much on with elapsed value of the built in channel high speed counter reaches the specification target value of 5 1 S F167 Target value HC1R Turns output Yn off when the much off with elapsed value of the built in channel specification high speed counter reaches the target value of S 1 S Pulse strings are output from the specified output in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S PWM output is
251. m In the following example the Micro Imagechecker is connected to the communication port z e E i Reception The internal relay R10 turns on when the transmission condition RO turns on J mE The start command 5 character is con verted to ASCII code and written to DT101 t to 106 J FiSOMTRN DT100 K2 With DT100 as the send buffer Data transmission The data in the send buffer is sent 1 communication port Reception done detection The internal relay R11 turns on when The received data in the received buffer is read from the area in which it is stored i from DT201 and sent to J e Preparing to receive the next data 7 To prepare to receive the next data the F159 instruction resets the buffer writing point and turns off the reception done FISOMTRN DT 100 Starting from DT100 the contents of 0 bytes _ _ _ _ Buffer statuses The following shows the statuses of the send and receive buffers when the sample program is run DT 100 DT101 7 34 Send buffer Receive buffer received H53 5 25 To be reset 07201 H30 0 H31 1 be transmitted wh 5 automatically when Statuses before transmission the instruction is DT202 H32 2 H31 1 Received data is executed stored in
252. meters will be initialized 15 4 15 1 1 Table of System Registers for FPOR Default Descriptions value In Starting number setting for 1008 0 to 1024 counter Hold type area starting number setting for timer and counter 1008 0 to 1024 T32 F32 Hold type area starting number setting for internal relays 248 0 to 256 T32 F32 Hold type area starting number setting for data registers T32 F32 Hold or non hold setting for step 0 to 32 65 ladder process Hold Non hold T32 F32 Previous value is held for a leading edge detection Hold Hold instruction DF instrucion with Non hold MC Note 2 Hold type area starting word number for PC PLC link relays 0 to 64 for link 0 T32 F32 Hold type area starting word number for PC PLC link relays 64 to 128 Mer for PC PLC link 1 T32 F32 hold 2 Hold type area starting number for PC PLC link registers 0 0 to 128 for link 0 T32 F32 Hold type area starting number 12 128 to 256 for PC PLC link registers 8 for link 1 T32 F32 1 Disable or enable setting for Disabled Disabled Enabled duplicated output Action Operation setting when an I O verification error occurs cd Operation setting when an operation error occurs Wait time setting for multi frame 6500 0 10 to 81900 ms communication ms Communication timeout setting 10000 0 for SEND RECV RMRD RMWT iie 10 to 81900 ms commands
253. n FWIN S1 S141 51 gt 53 1 S3 R900A on PFWIN 52 S2 1 S2 or 1 1 S1 or S3 S341 S3 gt R900B on 51 1 1 lt 2 1 S2 900 Available X Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 21 or later FPO V2 1 or later fo fo 15 65 F351 P351 Floating point type data upper and lower limit control Floating point type data dead band control Floating point type data zone control Floating point type data maxi mum value Floating point type data mini mum value Floating point type data total and mean values Floating point type data sort Scaling of real number data FLIMT PFLIMT FBAND PFBAND FSORT PFSORT FSCAL PFSCAL 51 52 51 52 D 51 52 53 51 52 D Description When 1 1 51 gt 53 1 S3 51 1 51 0 1 D When 52 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 52 1 S2 5 0 1 D When S141 S1 or S341 S3 or 52 1 S2 8341 S3 D 1 D When 1 1 S1 S341 S3 8341 S3 8141 51 0 1 D When 52 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 S341 S3 S2 1 S2 0 1 D When 61 1 S1 or S341 S3 or 52 1 52 0 0 gt D 1 D When S341 53 lt 0 0 S341 S3 8141 1 gt 0 1 D When S341 53 0 0 0 0 D 1 D When 53 1 53 gt 0 0 53 1 53 52 1 52 0 1 D Searches the maximum value in
254. n PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 11 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 12 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 Turns on when Unit No 13 is communicating properly in PC P link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 14 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 15 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC Turns on when Unit No 16 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode WR909 Relay Description R9090 Unit Turns on when Unit No 1 IS in the RUN mode No 1 Turns off when Unit No 1 is in the PROG mode E Turns on when Unit No 2 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 2 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 3 is in the RUN mode R9091 R9
255. n and other pulse process simultaneously or not execuitng an interrupt program 8 5 PWM output function High speed Output Pulse output Output frequency Rel i i duty elated instructions counter contact No instruction channel No used flag Y Frequency 6 Hz to 4 8 kHz FO MV High speed counter CH1 Y2 R9121 0 0 to 99 9 control CH2 us Resolution 1000 F173 PWMH PWM output R9123 Note The PWM output function is only available with the transistor output type 8 6 8 7 8 2 2 Functions Used and Restrictions Simplified chart Maximum counting speed of High speed counter The maximum counting speed of the high speed counter varies according to No of channels to be used or the simultaneous use of the pulse output function Use the chart below as a guide Frequency kHz Combination with pulse output function Trapezoidal control No change in speed 50kHz Combination of high speed counter No pulse output Pulse output 1 CH Single phase 2 Single phase phase Sede a 10 4 60 4 qo d laj 5a 2 5 n T 5 2 9 EA 50 42 45 502 11 lala 2 5 10 3 Note The maximum counting speed may be lower than the above mentioned val
256. n the RUN mode No 5 Turns off when Unit No 5 is in the PROG mode R9073 R9074 Turns off when Unit No 6 is in the PROG mode MEWNET No 7 Turns off when Unit No 7 is in the PROG mode Nos TunsofwhenUnNo Gis inthe PROG mode PC PLC Turns off when Unit No 8 is in the PROG mode operation Turns off when Unit No 9 is in the PROG mode Turns off when Unit No 10 is in the PROG mode Tum Uni Ne 11is inthe PROG mode Turns off when Unit No 11 is in the PROG mode Tums of when Unit No 12is inthe PROG made Turns off when Unit No 12 is in the PROG mode No13 Tums oft when Unit No 13 i in the PROG mode Turns off when Unit No 13 is in the PROG mode Nota TumsofwhenUntNo 14 Turns when Unit No 14 is in the PROG mode Tum when Unit No 18 i inthe PROG made Turns off when Unit No 15 is in the PROG mode Turns of when Unit No 16 is in the PROG mode Turns off when Unit No 16 is in the PROG mode Available N A Not available J 15 17 WR908 FPOR Relay No R9080 R9081 R9082 R9083 R9084 R9085 R9086 MEWNET Wo R9087 PC PLC link 1 trans R9088 mission R9089 R908A R908B R908C R908D R908E R908F A Available N A Not available 15 18 Description Turns on when Unit No 1 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occur
257. nction Writing and reading data for various slaves is available using the F145 SEND and F146 RECV instructions Individual access to each slave and the global transmission is possible Use Type ll instructions of F145 and F146 Type directly specifing MODBUS address to communication with MODBUS devices made by other companies FPOR m ee ua commercia Master Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave _ converter R5485 IET m E mec 288389 5 5299 wal Al KT temperature MODBUS device control unit manufactured by other company Slave function If the slave units receive a command message from the master unit they send back the response message corresponding to the content Do not execute the F145 SEND or F146 RECV instructions when the unti is used as a slave unit Master Slave Slave Slave Commercial converter Commercial converter Commercial converter Commercial converter Commercial Commercial Commercial converter converter RS232C 7 53 MODBUS RTU command message frame START ADDRESS FUNCTION DATA CRC CHECK END 3 5 character time 16 bits 3 5 character time ADDRESS Unit No 8 bits to 99 decimal Note1 0 Broadcast address Note2 Slave unit No is 1 to 99 decimal Note3 For MODBUS 0 to 247 decimal FUNCTION 8 bits DATA Vari
258. nd remove it from the rail 5 1 3 Installation Using the Optional Mounting Plate When using the slim type FPO mounting plate AFP0803 Use 4 size pan head screws for attachment of the mounting plate and install according to the dimensions shown below The rest of the procedure is the same as that for attaching the unit to the DIN rails Installation Removal TETT em 7 7 a ae Note When using an expansion unit tighten the screws after joining all of the mounting plate to be connected Tighten the screws at each of the four corners Example When using the maximum numbers of the expansion units with AFP0803 Four plates in series Mounting hole dimensions MOERS NUM 100 60 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 e ai 90 0 60 0 5 0 AFP0803 AFP0803 0803 e E When using the flat type mounting plate 0804 Use 4 size pan head screws for attachment of the mounting plate and install according to the dimensions shown below Raise the expansion hooks of the unit Align the expnasion hooks with the mounting plate and press the hooks Installation Removal ae Note The flat type mounting plate 0804 should be used only with the control unit as a stand alone unit It should not be used when the unit is being used in combination wi
259. nging System SYS2 Change the setting value of the system registers register for the PLC link function No 40 to H Herse s o oH 47 changing Q Available Not available Not available partially 1 With FP X Ver2 0 or later and FP Ver 3 10 or later the baud rate can be selected from 300 600 or 1200 bps 2 With 32k type the 8 digit password can be selected 3 With 32k type and FP X Ver1 10 or later it can be used 15 44 FP2SH FP10SH Data compare instructions 16 bit ST Le 51 52 4 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 data bit data in the comparative condition 51 52 ST Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 compare lt gt 81 825 E zs bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 Start or 51 gt 52 ST LE gt 5152 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition 51 gt 52 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 51 52 46 HE bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 or 81 92 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition 51 lt 52 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 LC 4 bit data in the comparative condition 51 lt 52 or 81 92 16 bit Connects a Form A normally open contact f 8152 7 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition 51 52 Conn
260. ning at S Performs PWM output from the specified outptu YO or Y1 according to the contents of the data table beginning at S High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FPOR FO MV 5 DT90052 DMV 5 01790300 01790300 Cam control CAMO n n Target value much HC1S S D on with channel High speed counter and Pulse output controls Change and read of the elapsed value of high speed counter and Pulse output control Pulse output control Target value much off with channel specification High speed counter control Pulse output control Pulse output JOG positioning type 0 1 Trapezoidal control Pulse output JOG operation 0 and 1 5 specification High speed counter d i PWM output with channel specification Performs high speed counter and Pulse output controls according to the control code specified by 5 The control code is stored in DT90052 Transfers S 1 S to high speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value area DT90045 DT90044 Transfers value in high speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value area DT90045 DT90044 to D 1 D Controls cam operation on off patterns of each cam output according to the elapsed value of the high speed counter Turns output Yn on when the elapsed value of the high speed counter or pulse output reaches the target value of S 1 S ANAM NN NN 00
261. nly Target FPO expansion units FPO E32T E32P FPO E16X E16YT E16YP E16T E16P FPO E8X E8YT E8YP 14 4 14 1 4 C32 T32 F32 Control Unit MIL Connector 2 FPORC32T P 2 2 ll When mounting MIL connector and power supply cable Max installabon dimension Approx 100 18 __ 60 130 t 10 9 ome 1 TL 1 4 5 Unit mm 14 1 5 Power Supply Unit Power supply unit FPO PSA4 Wi KB 9 Unit mm 14 1 6 I O Link Unit 1 0 link unit AFP0732 Unit mm Unit mm 14 6 14 2 Cable Adapter Specifications 14 2 1 Type of Cables Usable cables Usable model Model No of Cable EOL end of life models FP2 FP2SH FPO mm Tm AFC8503 zm LII AFC8523 AFB85853 wem AFB8583 HH gt Pee IS gt AFC8531 AFC8532 _ 81862 A Wem __ 1523 Wem o polo AFP5523 AFP8550 A Available 14 2 2 AFC8503 AFC8503S DOS V 30002 2 16 0 Mini DINS pin Male D SUB9 pin Female PC side Pin Signal name TL 24 99 015_ 32 0 Oooo d al 1 M Socket Inch screw thread 4 40 5035 1
262. nt 1 inverts the sign laj alaj aj ajg of 2 F86 32 bit data Inverts each bit of data of D 1 D and P86 complement adds 1 inverts the sign laj alaj aj ajg of 2 F88 32 bit data DABS Gives the absolute value of the data of F89 16 bit data EXT Extends the 16 bits of data in D to 32 P89 sign extension PEXT bits in D 1 D 90 Decode DECO S n D Decodes part of the data of S and P90 PDECO stores it in D The part is specified by 7 segment SEGT S D Converts the data of S for use in a 7 decode PSEGT segment display and stores it in D 1 5 l ajl alaj aj aja D ENCO S n D Encodes part of the data of S and PENCO stores it in D The part is specified by aoj 16 bit data UNIT S D The least significant digit of each of the combine PUNIT n words of data beginning at S are stored united in order in Available gt lt Not available Not available partially 15 52 oc Num Boo Ope a S Nn Name P Description 2 amp Each of the digits of the data of S are stored in distriuted to the least significant digits of the areas F94 16 bit data distribute DIST 5 beginning at Character ASCII ASC S D Twelve characters of the characer code PASC constants of S are co
263. nts amp 32 input points Transmission line Transmission distance Total length Note 13 10 Chapter 14 Dimensions and Others 14 1 Dimensions 14 1 1 C10 C14 Control Unit Terminal Block FPORCIOCRS 14CRS FPORC10RS 14RS E 10000001 10000001 When mounting terminal block and power supply cable Max installation dimension Approx 100 10 60 e oust f e0000 1 i EXPANSION CONNECTOR Approx 130 Unit mm Note As for the FPO expansion unit refer to the dimensions only Target FPO expansion units FPO E8RS E16RS 14 2 14 1 2 10 14 Control Unit Molex Connector FPORC10CRM 14CRM FPORC10RM 14RM E When mounting Molex connector and power supply cable Max installation dimension Approx 90 80 90 130 _ APO Unit mm Note As for the FPO expansion unit refer to the dimensions only Target FPO expansion units FPO E8RM E16RM 14 3 14 1 3 C16 Control Unit MIL Connector 16 FPORC16T P ll When mounting MIL connector and power supply cable Ls Max installation dimension Approx 100 8 oR 2 Dr TN il iis Se ES 5 1 113 40 1 Approx 60 _ Unit mm Note As for the FPO expansion unit refer to the dimensions o
264. number of the PLC sending a response is included in the response message Note Lineeye SI 35 is recommended to be used as a converter Setting of unit numbers By default the unit number for each communication port is set to 1 in the system register settings There is no need to change this for 1 1 communication but if 1 N communication is used to connect multiple PLCs to the transmission line e g in a C NET the unit number must be specified so that the destination of the command can be identified The unit number is specified by using the system register Setting system registers No Name Set Value No 410 Unit number 1 to 99 Set the desired unit number With a C NET adapter a maximum of 32 units stations can be specified Communication format Char bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist Note1 The communication format and baud rate should be set to match the connected computer Note2 The baud rates of 300 600 and 1200 bps be specified by the SYS1 instruction However the setting value of the system register cannot be changed 7 4 6 MEWTOCOL Master Use the F145 SEND Data send or F146 RECV Data receive instruction to use the MEWTOCOL master function Communication port The MEWTOCOL master is not available for the tool port It is available for the COM port RS232C port only Samp
265. nute gherbyte Lower byte _ T32 only ENT SO SN O Hour data Minute data HOO to H23 HOO to H59 year month day hour minute second Clock calender setting sng day of the week data for the DT90054 minute second clock calender is stored The built in T32 only clock calender will operate correctly through the year 2099 and supports leap years The Clock calender setting clock calender can be set by writing a value DT90055 day hour using a programming tool software or a T32 only program that uses the FO MV instruction see example for DT90058 Clock calender setting Higher byte Lower byte DT90056 year month T32 only 0790054 Minute data Second data HOO to H59 HOO to H59 Day data Hour data DT90055 01 to H31 to H23 Year data Month data DT90056 H00 to H99 H01 to H12 Clock calender setting DT90057 e DT90057 day of the week HOO to 06 T32 only As a day of the week is not automatially set on FPWIN GR fix what day is set to 00 and set each value for 00 to 06 15 26 FPOR A Available Not available The clock calender is adjusted as follows When setting the clock calender by program By setting the highest bit of DT90058 to 1 the time becomes that written to DT90054 to DT90057 by FO MV instruction After the time is set DT90058 is cleared to 0 Cannot be performed with any instruction other than FO
266. nverted to ASCII code and stored in D to D 5 F96 16 bit table data SRC S1 The data of S1 is searched for in P96 search PSRC S2 the areas in the range S2 to S3 m m 53 and the result is stored DT9037 and DT9038 F97 32 bit table data DSRC 51 The data of 141 51 is searched P97 search PDSRC 52 for in the 32 bit data designated by 53 53 beginning from 52 and the result if stored in DT90037 and 0190038 Data shift instructions F98 Data table shift out CMPR Transfer D2 to D3 Any parts of P98 and compress PCMPR ES the data between D1 and D2 that D3 0 are compressed and shifted in order toward D2 F99 Data table shift in CMPW S 01 Transfer S to D1 Any parts of the P99 and compress PCMP D2 data between D1 and D2 that are W 0 are compressed and shifted order toward D2 F100 Right shift of Shifts the n bits of D to the right P100 multiple bits n bits in a 16 bit data F101 Left shift of multiple D n Shifts the bits of to the left P101 bits n bits a 16 bit data F102 Right shift of n bits DSHR D n Shifts the n bits of the 32 bit data P102 in a 32 bit data PDSHR area specified by D 1 D to the right Left shift of n bits in DSHL D n Shifts the n bits of the 32 bit data Right shift of one
267. o be sent received with FPOR Remember the following when accessing data in the FPOR send and receive buffers lf a header has been chosen the communication format settings the code STX 02 will automatically be added at the beginning of the data begin sent The data without the code STX at the reception is stored in the receive buffer and the reception done flag turns on when the terminator end code is received When the terminator has been set to None the reception done flag does not work However if the code STX is added in the middle of the data the number of received byte is cleared to 0 and the data is stored from the beginning of the receive buffer again A terminator is automatically added to the end of the data being sent here is no terminator on the data stored in the receive buffer Sending data Data written to the send buffer will be sent just as it is Example The data 12345 is transmitted as ASCII code to an external device 1 Data sent using the F95 ASC instruction should be converted to ASCII code data Conversion to ASCII code 12345 Data to be transmitted Conversion to ASCII code 31 32 33 34 35 Coded data 1 2 3 4 5 2 If DT 100 is being used as the start address of send buffer data will be stored in sequential order in the data registers starting from the next register DT101 in two byte units consisting of the upper and the lower byte DT1
268. o binary and set it in index register IO 2 Convert the BCD timer set value in WXO to binary and store in the timer set value area SV specified by contents of 10 lt Example 2 gt Taking external output of the elapsed value in a timer number specified by a digital switch 7 segment Timer elapsed indicator value display R BIN wX1 55 F80 BCD IOEVO WYO sss Timer number setting Ll Digital switches WX1 1 Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary and set it in index register IO 2 Convert the elapsed value data EV in the timer specified by 10 to BCD and output it to output relay WYO 12 6 12 4 Operation Errors 12 4 1 Outline of Operation Errors An operation error is a condition in which operation is impossible when a high level instruction is executed When an operation error occurs the ERROR ALARM LED on the control unit will blink and the operation error flags R9007 and R9008 will turn on The operation error code E45 is set at special data register DT 90000 The error address is stored in special data registers DT90017 and DT90018 Types of operation error 1 Address error The memory address number specified by index modification is outside the area which can be used 2 BCD data error Operation is attempted on non BCD data when an instruction handling BCD is executed or BCD conversion is attempted on data which is not with
269. o the commands received from the computer so no program is necessary on the PLC side in order to carry out communication Computer Lem FPWIN GR etc Response message 7 1 3 General purpose Serial Communication With general purpose serial communication data can be sent back and forth between an external device connected such as an image processing devcie and a bar code reader Reading and writing of data is done using a ladder program in the FPOR while reading and writing of data from an external is handled through the data registers Image checker FPOR Data register DT Data transmission using 3 F159 MTRN 2 Data received in receive buffer Data is sent to and received from external devices thruogh the data registers 7 1 4 PC PLC Link Using a commercial R232C RS485 converter enables to configure a PC PLC link MEWNET W O with the FPOR Exclusive internal relays link relays L and data registers link registers LD are shared between the connected PLCs FPOR FP2 FP2SH Unit 1 Unit n 2 Unit n 3 Unit no 4 Receive area RS232C Commercial converter The link relays and link registers of the PLCs contain areas for sending and areas for receiving data These areas are used to share data among the PLCs 7 1 5 MODBUS RTU Function overview The MODBUS RTU protocol enables the communicati
270. of 1 to 32 No 411 Communication format Modem connection Connect Not Connect Char bit 7 bits 8 bits Change the value to match the connected external device No 414 Baud rate setting The baud rate of 9600 or 19200 bps can be selected Specify the value to match the connected external device COM port RS232C port settings PLE LntillaT 3 nick 413 Forma 414 Cbr am PeipCheck 0 Ha415 Uni No Shao Bit dh sx 415 Meeker 412 Mode selection Select the computer link No 413 Communication Format Char Bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Terminator CR Header STX not exist Change the value to match the connected external device No 414 Baud rate Select one of the values from 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 bps No 415 Unit number The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 32 No 416 Modem enabled Check the box to connect a modem 7 18 7 5 Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication 7 5 1 Overview In general purpose serial communication data is sent and received over the communication port to and from an external device such as an image processing device or a bar code reader Data is read from and written to an external device connected to the communication port by means of an FPOR progr
271. ol starting input ee oce ee ores Dues DT90401 DT90403 DT90405 DT90410 to DT90412 to DT90414 to DT90411 DT90413 DT90415 DT90421 DT90423 DT90425 di 3b 0790431 0790433 0790435 0790401 0790403 0790405 Linear DT90411 0790413 0790415 1 0790421 0790423 0790425 Y axis R9123 DT90430 to DT90432 to DT90434 to DT90431 DT90433 DT90435 Linear Interpolation Pulse output Elapsed instruction value flag area on off Target area Target value Tor naich area Max output frequency No change of speed 4CH 50 kHz Using linear interpolation 2H 50 kHz Related instructions FO MV high speed counter control F1 DMV Read write of elapsed value of high speed counter F166 HC1S Target value match on F167 HC1R Target value match off F171 SPDH trapezoidal control JOG positioning F172 PLSH JOG operation F174 SPOH Data table control F175 SPSH Linear interpolation control F177 HOME Home return Note1 The pulse output function is only available with the transistor output type Note2 Reference For DT90052 see 8 4 4 Pulse Output Control Instruction FO F1 gt Note3 For C16 type Ye CHO and Y7 CH1 For C32 type 8 and Y9 CH1 Note4 The maximum frequencies are the values when execuing the conditions of each item output method or number of channels only They are the values when not executing the change of speed or match on off instructio
272. ommunication settings to operate the PLC via the programmable display Programmable display GT series Command message Response message Tool port GT side FPOR side D SUB 9 pin 3 pin terminal 2 Rs 5 cena 20 02 02 port RS232C port GT side FPOR side D SUB 9 pin Mini DIN 5 pin ner Note A USB cable cannot be used Make the connection with the tool port or RS232C port Use a recommended cable for the tool port connection Reference lt GT series Technical Manual ARCT1F398E gt 7 4 5 1 4 Communication MEWTOCOL Slave Function A computer and PLCs are connected through a commercially available RS232C RS485 converter and the respective computer and PLCs are wired using an RS485 cable with crossover wiring The computer and the PLC communicate via commands and responses The computer sends a command specifying the unit number and the PLC with that unit number sends a response back to the computer FPOR FPOR FPOR FPOR Unit no kn Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 dv ore Computer IRS232C RS232C RS232C Commercial Commercial Commercial Commercial converter converter converter converter 852326 Commercial r converter 5485 unit number for the PLC to which the command is being sent is included in the command message The unit
273. omparative condition S1 lt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in pese 5 parallel by comparing two 16 bit data the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 S2 Available X Not available Not available partially data compare 15 45 FP2SH FP10SH d S 32 bit STD 51 59 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 E bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 data S1 S2 1 52 compare STD lt gt De 81 52 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 Start LE 4 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 51 lt 52 1 52 or 51 1 S1 gt S24 1 52 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 HE bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt 2 1 52 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt 2 1 52 or S14 1 51 52 1 52 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 4 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 51 lt 52 1 52 Begins logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 51 lt 52 1 52 or S14 1 51 52 1 52 32 bit Connects a Form A normally open contact p si serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the data comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 compare AND Connects a Form A normally open contact D 81 82 serially by comparing two
274. on between the FPOR and other devices including our FP e Programmable display GT series and KT temperature control unit Communication is performed when the master unit sends instructions command messages to slave units and the slave unit returns responses response messages according to the instructions Enables the communication between the devices of max 255 units as the master function and slave function is equipped Master function FPOR Commercial Master Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave converter r A 85485 2 7m 2 _ gt la we ue 588888 m KT temperature KT temperature control unit control unit Slave function Master Commercia Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave kM FPOR FPOR FPOR FPOR FPOR 7 2 Communicaton Port Type 7 2 1 Tool Port This connector is used to connect a programming tool A commercial mini DIN _ connector is used for the tool port the control unit Signal name Abbreviation Signal direction L4 JS soo Unit gt External device 3 Receive RD Unit lt Externaldevice 4 _ Not used DENEN enn Unit gt Externaldevice 7 2 2 USB Port This connector is used to connect a programming tool A commercial USB2 0 calbe A miniB can be used Standard USB2 0 USB miniB type Note The USB driver should be installed 00000000 ACS
275. on dialog box Set PLG Password Untitlel ae Es 1 Indicates the current status of the password PLC Home Sem setting KEIN Be i so 9 Specify the type of the password to be used d uad 3 Specify operation mode gt C 4 digts Hex Sa Access Accesses programs by inputting a 8 dighs elphanumenc Match case password Operation Mode Protect Sets a password Pi __ Unprotect Releases the password setting United 4 Input a password 5 Those are the settins when using the FP 41 Enterinalpharumenc memory loader Ver 2 0 or later Seting lor FF memor loader opbon 5 Allow the download in case of same password Set that PLC cannot be uploaded Confirmation the contents of the password setting Confirm the settings indicated in the dialog box Current status Indicates the current status of the password setting There are following five statuses 1 Password is not set Password is not set 2 4 digits Protect Four digit password and access is prohibited 3 4 digits Available to access Four digit password and access is allowed The status that inputting the password completes and that can access programs 4 8 digits Protect Eight digit password and access is prohibited 5 8 digits Available to access Eight digit password and access is allowed The status that inputting the password completes and that can access programs Available retry c
276. or output type 10 points Max 58 points Max 106 points 14 points Max 62 points Max 110 points 16 points Max 112 points Max 112 points C32 32 points Max 128 points Max 128 points F32 Note Install the FPO thermocouple unit on the right side of all other expansion units If itis installed on the left side the total precision will deteriorate Install the FPO CC Link slave unit on the right side of all other expansion units There is no expansion connector on the right side Install the FPO RTD unit on the right side of all other expansion units 1 4 Programming Tools 1 4 1 Required Tools for Programming 1 Programming tool software Programming The tool software can also be used with the FP m tool software i series FPWIN GR Ver 2 or FPWIN Pro Ver 6 Windows software is used with FPOR FPWIN GR Ver 1x MS DOS NPST GR and FP Programmer cannot be used 2PC connection cable 2 PC connection cable The connection cable for DOS V machine is available A commercial miniUSB cable can be used for the connection 1 4 2 Software Environment and Suitable Cable Standard ladder diagram tool software FPWIN GR Ver 2 OS Type of software Hard disk capacity Full type AFPS10520 Windows 98 FPWIN GR Ver 2 Windows ME English language Small type Windows 2000 40MB or more AFPS11520 Windows XP Windows Vista Upgrade version AFPS10520R menu Note1 V
277. order DT203 H34 4 33 3 from the lower order byte Statuses when reception is completed 7 5 9 1 N Communication General purpose Serial Communication The FPOR and the external units are connected using an RS485 cable Using the protocol that matches the external units the F159 MTRN instruction is used to send and receive data p 7 rd 6 Data register DT Transmitted data E Data transmission using F159 MTRN Received data Received data Commercial converter 5485 Data is received into receive buffer Data is sent and received through the data registers System register settings Set Value No 412 Selection of communication mode General purpose serial communication Communication format Char bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Terminator CR CR LF None ETX Header STX not exist No 415 2400 to 115200 bps No 416 Starting address for receive buffer C10 14 16 DTO to DT12314 No 420 C32 32 2 to 0732764 Default setting Tool port 074096 COM RS232C port DTO No 417 Receive buffer capacity 999 0 to 2048 words No 421 Note1 The communication format and baud rate should be set to match the connected devices Note2 The baud rates of 300 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction However the setting value of the system register cann
278. ording to the specifications of FPOR Reference Next page lt Differences Between Specifications of FPO and FPOR Effecting Program Change gt Differences between specifications of FPO FPOR effecting program change Change in data areas Change in supported instructions Change in special internal relays Change in special data registers As the size of the data area and the settings of hold and non hold areas changes check if the address of the used data memory is correct The area that has been used as a hold area might be a non hold area The following instructions that are supported on the FPO cannot be used Replace them with the instructions for the FPOR based on the following description FPO FPOR F144 TRNS instruction F159 MTRN instruction F168 SPD1 instruction F171 SPDH F177 HOME instructions F169 PLS instruction F172 PLSH instruction F170 PWM instruction F173 PWMH instruction As for the following instructions the specifications change Modify the programs in accordance with the specifications after the change FPOR F12 ICRD instruction Unit of read 64 words P13 PICWT instruction Unit of write 64 words Unit of write 2048 words The addresses of the following special internal relays are changed High speed counter control flag FPO R903A For CHO R903B For CH1 Unit of read 2048 words FPOR R9110 For CHO R9111 For CH1 R903C For CH2
279. ort No 421 For the general purpose serial communication setting Receive buffer is required To change this area specify the starting address using system register No 416 or 420 and the volume number of words using No 417or 421 The receive buffer layout is shown below When setting for the tool port and the COM port RS232C port both do not specify the same buffer number Receive buffer Starting area specifi ed am The number of in system register no received bytes 416 420 is stored here The number of words is Received data specified in system regis storage area ter no 417 421 1 30 7 5 8 Connection with 1 1 Communication General purpose Serial Communication RS232C equipment System register settings No Name No 412 Selection of communication mode General purpose serial communication Communication format Char bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Terminator CR CR LF None ETX Header STX not exist Starting address for receive buffer C10 14 16 DTO to DT12314 MESA C32 T32 F32 DTO to DT32764 Default setting Tool port DT4096 COM RS232C port DTO No 417 Receive buffer capacity 0 to 2048 words Default setting 2048 words No 421 Note1 The baud rates of 300 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction However the setting value of the system register cannot be
280. ot be changed Note3 416 417 is the COM RS232C port No 420 and 421 is the tool port 7 35 7 5 10 Settings in Compatibility Mode with FPO FPO Compatibility Mode Programming Example of General purpose Serial Communicationin FPO compability mode The high level instruction F144 TRNS is used to send and receive data via the COM port RS232C port The F159 MTRN instruction is used in the normal FPOR mode 3 Key Point In the FPO compatiblity mode the F144 TRNS instruction is used instead of F159 MTRN instruction F144 TRNS instruction Data is sent and received between the FPOR and an external device via the COM port RS232C port RO 5 HH F144 TRNS DT 100 KB t Serial data communication Starting from 07100 the contents of 8 bytes Devices that can be specified for S data registers DT can be specified as the send buffer Devices that be specified for n WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD I IO to ID K Sending data The amount of data specified by n is sent to the external device from among the data stored in the data table starting with the area specified by S through the COM port specified by D Data can be sent with the header and terminator automatically attached A maximum of 2048 bytes can be sent When the above program is run the eight bytes of data contained in DT101 to DT104 and stored in the send buffer starting from DT100 are sent from the COM port
281. ot blink however the area of input X in the operation memory will be rewritten As for contacts not specified the on off state will be read according to the input status from the input device 2 Processing of external output Y Regardless of the state of the result of operation forced on off will take precedence at a contact specified for forced input output in the above procedure A At this time the area of output Y in the operation memory will be forcibly rewritten External output will take place according to the input output update timing in the above diagram The on off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result 3 Processing of Timer T and Counter C Regardless of the timer counter input condition forced on off operation will take precedence at a contact specified for forced input output At this time the contact of the timer T or counter C in the operation memory will be rewritten Timing and counting will not take place during control he on off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result Operation during operation For small sized PLCs FPO FPOR gt and FP X The internal relay R or output Y specified by OT or KP instruction is rewritten according to the results of operation However as the R or Y is set reset again right before the peripheral service as the above procedure C the monitoring value with the tooling software or the output to
282. ot necessary to write the response process as a ladder so the program is easier than the general purpose communication function The 1 1 or 1 N communication is available between our devices equipped with the computer link function and the MEWTOCOL COM Our devices e g PLC IPD temperature control unit message runner eco power meter MEWTOCOL slave function This function is to receive commands from the computer link execute the process and send back the results Any special ladder program is not necessary to use this function Set the communication conditions in the system registers It enables the 1 1 or 1 N communication with a master computer or PLC The program for the computer side must be written in BASIC or C language according to the MEWTOCOL COM MEWTOCOL COM contains the commands used to monitor and control PLC operation Communication port Tool port USB port COM port RS232C port 7 4 2 MEWTOCOL Slave Function Outline of operation Command and response Instructions issued by the computer to the PLC are called commands Messages sent back to the computer from the PLC are called responses When the PLC receives a command it processes the command regardless of the sequence program and sends a reponse back to the computer On the computer side the execution result of the command can be confirmed by the transmitted response MEWTOCOL COM sketch Communication is carried out in a conversational
283. ounts This is the number of times that you can input the password in succession up to 3 times Every time incorrect password is input the number will decrease If you fail to input the correct password for 3 times in succession you cannot access the program Turn the power supply of the FPOR off and then on again to try to input the password again 63 If the power supply of PLC is turned on off with the setting that the access is allowed the setting will be that the PLC is protected again 9 4 Setting to prohibit the access with password PLC Home Close Force Cancel Current status Password is not set Available retry counts counts digit number C 4 digits Hex 8 digits alphanumeric Match case r Operation Mode Access Protect Unprotect r 8 digits password m Setting for FP memory loader option Enter in alphanumeric Allow the download in case of same password Set that PLC cannot be uploaded Set PLC Password Untitlel EN oco Enter the password in alphanumeric Do not forget this password Ti x PLG became disabled to write read Setting to allow the access with a password Close Current status Password is not set Available retry counts counts Force bance digit number Help 4 digits Hex 8 digits alphanumeric Match case
284. p ladder process 128 to 143 Step ladder process 144 to 159 Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder process When the process starts up the bit corresponding to the process number turns on DT90069 Step ladder process Monitor using binary display DT90070 160 to 175 itor using binary display pT90071 ladder process lt exampie gt i5 7 Bit No s 176 to 191 proof 5 3 PEE Step ladder process 651 647 S 643 1 640 Process 1 92 to 207 1 During running 0 During stopping DT90073 Step ladder process Note A programming tool software can be 0 22 used to write data ep ladder process 224 to 239 Step ladder process 240 255 Step ladder process 320 to 335 Step ladder process pine 336 to 351 15 28 FPOR Available N A Not available NN w Step ladder process 352 367 Step ladder process 368 to 383 Step ladder process 384 to 399 Step ladder process 400 to 415 Step ladder process 0190090 416 to 431 Step ladder process Indicates the startup condition of the step DT90087 432 to 447 ladder process When the process starts up the bit corresponding to the process number DT90088 Step ladder process 448 to 463 0790089 ae era pae Monitor using binary display SteP ladder process 5
285. program storage To prevent the accidental loss of programs the user should consider the following measures Drafting of documents To avoid accidentally losing programs destroying files or overwriting the contents of files documents should be printed out and then saved Specifying the password carefully The password setting is designed to avoid programs being accidentally overwritten If the password is forgotten however it will be impossible to overwrite the program even if you want to Also if a password is focibly bypassed the program is deleted When specifying the password note it in the specifications manual or in another safe location in case it is forgotten at some point Programming Tool Restrictions Restrictions on usable programming tools depending on the units as of April 2009 Type of programming tool Type of unit FPWIN GR Ver 2 eed Windows software Ver 2 80 or later Windows software Used Conforms to IEC61131 3 M 6 10 or later MS DOS software INPST GRVer4 ss GR Ver 4 Notused used EOL product NPST GR Ver 3 AFP1114V2 Handy programming unit AFP1114 EOL product AFP1111A AFP1112A AFP1111 AFP1112 FP memory loader peed y 8671 Ver 2 0 or later Not used ae Note In case of using FPWIN GR Ver 1 please purchase upgrade model FPWIN GR Ver 2 FPWIN GR Ver 2 can be upgraded free of charge at our web site FPWIN Pro Ver 6 can be
286. ps the clock 4 Rise and fall changes in the inputs of differential instructions DF counter instructions CT and left right sift registers are ignored 5 Interrupt functions are stopped 6 Internal clock relays special internal relays are also stopped 7 Pulse output is stopped during the rewrite Set values for timer counter instructions All set values specified with decimal constants K in timer and counter instructions are preset in the corresponding set value areas SV Values in the elapsed value area EV do not change Operation of rewrite during RUN complete flag The rewrite during RUN complete flag R9034 is a special internal relay that goes on for only the first scan following the completion of rewriting in the RUN mode It can be used instead of the initial pulse relay following a change in the program 12 13 12 7 2 Cases Where Rewriting During Run is Not Possible When the timeout error message is indicated Even if the timeout error message is indicated it is highly possible that the program in PLC has been already rewritten Carry out the following operations FPWIN GF e Timeout error while changing program in Program may differ from PLC Please click below Help button to find the way how to salve it 1 When ladder symbol mode As a ladder editing is left set it to the offline edit mode Complete the program conversion in the tool software and then change to the online edit mod
287. put addu ids ste S pores common 2A Molex ER Output 6 points 2 AFPORC14RM connector Terminal 24V DC Relay output Available AFPORC14CRS ie Available AFPORC14CRM connector output NPN AFPORC16T 24V DC 0 2A MIL common Transistor connector output PNP AFPORC16P 0 2A Transistor output NPN Available AFPORC16CT 24V DC 0 2A MIL common Transistor connector output PNP Available AFPORC16CP 0 2A Transistor output NPN AFPORC32T 24V DC 02A MIL common Transistor connector output PNP AFPORC32P 0 2A output NPN Available AFPORC32CT 24V DC 0 2A MIL common Transistor connector 0 2A Transistor output NPN Available 2 24V DC 02A MIL common Transistor connector output PNP Available AFPORT32CP 0 2A Transistor output NPN Available AFPORF32CT 24V DC 0 2 MIL common Transistor connector output PNP Available AFPORF32CP 0 2A C14 14 points i Input 8 points ps Output 6 points 16 points Input 8 points ps Output 8 points C16 16 points yi Input 8 points ps Output 8 points 32 points 32k Input 16 points steps Output 16 points C32 32 points Input 16 points PS Output 16 point 32 points T32 32k Input 16 points steps Output 16 points 32 points F32 32k Input 16 points steps Output 16 points 1 2 2 FPO Expansion Units Specifications Product Product name No of I
288. r Two One digit digit Target that reads the value internal relay R1 i item 5 specifies that only 1 point should be read name e g read contact area Command code Indicates that this is a command 1 Header Start code Commands must always have a 9o ASCII code H25 or a lt ASCII code at the beginning of a message 2 Unit number The unit number of the PLC to which you want to send the command must be specified In 1 1 communication the unit number 01 ASCII code H3031 should be specified The unit number of the PLC is specified by the system register 3 Text The content differs depending on the command The content should be noted in all upper case characters following the fixed formula for the particular command 0 17 amp A X O 13 1 C Specification Command name and data to Command code be written ASCII code 23 4 Check code BCC block check code for error detection using horizontal parity The BCC should be created so that it targets all of the text data from the header to the last text character The BCC starts from the header and checks each character in sequence using the exclusive OR operation and replaces the final result with character text It is normally part of the calculation program and is created automatically The parity check can be skipped by entering ASCII code H2A2A instead of the 5
289. r P with numbers For most of the high level instructions F and P types are available The differences between the two types are explained as follows Instructions with the prefix F are executed in every scan while its trigger is in the on Instructions with the prefix are executed only when the leading edge of its trigger is detected For the FPO FPOR FPZ FP X the P type high level instructions are not available lean rand wo EPS Data transfer instructions transfer Data transfer instructions Bom M move PMV B M eo tmm move PDMV 16 bit data invert and move 32 bit data invert and move Reading of head word DMV PDMV No of the GETS PGETS specified slot Bit data BTM move PBTM Hexadecimal DGT 5 digit 4 bit PDGT Two 16 bit MV2 S1 data move PMV2 S2 D n d data move 52 data move PDMV2 S2 D LUN PBKMV S2 D eer PCOPY Data read ICRD from EEP 2 D ROM Data write to P fso EEP ROM S2 D Data read ICRD from F ROM F ROM S2 D Data read ICRD from IC card PICRD ES D Data write to ICWT IC card PICWT 2 D Program read PGRD from IC PPGRD memory card FP2SH FP10SH S D 1 D 14441449 S 1 S gt D 1 D MV S D PMV 2444424 A f The head word No of the specified slot is read The specified one bi
290. r occurs The content of self diagnostic error is stored in DT90000 Self diagnostic R9000 error flag Operation error flag hold Operation error flag non hold Turns on and keeps the on state shen an operation error occurs The address where the error occurred is stored DT 90017 indicates the first operation error which occurred Turns on for an instant when an operation error occurs The address where the operation error occurred is stored in DT90018 The contents change each time a new error occurs R9009 Carry fla This is set if an overflow or underflow occurs in the calculation iis results and as a result of a shift system instruction being executed Turns on for an instant when the compared results become larger R900C Flag Auxiliary timer R900D instruction flag Tool port R900E communication error Constant scan error flag R900F A Available N A Not available in the comparison instructions F60 to F63 Turns on for an instant when the compared results are equal in the comparison instructions F60 to F63 when the calculated results become 0 in the arithmetic instructions Turns on for an instant when the compared results become smaller in the comparison instructions F60 to F63 Turns on when the set time elapses set value reaches 0 in the timing operation of the F137 STMR F183 DSTM auxiliary timer instruction The flag turns off when the trigger
291. rcuit are connected internally Two terminals of the output circuit are connected internally ve Front view of connector ae Note Four COM terminals of the input circuit are connected internally Two terminals of the output circuit are connected internally Two terminals of the output circuit are connected internally 2 4 Backup Function Clock Calender Function of FPOR T32 The FPOR T32 control unit has a secondary battery Charging type The backup function for the operation memory and clock calender function can be used 2 4 1 Backup Function Backup of operation memory 1 Timer Counter T C 2 Internal relays R 3 Data Registers DT 4 Step ladders The range specified with a programming tool is the hold area to be backed up If the range is not specified it will be the area of the default Note If the battery is out of charge and the hold area becomes indefinite the value in the hod area will be cleared to 0 when the power supply is turned on again Key Point Programs and system registers will be held in the internal ROM regardless of the built in back up battery 2 4 2 Clock Calender clock calender function is available for the FPOR T32 Note As the value is unstable in the initial state write the value using a programming tool Area of clock calender With the clock calender function data indicating the hour minute second day year and other in
292. rea Higher words A ado sped value HSC CH2 DT90310 Target Lower words ae ee AN value instructions F166 HC1S and DT90311 area Higher words A ado The target value is set when DT90314 Target L d Tea instructions F166 15 and DT90315 Higher words F167 HC1H are executed DT90312 Elapsed Counting area for input X3 of the main unit value DT90313 area Higher words HSC CH3 The target value is set when instructions F166 15 and F167 HC1R are executed DT90319 Higher words Note Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 DMV instruction only Writing in the target value area is available by F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R instructions only 0790316 Elapsed Counting area for input X4 Or X4 X5 of the main unit value DT90317 area Higher words HSC CH4 15 35 FPOR A Available N A Not available el nd DT90320 Elapsed Counting area for input X5 of DT90321 area Higher words The target value is set when A 090322 instructions 166 15 and iu DT90323 area Higher words F167 HC1R are executed A B Note1 DT90324 Not used N A N A 22 NA NA NA 0002 NA NA N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A NA Note1 Writing in the elapsed value area is avail
293. rend on error The voltage of the backup battery lowered or the backup battery of conrol unit is not Backup Conti installed battery Check the installation of the backup errror ne battery and then replace battery if necessary By setting the system register 4 you can disregard this self diagnostic error ___ 57 15 78 MEWNET F terminal station error MEWNET F I O update synchro nous error Multi CPU regis tration error CPU2 only IC memory card back up battery error IC memory card back up battery error Incompat ible IC memory card error No unit for the configu ration Self diagnostic error set by F148 ERR P148 PERR Instruction Description and steps to take Terminal station setting was not properly performed Check stations at both ends of the communication path and set them in the terminal station using the dip switches Set the INITIALIZE TEST selecto1inmjvbgycfrde892 r to the INITIALIZE position while keeping the mode selector in the RUN position If the same error occurs after this please contact your dealer Abnormality was detected when the multi CPU system ws used Please contact your dealer The voltage of the backup battery for the IC memory card lowered The BATT LED does not turn on Charge or replace the backup battry of IC memory card The contents of the IC memory card cannot be guaranteed The voltage of t
294. rom the slave error station MEWNET F The number of slots or I O points used for remore I O system exceeds the imitation Stops Re configure the system so that the limitation number of slots and I O points is within the specified range MEWNET F I O overlap or I O setting that is over the St range is detected in the allocated I O and mapping OPS MEWNET F I O map error Re configure the I O map correctly A Available 15 73 tion Description and steps to take status 2 2 an ue I O link slave is not correct Stops Re configure the I O map for slave stations ee pping according to the points of the slave error stations than the capacity of the CPU Install an IC memory card that has the program proterly recorded and execute the When reading in the program from the IC memory card due to automatic reading because of the dip switch setting or program switching due to F14 PGRD instruction memory card is not installed There is no program file or it is damaged IC card Writing is disabled read error Stops There is an abnormality in the ido file Program size stored on the card is larger read once again Abnormal unit FP FP X Check the contents of special data register DT90002 and abnormal FPX expansion unit application cassette for FP X Then check the unit FP
295. ry card board is not installed A program or system register write operation was executed when Protect error theb protect mode password setting or DIP switch etc or ROM operation mode was being used There was an error in the code format of the address data Address error Alsi when exceeded or insufficient of address data there was a mistake in the range designation Cannot be read because there is no program in the program area or the memory contains an error Or reading was attempted of data that was not registered When inputting with programming tool software editing of an Rewrite during RUN instruction ED SUB RET INT IRET SSTP and STPE that error cannot perform a rewrite during RUN is being attempted Nothing is written to the CPU 0 over error Program area was exceeded during a program write process 17 71 Exclusive access A command that cannot be processed was executed at the same control error time as a command being processed External memory error No program error and No data error 167 15 80 15 5 MEWTOCOL COM Communication Commands Table of MEWTOCOL COM commands Reads the on and off status of contact Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Turns contacts on and off Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Read data area 8 __ tne contents of a data area _ _ Writ
296. s a Display adapters cu DVBICD ROM drives Floppy disk controllers Floppy disk drives tg Human Interface Devices eS IDE ATAJATAPI controllers x Keyboards Mice and other pointing devices E Monitors Network adapters amp Ports COM amp LPT EE Processors e SCSI and RAID controllers m Sound video and game controllers S Storage volumes System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers ES EH 2 Double click Ports amp LPT As the table of allocation of ports is shown confirm the COM port number Panasonic Electric Works PLC Virtual is the allocated COM port is allocated in the following display Device Manager File Action wiew Help gt E m FP R p iy Computer Get Disk drives a Display adapters DVDICD ROM drives 44 Floppy disk controllers di Floppy disk drives 89 Human Interface Devices IDE ATAJATAPI controllers Keyboards 3 Mice and other pointing devices 9 Monitors E E E EE EE EE EE EE EET EE ER HR Network adapters Ports COM amp LPT Y Communications Port COMI ZA APanasonic Electric Works PLC Virtual LIART COMS Printer Port LPT1 EE Processors e SCSI and RAID controllers 9 9 Sound video and game controllers E e Storage valumes Key Point The COM port number is ne
297. s or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 2 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 3 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 Turns on when Unit No 4 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 5 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 6 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 7 is communicating properly in PC P link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 8 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 9 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 10 is communicating properly i
298. s and Functions of the 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 UEBER IO CE 1 4 TZI EPOR ota nino a mes bres tod 1 4 1 2 2 FPO Expansion ede p Or v bap 1 5 13229 Iritelligerit 1 6 124 UNIS A 1 6 T23 Power SUPP URI aiite a a a lione eu is 1 7 1 2 6 Options and Repair Parts oi e En uaa tv a 1 7 1 3 Restrictions on Unit Combination 1 8 1 4 Programming mcer 1 9 1 4 1 Required Tools for 1 9 1 4 2 Software Environment and Suitable Cable 1 9 2 Specifications and Functions of Control Unit 2 1 2 1 Part Names FUNCIONS evt crib nda a cra lee deed 2 2 2 1 1 Part Names and rUnctloris esssccvesei OE bU S a asa E Cau D ER dT 2 2 2 2 Input and Output 77 2 4 2 2 5 Die tert ete 2 4 2 2 2 SpeclliCalloDSosu 2 5 2 9 a 2 7 2 4 Backup Function Clock Calender Function of FPOR T32 2 10 Nt C PEE 2 10 24 2 Clock
299. s direction When XA turns on the pulse is output from CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CHO and CCW output Y3 of the specified channel CH1 and the return to home begins In CHO when turns on deceleration begins and when X4 turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value areas DT90400 DT90401 are cleared to 0 In CH1 when X3 turns on deceleration begins and when X5 turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value areas 0790410 DT90411 are cleared to 0 When the operations in both CHs is completed the return to home completes 0 V 24 V DC XA Home return start e Home input iced Home input Near home input Pulse output CC JUUL W side side Motor mr x wn uus xs side side Motor pr Bg el tin CHO e a X4 XO Home sensor Near home sensor Program Home return operation XA R9120 R9121 R44 NNN EE eee F H DF 4 Positioning operation running pu Ti E E LLLI R40 R41 p J R4 Positioning data table CHO CH1 DMV 10000000 DT200 Control code _ H10000000 K 200 202 Initial speed 200 Hz Target speed 2000 Hz K 2000 072044 150 ms DT208 Fi DMV K 150 pT
300. s to take samplings and record accumulate the state of arbitrary data of 16 bits 3 data registered in the PLC at an arbitrary timing and to examine the changes in the bit and data in details after stopping sampling at an arbitrary timing The sampling trace function is used by Time chart monitor under the online menu of the FPWIN GR The instructions functions special relays and special registers related to the sampling trace function are as below F155 SMPL sampling instruction F156 STRG sampling stop trigger instruction Time chart moitor of FPWIN GR R902C Sample point flag OFF Sampling by instruction ON Sampling at regular time intervals R902D Sampling trace end flag When sampling trace starts 0 stops 1 R902E Sampling trigger flag Turns on when sampling stop trigger is on R902F Sampling enable flag Turns on when sampling operation starts DT90028 Interval of sampling trace KO For sampling by instruction K1 to K3000 10 ms to 30 seconds For sampling at regular time intervals 10 22 Details of Sampling Trace Function No of data collectable at one sampling 16 bits 3 data Sampling capacity No of samples accumulable 300 samples C10 C14 C16 1000 samples C32 T32 F32 Types of sampling timing When an instruction is executed or at regular time intervals 1 Sampling at regular time intervals From 10 ms 2 Sampling by F155 SMPL instruction Sampling for every scan can be executed by th
301. scription and steps to take The program is too large to compile in the program memory Change to PROG mode and reduce the total number of steps for the program FP10SH If memory expansion is possible compilation will become possible when the memory is expanded In the program high level instructions which execute in every scan and at the leading edge of the trigger are programmed to be triggered by one contact e g F0 MV and PO PMV are programmed using the same trigger continuously Correct the program so that the high level instructions executed in every scan and only at the leading edge are triggered separately There is an incorrect operand in an instruction which requires a specific combination operands for example the operands must all be of a certain type Enter the correct combination of operands Program may be damaged Try to send the program again When inputting with the programming tool software a delection addition or change of order of an instruction ED LBL SUB RET INT IRET SSTP STPE that cannot perform a rewrite during RUN is being attempted Nothing is written to the CPU FP10SH Ee ee A Available 15 71 Table of Self Diagnostic Error Opera Error 07 tion Description and steps to take code status LL CPU error Stops Probably a hardware abnormality AATA Please contact your dealer RAM LI RAM LJ RAM Probably an abnormalit
302. sion data storage area specified in S Transmission process When the execution condition of the F159 MTRN instruction turns on and the transmission done flag R9039 is on operation is as follows 1 The number of transmission data N is preset in the start address of send buffer S The reception done flag R9038 is turned off and the reception data number is cleared to 2 The set data is transmitted in order from the lower order byte in S 1 of the table During transmission the transmission done flag R9039 turns off If system register 413 is set to header start code with STX the header is automatically added to the beginning of the data The terminator end code specified in system register 413 is automatically added to the end of the data DT 101 DT 102 _ 07103 01104 Transmission data AIB DIE FIG ON OFF R9039 Execution condition F159 MTRN execution During transmission During this interval the F159 MTRN instruction cannot be executed ON OFF 3 When all of the specified quantity of data has been transmitted the S value is cleared to 0 and the transmission done flag R9039 turns on When you do not wish to add the terminator end code during transmissions Specify the number of bytes to be transmitted using a negative number f you also do not wish to add a terminator to received data set system register 413 to
303. stants in TM CT instructions are preset in all of the corresponding SV in the program Elapsed values EV do not change If an instruction written in block a is detected in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held When writing MC MEC instructions be sure to write the instructions as a pair A subroutine is a program appearing between SUBn and RET instructions Be sure to write it to an address which follows the ED instruction An interrupt program is a program appearing between INTn and IRET instructions Be sure to write it to an address which follows the ED instruction Rewriting performed by step Caution is required as rewriting takes place simultaneously with the change If an instruction written in block a is detected in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held Y contact relays which are on will be held in the on state To turn them off in the RUN mode use forced output To turn them off in the RUN mode use forced output If an instruction written in block a is detected in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held Set values specified by K constants in TM CT instructions are preset in all of the corresponding SV in the program Elapsed values EV do not change If deleted the output memory area will be held Writing or deleting a single instruction during RUN is not possible Write or delete the instruction in FPWIN GR ladder symbol mode Write in t
304. stopping DT90113 4 process A programming tool software can be used to DT90114 Step ladder process 864 to 879 Step ladder process DT90115 to 895 Step ladder process 896 to 911 Step ladder process ides 912 to 927 Step ladder process 0190118 928 to 943 Step ladder process 0190119 944 to 959 Step ladder process 960 975 DT90121 Step ladder process 976 to 991 Step ladder process DT90122 992 to 999 higher byte is not used 15 30 FPOR Available N A Not available DT90123 Notused NA SEND RECV For details refer to Programming Manual DT i instruction end code F145 and F146 we 27 0790125 Notused f N A Forced ON OFF DT90126 operating station Used by the system N A N A display The number of times the receiving operation is performed The current interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms The minimum inerval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms The maximum interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms A N A The number of times the sending operation is performed The current interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90127 to DT90139 DT90140 DT90141 DT90142 cabida MEWNET WO DT90144 PC PLO link 0 status DT90145 The minimum interval between two sending operations value in t
305. t General communication No 413 Communication Format setting Char Bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Terminator End code CR CR LF None ETX Header STX not exist STX Specify the value to match the connected external device No 414 Baud rate setting Select one of the values from 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 bps No 415 Unit number The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 99 No 417 Starting address for data received No 417 Buffer capacity setting for data received For the general purpose serial communication setting Receive buffer is required To change this area specify the starting address using system register No 417 and the volume number of words using No 418 The receive buffer layout is shown below Receive buffer Starting area specified The number of in system register no received bytes 417 is stored here The number of words is Received data specified in system regis storage area ter no 418 m Starting address for data received C10 C14 C16 DTO to DT1659 C32 DTO to DT6143 T32 DTO to DT16383 Default Tool port DT4096 COM RS232C port DTO Buffer capacity setting for data received C10 C14 C16 0 to 1660 words Default 1660 words C32 0 to 6144 words Default 6144 words 7 37 7 6 Communication Function 3 PC PLC link Function 7 6 1 Overview Using a commercial R232C RS485 converter enables to configure a PC PL
306. t Specifications 13 10 13 4 1 Power Supply Unit Specifications AFP0634 13 10 13 4 2 I O Link Unit Specifications 7 2 13 10 14 DIMENSIONS and Othes ccccccsssscccccsssscccccssssscccccssssscccccsscccccsses 14 1 14 2 14 1 1 C10 C14 Control Unit Terminal 14 2 14 1 2 C10 C14 Control Unit Molex 14 3 14 1 3 C16 Control Unit MIL Connector 14 4 14 1 4 C32 T32 F32 Control Unit MIL 14 5 14 1 5 Power Supply hilos iid cub SEXE I tese LEE 14 6 Bod Ld roi emo NUM A 14 6 14 1 7 When Using DIN batte ua Pup beta abe ci 14 6 14 2 Cable Adapter 14 7 T2 Type or Cables 14 7 14 2 2 AFCO5OS AFCO50S5 DOS V PO 14 7 1422 14 8 14 2 4 AFC8521 AFC8523 14 8 14 2 5 AFC85853 9 pin male 9 pin
307. t in S is transferred to the specified one bit in The bit is specified by n The specified one digit in S is transferred to the specified one digit in D The digit is ST MD C Q Q JOGE IRT Sit 1 gt 0 1 D S241 2 D 2 The data between S1 and S2 is transferred to the area starting at D The data of S is transferred to the all area between D1 and D2 The data stored in the expansion memory of the EEP ROM specified by S1 and S2 are transferred to the area startign at The data specified by 51 and S2 are transferred to the EEP ROM starting at D The data stored in the expansion memory of the F ROM specified by 51 and 52 are transferred to the area startign at D The data specified by 51 and S2 are transferred to the F ROM starting at D The data stored in the expansion memory of the IC card specified by S1 and 52 are transferred to the area startign at D The data specified by 51 and S2 are transferred to the IC card expansion memory area starting at D The program specified using S is transferred into the CPU from IC memory card and executes it defefefe Q hdt Available Not available Not available partially 2 15 48 1 This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later FP10SH cannot be used This instruction is available for FPO Ver 2
308. te The communication format and baud rate should be set to match the connected computer Programming of computer link For a computer link a program should be created that allows command messages to be sent and response messages to be received on the computer side No communication program is required on the PLC side Specify the communication format only by the system register The program for the computer side must be written in BASIC or C language according to the MEWTOCOL COM MEWTOCOL COM contains the commands used to monitor and control PLC operation Key Point Using our software Control CommX enables the communication on Visual Basic An add in software PCWAY to be used with a spreadsheet software Excel is available to collect data Example of connection to the computer lt 1 1 communication gt Tool port Computer side FFOR side D SUB 8 Mini DIN 5 Symbol Pin COM port RS232C port Computer side D SUB 9 pin FPOR side 3 terminal Symbol Pin no RD R Example of connection with external device lt Programmable display 1 1 communication with GT series RS232C type gt Overview For a 1 1 computer link between the FPOR and a programmable display and RS232C cable is needed Communication is performed via commands from the programmable display and responses from the PLC No program is required for communication Simply set the mutual c
309. te x 1000 x 11 ms Approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Pcm 23 number of relay words number of register words x 4 2 TIt link table sending time Ttx sending time per byte x Ltm link table sending size Ttx 1 baud rate x 1000 x 11 ms Approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Ltm 13 2x n n number of stations being added 3 Tso master station scan time This should be confirmed using the programming tool 4 TIK link addition processing time If no stations are being added TIk 0 link addition command sending time Twt addition waiting time sending time for command to stop transmission if link error occurs Tso master station scan time 10 x Ttx sending time per byte Ttx 1 baud rate x 1000 x 11 ms Approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Twt 7 Initial value 400 ms can be changed using SYS1 system register instruction Tis 7 x sending time per byte Ttx 1 baud rate x 1000 x 11 ms Approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Tso Master station scan time Calculation example 1 When all stations have been added to a 16 unit link the largest station number is 16 relays and registers have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLCs is 1 ms 0 096 Each 23 4 8 x4 71 bytes Tpc Ttx x 0 096 x 71 6 82 ms Each Ts 1 6 82 7 82ms 0 096 x 13 2x 16 4 32 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for
310. ter and Pulse output elapsed 7 OQ ANNAN Pulse output value area to D 1 D High speed 15 5 Turns output Yn on when the counter output elapsed value of the built in high set with speed counter reaches the target 11 QO OG channel value of S 1 S specification Available Not available Not available partially 1 The instruction is available for FPO T32 type V2 3 or later 2 The instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later and the pulse execution type can be specified FP10SH cannot be used 3 This instruction is available for FPX Ver 2 0 or later 4 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later 5 This instruction is available for FPX Ver 3 10 or later 15 56 167 170 High speed counter output reset with channel specification Positioning PWM n S control with channel specification Pulse output with channel specification PWM output with channel specification Boo FP2SH FP10SH ERAN Turns output Yn off when the elapsed value of the built in high speed counter reaches the target value of S 1 S Outputs a positioning pulse from the specified output YO or Y1 according to the contents of the data table beginning at S Outputs a pulse from the specified output YO or Y1 according to the contents of the data table begin
311. th an FPO expansion unit 5 2 Wiring of Power Supply 5 2 1 Wiring of Power Supply Use the power supply cable provided an accessory to supply power to the unit Blue OV Power supply cable Power supply wiring for the unit Use the power supply cable Part number AFPG805 that comes with the unit to connect the power supply Brown 24 V DC Blue 0 V Green Function earth Power supply wire To minimize adverse effects from noise twist the brown and blue wires of teh power supply cable Power supply type To protect the system against erroneous voltage from the power supply line use an insulated power supply with an internal protective circuit he regulator on the unit is a non insulated type If using a power supply device without an internal protective circuit always make sure power is supplied to the unit through a protective element such as a fuse Power supply voltage Rated voltage 24V DC Operating voltage range 21 6V DC to 26 4V DC Wiring system Isolate the wiring systems to the control unit input output devices and mechanical power apparatus Circuit breaker Mechanical Wer Input Output devices Control unit Insulated DC power supply Measures regarding power supply sequence The power supply sequence should be set up so that power to the control unit is turned off before the input output power supplies If the input output power supplies are turned off before the
312. than the ON voltage In particular take care when connecting a number of switches in series If the input of PLC does not turn off because of leakage current from the two wire type sensor Bleeder photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor the use of a bleeder resistor is recommended as shown on the left The formula is based on an input impedance of Sensors leakage current 9 1 The input impedance varies depending Bleeder resistor on the input terminal number Two wire type sensor resistor Internal The off voltage of the input is 2 4 V therefore select the value of bleeder resistor R so that the voltage between the COM terminal and the input terminal will be less than 2 4 V The input impedance is 9 1 9 1R Therefore 916 21 84 9 11 2 4 The wattage W of the resistor is Power supply voltage R the actual selection use value that is 3 to 5 times the value of W Precaution when using LED equipped limit switch LED equipped Bleeder limit resistor 7 switch Power supply for input Internal resistor of limit switch R Bleeder resistor k 52 The off voltage of input is 2 4 V therefore when the power supply voltage is 24 V select the bleeder resistor R so that 24 24 The current will be greater than resistance R of the bleeder resistor is lt 21
313. the FPX and FP X the number of steps varies according to the relay number to be used 15 40 FP2SH FP10SH coh Push stack Stores the operated result up to this instruction 2 Read stack Reads the operated result stored by the PSHS instruction 2 stored by the PSHS instruction Leading edge Turns on the contact for only one scan differential DF when the leading edge of the trigger is 1 15 alal aoa ajaja detected Trailing edge Turns on the contact for only one scan detected Leading edge Turns on the contact for only one scan differ ential E when the leading edge of the trigger is initi i id detected The leading edge detection is execution 9 eag possible on the first scan Y S Output is set to and held at on lt ff m po BEEN 51444214142 Outputs at set trigger and holds until alala alo ni reset turns on 2 Basic function Tu On delay timer After set value n x 0 001 seconds 3 timer contact is set to on 4 99 99 9 After set value n x 0 01 seconds timer Ci 3 g After set value n x 0 I seconds timer contact a is set to on After set value n x 1 second timer contact a is set to on L2 timer 37 vate After set value S x 0 01 seconds the aema bit mms H HessmasoH F output and R900D are set to Auxiliary timer F183 YRLE set value 5 x 0 01 s
314. the expansion unit power supply connector Ifa unit is not listed below it means that it has no power supply connector Input circuit current consumption This is the current consumed by the input circuits of the various units This value indicates the current that flows into the input circuit Output circuit current consumption This is the current consumed by the output circuits of the various units This value indicates the current used to drive the output circuits This value does not include the load current value FPOR C10 100mAorless X 159mAorlss FPOR C14 120mAorless 2 211mAotles FPOR C16 70mAorless 21 1 20mAorless FPOR C32 90 mA or less 42 2 mA or less 40 mA or less FPOR control unit FPOR T32 FPOR F32 FPO E8X 10mAorless 34 4 FPO ESR FPO E8YR 10 i00mAorlss J 0 FPOESYTIP 15mAorlss J 24mAorles FPOETOX 20mAorlss 7 688 FPO E16R 20mAorless 100mAorless 344mAorles 6 25mAorless 7 344 24mAorless FPOETeYTP 25mAorless 7 48 FPO ES2T P 40 77 688 48mAorless 2 7 20mAorles 100mAorless FPO A80 7 20mAorles G0mAorles FPO AMV 7 20mAorles 100mAorless FPO A041 7 20mAorles
315. the speed acceleration cannot be performed Address DT90420 DT90421 DT90422 DT90423 DT90424 DT90425 DT90426 DT90427 DT90428 DT90429 DT90430 DT90431 DT90432 DT90433 DT90434 DT90435 DT90436 DT90437 DT90438 DT90439 E value area Target value Target value area for match ON OFF Corrected speed of initial speed minimum Acceleration forbidden area starting position Elapsed value area Target value Target value area for match ON OFF Corrected speed of initial speed nim minimum nim Acceleration forbidden area starting position Lower words Higher words Lower words Higher words PLS CH2 PLS CH3 FPOR A Available N A Not available Read Description ing Available for the transistor Output type only Note When controlling the pulse output CH by F166 HC1S F167 HC1R ene instructions the target value is stored The target value for match ON OFF is stored The initial soeed of the calculated result is stored The minimum speed for the change of speed If the elapsed value corsses AUS over this position when changing the speed acceleration cannot be performed Available for the transistor Output type only Note When controlling the pulse output CH by F166 HC1S F167 HC1R instructions the target value is stored The target value for match ON OFF is stored
316. times is 20 12 Tool and COM ports communication settings System registers 410 to 421 Set these registers when the Tool port and COM1 and COM ports are to be used for computer link general purpose serial communication PC PLC link and modem communication Note that the default setting is computer link mode 15 3 Checking and changing the set value of system register If you are going to use a value which Is already set the value which appears when read there is no need write it again Using programming tool software Produce 1 Set the control unit in the PROG mode 2 Option gt PLC Configuration 3 When the function for which setting are to be entered is selected in the PLC Configuration dialog box the value and setting status for the selected system register are displayed To change the value and setting status write in the new value and or select the setting status 4 To register these settings choose OK Precautions for system register setting System register settings are effective from the time they are set However input settings tool port COM port and modem connection settings become effective when the mode is changed from PROG to RUN With regard to the modem connection setting when the power is turned off and on or when the mode is changed from PROG to RUN the controller sends a command to the modem which enables it for reception When the initialized operation is performed all set system register values para
317. tings X3 to X5 CH3 Does not set input X4 as high speed counter CH4 Do not set input X6 as high speed counter High speed counter pulse output settings x7 CHS Do not set input X7 as high speed counter Descriptions Do not set input XO as high speed counter Two phase input X1 Two phase input X0 X1 Reset input X2 Incremental input XO Incremental input XO Reset input X2 Decremental input X0 Decremental input X0 Reset input X2 Individual input XO X1 Individual input XO X1 Reset input X2 Incremental decremental control input X1 Incremental decremental control input X1 Reset input X2 Do not set input X1 as high speed counter Incremental input X1 Incremental inptu X1 Reset input X2 Decremental input X1 Decremental input X1 Reset input X2 Do not set input X3 as high speed counter Two phase input X3 X4 Two phase input X4 Reset input X5 Incremental input X3 Incremental input X3 Reset input X5 Decremental input X5 Decremental input X5 Reset input X5 Individual input X3 X4 Individual input X3 X4 Reset input X5 Incremental decremental control X3 X4 Incremental decremental control X3 X4 Reset input X5 Does not set input X4 as high speed counter Incremental input X4 Incremental input X4 Reset input X5 Decremental input X4 Decremental input X4 Reset input X5 Do not
318. tioning operations start J unn mm mum Resets elapsed value of high speed DT90300 X counter CHO 0222 E 167 Ko 5000 Target value match off instruction YO goes off when elapsed value of high Sets high speed counter a speed counter CHO reaches 5000 pulses 122 ME Set the inverter operation signal YO J R100 HH F61 DCMP 4500 ilh 32 bit data comparison instruction 1 R100 R900C p Hor Positioning done pulse 0 5 s R103 8 18 8 4 Pulse Output Function 8 4 1 Overview of Pulse Output Function Instructions used and controls Together with a commercially available pulse string input type motor driver the pulse output function can be used for positioning control Exclusive Type of control instru Description ction Provides trapezoidal table shaped control for automatically Trapezoidal control F171 obtaining pulse outputs by specifying the initial speed target speed acceleration time deceleration time and target value Outputs the specified pulses and performs the deceleration JOG positioning stop according to the position control starting input during the pulse output JOG operation Causes pulses to be output as long as the execution condition JOG operation F172 is on The change in the target speed while pulses being output or decel
319. to 52 are bit S3 sorted in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first Ere lb sl P282 16 bit data PSCAL 52 D input value X by performing scaling i for the given data table F283 Scaling of DSCAL 51 toutptu value is found for the P283 32 bit data PDSCAL S2 D input value X by performing scaling 10 X KX Q a a a a for the given data table F284 Inclination Executes the linear output for the M P284 output of 16 bit specified time from the specified 10 x x data Bs D initial value to the target value Integer type non linear function instructions Integer type non linear function instructions F285 Upper and LIMT S1 When 51 gt 53 S15D P285 lower limit PLIMT 52 When 51 lt 53 52 0 control S3 D When S1 or S3 lt or 52 53 0 1 16 bit data Available Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 2 or later 2 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later and FPX Ver 3 10 or later 15 62 o mm o N A Boolean Description Upper and DLIMT 51 52 When S141 1 gt 3 1 53 81 1 lower limit PDLIMT 3 D 1 gt 0 1 D control When 52 1 m S3 1 S3 S2 1 32 bit data S2 gt D 1 D When 51 1 S1 or 53 1 S3 lt or 8241 52 83
320. to the PLC inter link function for the various unit numbers are stored as shown below Example when DT90219 is 0 Higher byte Lower byte DT90220 to DT90243 nit Station 0 1 Setting contents of system register 40 42 44 and 46 vetting contents of system register 41 43 45 and 47 e When the system register 46 in the home unit is in the standard setting the values in the home unit are copied in the system registers 46 and 47 When the system register 46 in the home unit is in the reverse setting the registers 40 to 45 and 47 corresponding to the home unit mentioned in the left column will be changed to 50 to 55 and 57 and the system register 46 will be set as it is Also the system registers 40 to 45 corresponding to other units will be changed to the values which the received values are corrected and the registers 46 and 57 in the home unit are set for the registers 46 and 47 FPOR A Available N A Not available DT90300 Elapsed Counting area for input 0 or av X0 X1 of the main unit value DT90301 area Higher words HSC CHO The target value is set when Note DT 2 Target L A 9 instructions F166 15 and pa av DT90303 Higher words F167 HC1R are executed Note 0790304 Elapsed Counting area for input X1 of the main unit value DT90305 area Higher words HSC CH1 DT90306 Target Lower words 525022 222 99 value instructions F166 HC1S and DT90307 a
321. tops Check the system register setting or i error Won initialize the system registers 51 This error occurs on Ver2 0 or later A Available 15 72 tion Description and steps to take status Configu ration parameter A parameter error was detected in the MEWNET W2 configuration area Set a correct parameter An interrupt occurred without an interrupt request A hardware problem or error due to noise is possible Turn off the power and check the noise conditions There is no interrupt program for an interrupt which occurred Check the number of the interrupt program and change it to agree with the interrrupt request Interrupt error 1 Interrupt error 2 Multi CPU This error occurs when a FP3 FP10SH is used as CPU2 for a multi CPU system Refer to Multi CPU system Manual An abnormal unit is installed FP X FPOR FPOR mode FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data register DT90036 and locate the abnormal unit Then turn off the power and replace the unit with a new one Check the contents of special data register DT9036 and locate the abnormal unit Then turn off the power and replace the unit with a new one unmatch MEWNET F A unit which cannot be installed on the slave slave station of the MEWNET F link system is E35 Stops installed on the slave station AIAIA Illegal unit gt the illegal unit f
322. tored bit n of D to DC 15 conversion Bit column to bit LINE S n The values of bit n of S to S 15 line conversion PLINE D are stored in bits 0 to 15 of D ASCII S2 multiple ASCII data conversion D ASCII binary ATOB 51 Converts multiple ASCII data to data conversion 52 multiple binary data D ACHK 51 Checks the ASCII data strings to be check 2 used in F251 ATOB instruction Character strings instructions Comparing character MEME ES 257 257 SCMP 51 These instructions compare two specified character strings and output the judgment results to a special internal relay 51 These instructions couple one S2 D character string with another S D These instructions determine the number of characters in a character string S1 The specified character is searched S2 D ina character string S1 These instructions retrieve a S2 D specified number of characters from the right side of the character string strings re P258 coupling Number of LEN characters ina character string F260 Search for SSRC P260 character string Retrieving data from character strings right side Retrieving data from character strings left side ER RIGHT LEFT These instructions retrieve a specified number of characters from the left side of the character string S2
323. tput or PWM output functions do not perform a rewrite during RUN If a rewrite during RUN is executed the operation as below will be performed Exercise caution 1 Interrupt programs will be disabled Enable by executing an ICTL instruction once again lt Example gt Using R9034 rewrite during RUN completed flag R9013 51 52 R8034 2 The high speed counter will continue to count Target value match on off instructions F166 F167 will continue Coincidence interrupt programs will be disabled when the F166 F 167 instruction is running 3 Pulse output and PWM output will be stopped State Instructon number 1 oOo OO F171 F172 PLSH Pulse output JOG operation Type 0 Type 1 4 The regular sampling trace will not stop 12 15 12 7 3 Procedures and Operation of Rewrite During RUN FPWIN GR FPWIN GR Ladder symbol mode Boolean mode Rewrite procedure Operation of each instruction 12 16 OT KP TM CT Fun High level instructions MC MCE CALL SUB RET INT IRET Maximum of 128 steps Changes are performed by block When PG conversion is executed online the program will be rewritten Boara If an instruction written in block is detected in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held If an instruction written in block a is detected in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held Set values specified by K con
324. tput terminal and home input is determined by the channel used e Set the control code for F171 SPDH instruction to CW CCW When using CHO gt FPOR Home input Mear home input Driver CW output CCW output or any other input can be specified for the near home input Single pulse input driver When using 2 gt FPOR Home input Mear home input Driver CW output CCW output X1 or any other input can be specified for the near home input pulse input and directional switching input method e One output point is used as a pulse output and the other output is used as a direction output e he allocation of pulse output terminal direction output terminal and home input is determined by the channel used e Near home input is substituted by allocating the desired contact and turning on and off the lt bit4 gt of special data register DT90052 e Up to four driver systems can be connected When using CHO gt FPOR Home input Near home input P Driver Pulse output Direction output or any other input can be specified for the near home input 12 Reference lt 8 2 1 Table of Specifications gt 8 22 lt When using CH2 gt FPOR Home input X6 input Driver Pulse output Direction output X1 or any other input can be specified for the near home input 8 4 4 Pulse output
325. ture when the control unit is off not powered has little influence on the battery life Ambient temperature Lifetime of built in backup battery Approx 430 days lt 1 year gt Approx 1200 days lt 3 years gt Approx 2100 days lt 6 years gt Approx 3300 days lt Approx 9 years gt 34 C or lower Approx 10 years ae Note The built in backup battery cannot be replaced Chapter 3 Expansion 3 1 Expansion Method The FPO expansion units expansion I O unit high performance unit are connected to the right side of the contorl Unit Unit expansion is done using the right side connector for FPO expansion and the expansion hooks on the side of the unit 1 Peel the seal on the right side of the unit to expose the internal right side connector for the FPO expansion Peel the sea 3 Align the pins and holes in teh four corners of the control unit and expansion unit and insert the pins into the holes so that there is no gap between the units 3 2 Part Names and Functions Expansion Units EBRS E168RS Terminal type Li E8RM E18RM Connector type E16 E32 SSS IE L L 1 commen m mm mu mm n B i EH IH p E O 5 1 a T Expansion output units
326. ual ARCT1F396E gt 1 42 Example of allocation The areas for PC PLC link are divided into send areas and receive areas The link relays and link registers are sent from the send area to the receive area of a different PLC Link relays and link registers with the same numbers as those on the transmission side must exist in the receive area on the receiving side For PC PLC link 0 Link relay allocation FPOR FP FP X FP2 FP2SH Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 Send area Receive area Receive area Send area System registers Setting for various units No 1 No 2 No 3 Range of link relays used Starting No of word for link relay transmission o 2 4 0 Link relay transmission size 20 2 2 lo Note No 40 range of link relays used must be set to the same range for all the units Link register allocation FPOR FP X FP X 2 25 Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 Receive area Receive area Send area System registers eS Red ed ed 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 41 Range of link registers used Starting No for link register transmission o 4 810 Link register transmission size 40 40 148 0 Note No 41 range of link registers used must be set to the same range for all the units When link areas are allocated as shown above the No 1 send area can be sent to the No 2 No 3 and No 4 receive areas
327. ue during the trapezoidal control In the example below the maixmum is 7 kHz The acceleration time and deceleration time should be set to a time between the initial speed and target speed Frequency Data table 7kHz Trapezoidal control No of output change the target speed keep the trigger ON Change of speed Pulse output instruction flag Type 1 The speed can be changed in the range up to the maximum frequency 50 kHz during the trapezoidal control The acceleration time and deceleration time should be set to a time between the initial soeed and maximum speed 50 kHz Frequency BH Data table Incremental CW CCW 25kHzt of output ve pulses 100 000 1KHZ 1 Acceleration time 600 ms Time D i i 400 lt 300ms 300ms 400ms time SSS Target value 100 000 pulses Trigger To change the target speed keep the trigger ON Change of speed Pulse output 2 instruction flag 8 27 Deceleration stop When the deceleration stop is requested during the trapezoidal control deceleration will be performed with the slope specified for the deceleration time from the target speed Use the bit 5 of DT 90052 for requesting the deceleration stop Frequency Data table Trapezoidal control gt Incremental CW CCW h Initial speed 1000 Hz Target speed 7000 Hz
328. ue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO MEWNET F communication error Remote A communication abnormally was caused by a transmission cable or during the power down of a slave station commu FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH nication Check the contents of special data registers 0790131 to 0790137 and locate the error abnormal slave station and recover the Selec communication condition table FP3 Check the contents of special data registers DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the communication condition Selection of operation status using system register27 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO In the unit on the slave station an abnormallty such as missing unit abnormal intelligent unit was detected FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers MEW DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the NET F Selec abnormal slave station and recover the slave E47 condition attribute table pps error Check the contents of special data registers DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the slave condition Selection of operation status using system register28 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Expansion The power supply for the expansion unit was unit power turned on after the control unit supply Stops Turn on the power supply for the expansion sequence unit at the same time or before the control unit is tu
329. ues when the change of pulse output speed CAM control instruction target value match ON OFF instruction and other interrupt programs are executed simultaneously 8 8 Max counting speed Frequency kHz Combination with pulse output function Trapezoidal control No change in speed 50kHz Pulse output 2 CH Pulse output 3 CH Pulse output 4 CH Note The maximum counting speed may be lower than the above mentioned values when the change of pulse output speed CAM control instruction target value match ON OFF instruction and other interrupt programs are executed simultaneously 8 9 pulse output performance Independent control Single phase Available Available Available 00 Available Available Available Available Available Available Available 50 Note Even if all channels are used they can be used within the ranges above Interpolation control Linear interpolation Maximum output frequency kHz Composite speed Available 50 Available Available Note Even if all channels are used for the interpolation function they can be used within the ranges above Note The maximum counting speed may be lower than the above mentioned values when the change of pulse output speed CAM control instruction target value match ON OFF instruction and other interrupt programs are executed simultaneously 8 3 High speed Counter Function 8 3 1 Overview of High speed Counter Function e The high spee
330. ultiple times as an input condition there is a possibility of different statuses existing within the same scan To prevent multiple read access to the special internal relay you should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program 1 26 Header STX Terminator Receiving data The reception done flag the transmission done flag and the F159 MTRN instruction are related as follows Data received 8 lt D E o m m from external Cannot stored when Reception code is reception done flag is deleted by F159 on MTRN oe 11 Reception done y OFF flag R9038 Reception done flag is turned off by executing F159 MTRN F159 a instruction execution Receive buffer Number of bytes lt 1 gt lt a gt gt lt 1 gt e lt 1 gt lt 1 gt received Write pointer Number of bytes Number of bytes Number of bytes received is cleared received is cleared received is cleared when the header is when F159 MTRM when the header is received is executed received The data is stored in the receive buffer in sequential order When the header is received the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address Reception is disabled while the reception done flag R9038 is on Also When F159 MTRN is exec
331. upgraded free of charge at our web site he handy programming unit cannot be used Do not download any programs for other units such as FP1 to the FPOR using the handy programming unit Panasonic Electric Works website address http panasonic denko co jp ac When Using FPO Programs The programs used on the existing FPO can be used on the FPOR in the following 2 cases 1 Using the programs in the FPOR specifications It enables to make maximum use of the performance and functions of the FPOR 2 Using the programs in the same specifications as the FPO It enables to execute the programs in the same specifications as the FPO FPO compatibility mode The points to take care when using the FPO programs on the FPOR are described below in the above 2 cases When using the programs in the FPOR specifications When using the programs in the same specifications as the FPO When using the programs in the FPOR specifications As the FPO programs cannot be used as they are it is required to change the following 3 items for the FPO programs before downloading the programs into the FPOR 1 Change in the model setting Change the model for the FPO programs to the one for the FPOR with a tool software 2 Resetting of system registers As the system registers will be initialized once the model setting is changed reset the system registers if necessary 3 Modification of the programs Depending on programs they should be changed acc
332. uted the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address If there are two headers data following the second header overwrites the data in the receive buffer The reception done flag R9038 is turned off by the F159 MTRN instruction Therefore if F159 MTRN is executed at the same time the terminator is received the reception done flag will not be detected 7 27 Sending data The reception done flag the transmission done flag and the F159 MTRN instruction are related as follows Transmitted data SX o EDO SX EM Transmission Transmission done flag A SR R9039 Dupl x transmission T ris F159 F159 MTRN Du is instruction execution Send buffer Number of bytes not yet lt 1 gt transmitted lt Transmission pointer Header STX and terminator ETX are automatically added to the data being transmitted The data is transmitted to an external device When the F159 MTRN instruction is executed the transmission done flag R9039 goes off Duplex transmission is disabled while F159 MTRN is being executed The transmission done flag R9039 must be observed 1 28 7 5 6 Changing Communication Mode Using F159 MTRN Instruction An F159 MTRN instruction can be executed to change between general purpose serial communication mode and computer link mode To do so specify H8
333. utine But the output in the subroutine is cleared Indicates the start of the subroutine program Select interrupt enable disable or clear in 51 and 52 and execute Available X Not available Not available partially 1 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number of a subroutine program has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses 15 43 FP2SH FP10SH FPO FPOR mode FPX FP2SH FP10SH ee T Oo dm Special setting setting instructions Communica SYS1 Change the communication conditions tion condi tions setting for the or tool port based on the contents specified by the character constant Password Change the password specified by the setting PLC based on the contents specified by the character constant Interrupt Set the interrupt input based on the setting contents specified by the character constant PLC link time H Lomfsysi m J Set the system setting time when a PLC setting link is used based on the contents specified by the character constant MEWTOCOL Change the communication conditions of COM the COM port or tool port for response MEWTOCOL COM x control based on the contents specified by the character constant High speed Change the operation mode of the high counter speed counter based on the contents operation specified by the character constant x x Oo E gt mode cha
334. utput type output type Between npu terminals and output Over 100 lOver 100 MO terminals Between output terminals and output Over 100 MO terminals Between different commons Between pul terminals and power ground Over 100 lOver 100 MO terminals output temma s and Over 100 lOver 100 MO power ground terminals ground terminals and power Over 100 lOver 100 MO terminal 5 to 9 Hz Single amplitude of 3 5 mm 1 sweep min Vibration resistance 9 to 150 Hz Constant acceleration of 9 3 m s 1 sweep min 10 min on 3 axes Towards X Y amp Z directions Insulation resistance Test voltage 500 V DC Shock resistance 147 mis 4 times axes Towards X Y amp Z directions 1000 V P P with pulse width 50 ns 1us using a noise simulator y Power supply terminal Operating condition Must be free from corrosive gases and excessive dust Overvoltage category Category Il Pollution level Pollution level 2 Weight C10 100 g C14 105 g C16 85 g C32 115 g T32 115 g F32 120g 13 2 Unit s current consumption table Control unit current consumption This is the current consumed from the control unit power supply connector If expansion units or intelligent units are added the current is increased by the value indicated below Expansion unit current consumption This is the current consumed from
335. valent to DT60 and DT61 Increments DT50 DT51 sends a data read command sends a data 145 write command Execute F146 SEND instruction instruction Turns RO off Turns RO on Completion With the above program the procedures 1 to 3 are executed repeatedly 1 Updates the write data if the write data DT50 and DT51 and the read data DT60 and DT61 are matched 2 Writes the DT50 and DT51 of the local unit into the data and DT1 in the unit number 1 from the COM port RS232C port 3 Reads the DTO and DT1 in the unit number 1 into the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit from the COM port RS232C port 7 17 7 4 7 Setting in Compatiblity Mode with FPO FPO Compatibility Mode Setting Communication Parameters Confirm that the model of the programming tool is FPO Note Only the salve function is available in the FPO compatibility mode Usable communication ports on FPOR FPO compatibility mode Tool port USB port No communication parameter COM port RS232C port Tool port settings Dialog box of PLC system register setting Nn ATU Ura Nn Heit Commuricalion Heder Conor Connect fe Hor Connect 414 Daukste Setingr amp S 7 18200pn sno No 410 Unit number The unit number can be set within a range
336. value preset in S and stores the elapsed value in Left right shift LRSR Shifts one bit to the left or right with register D2 the area between D1 and D2 as 5 ada ajadjdjd d d the register Data rotate instructions 16 bit data right ROR D n Rotate the n bits in data of D to F121 16 bit data left ROL D n Rotate the n bits in data of D to 5 P121 rotate PROL the left 16 bit data right Rotate the bits in 17 bit area rotate with carry consisting of D plus the carry flag flag R9009 data R9009 data to the right F123 16 bit data left RCL D n Rotate the bits in 17 bit area P123 rotate with carry PRCL consisting of D plus the carry flag flag R9009 data R9009 data to the left 32 bit data right DROR D n Rotate the number of bits specified rotate PDROR by of the double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the right 32 bit data left DROL D n Rotate the number of bits specified rotate PDROL by of the double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the left 32 bit data right DRCR D n Rotate the number of bits specified rotate with carry PDRCR by of the double words data 32 flag R9009 data bits specified by D 1 D to the right together with carry flag R9009 data 32 bit data left DRCL D n Rotate the number of bits specified rotate with carry PDRC
337. vices In order to prevent a malfunction resulting in system shutdown choose the adequate safety measures listed in the following Interlock circuit When a motor clockwise counter clockwise operation is controlled provide an interlock circuit externally Emergency stop circuit Provide an emergency stop circuit to the PLC externally to turn off the power supply of the output device Start up sequence The PLC should be started after booting the I O device and mechanical power apparatus To keep this sequence the following measures are recommended Turn on the PLC with the mode selector set to the PROG mode and then switch to the RUN mode Program the PLC so as to disregard the inputs and outputs until the outside devices are energized Note In case of stopping the operation of the PLC also have the input output devices turned off after the PLC has stopped operating Grounding When installing the controller next to devices that generate high voltages from switching such as inverters do not ground them together Use an exclusive ground for each device 5 8 2 Momentary Power Failures Operation of momentary power failures If the duration of the power failure is less than 5 ms the FPOR continues to operate If the power is off for 5 ms or longer operation changes depending on the combination of units the power supply voltage and other factors In some cases operation may be the same as that for a power supply reset
338. w This makes the correspondence between a command and a response clear p same gt same _ 7 10 Commands to be used Command name Description Reads the on and off status of contancts Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Turns contacts on or off Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Read contact area Write contact area Read data area RD Reads the contents of a data area Writes data to a data area Reads the timer counter setting value Writes the timer counter setting value Reads the timer counter elapsed value Write data area Read timer counter set value area Write timer counter set value area Read timer counter elapsed value area RK Write timer counter Writes the timer counter elapsed value elapsed value area Registers the contact to be monitored Bde Registers the data to be monitored monitored Monitoring start Monitors a registered contact or data using MD and MC Preset contact area fill sc Embeds the area of a specified range in a 16 point on and off command pattern Preset data area fill Writes the same contents to the data area of a specified command range Read system register RR Reads the contents of a system register Write system register Specifies the contents of a system register Read the status of PLC RT Re
339. when grounding a plus terminal of the power Do not ground the FPOR function earth terminal when grounding a plus terminal of the pwer In some computers the SG terminal of RS232C port and connector shielding are connected In addition an FPOR tool port shielding and function earth terminal are connected Therefore the GND terminal of FPOR and the function earth terminal are connected if the computer is connected Especially when the FPOR is connected to a computer with a plus terminal grounded the GND terminal is in the state that the voltage of 24 V is applied As a result short circuit occurs which may lead to the breakage of FPOR and its neighboring parts if the GND terminal is connected to the earth terminal in that state 4 Funcation earth Grounding Grounding 5 3 Wiring of Input and Output 5 3 1 Input Wiring Connection of photoelectric sensor and proximity sensor Relay output type NPN open collector output type Sensor E m E circuit eo Power supply for input Power supply for input Power supply for sensor Voltage output type Two wire output type Sensor Sensor Internal circuit m a Power supply for input Power supply for input Precaution when using LED equipped reed switch When LED is connected in series to an input contact such as LED equipped reed switch make sure that the voltage applied to the PLC input terminal is greater
340. while the execution condition is on The target speed can be changed during the trapezoidal control The total number of pulses to be output will not change Also it is possible to perform the deceleration stop duirng the control There are two kinds of control methoda which are type 0 and type 1 When using the type 0 the speed can be changed regarding the initially specified target speed as the maximum value When using the type 1 the speed can be changed in a range up to the maximum frequency RO I DF 4 F1 DMV H10000000 DTO F1 DMV K1000 DT2 F1 DMV K7000 Pulses are output from YO at an initial speed of 1000 Hz a target speed of 7000 Hz an acceleration F1 DMV K450 076 time of 450 ms a deceleration time of 300 ms and a F1 DMV K300 DT8 movement amount of 100 000 pulses R1 F1 DMW K100000 DT10 L A DF 12171 SPDH DTO G Positioning data table 1 Control code lt H constant Control code 1 Trapezoidal control H L B LI i __ Incremental CW CCW 10 Fixed Initial speed 2 4000 Hz speed 7000 Hz Control assignment 0 Trapezoidal Acceleration time Type assignment s 0 TypeO 1 1 Deceleration time 3 300 ms 0 Fixed DT8 DT10 Target value 4 100 000 pulses Output assignment 0 Pulse output 1 Calculation only Pulse output diagram Operation mode assignment 0 Incremental Frequen
341. wise 5 6 Wiring of Molex Connector Type Supplied connector and suitable wires The connector listed below is supplied with the unit Use the suitable wires given below Also use the required pressure connection tools for connecting the wires Supplied connector Manufacturer Molex Japan model No 51067 0900 J Molex Co Ltd 50217 8100 Suitable wires Twisted wire Size 1 Cross sectiondlarea Insulation thickness AWG 24 18 0 2mm 0 75mm Dia 1 4 to dia 3 0 Pressure connection tool Manufactuer 7 Molex Japan model No Japan Molex Co Ltd 57189 5000 Wiring method 1 Remove a potion of the wire s insulation d mm 3 5 mm 2 Place the contact in the crimping tool place the wire in the contact tne lightly squeeze the tool 4 Whe rmoving the wire use a flat head screwdriver or other similar tool to pull up the hold down of the housing and then pull out the wire 5 7 Wiring of COM Port RS232C Port Terminal block Suitable wires A screw down connection type is used for the COM port RS232C port Use the suitable wires given below Lr Signal ground Receive data Input Send data Output Terminal block The communication connector manufactured by Phoenix Contact is used Phoenix Contact model No No of pins 3pns MKDS1 3 3 5 1751400 Suitable wires Twisted wire AWG 28 to 16 0 08mm to 1 2
342. y gt gt gt lt gt gt gt 5 RS232C a 5525 95 VA 16 units lax 16 units RS485 Unit no Unit numbers are the numbers to identify the different PLCs on the same network The same number must not be used for more than one PLC on the same network Ca Note When using the PC PLC link with the RS232C the number of units is 2 7 40 7 6 3 Setting Communication Parameters PC PLC Link Settings for baud rate and communication format The settings for baud rate and communication format of the COM RS232C port are entered using a programming tool Setting with FPWIN GR Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Click the COM Port tab Dialog box of PLC system register setting Configuration Untitlel Hald Non hold Action on Error Ma410 Unit Ma Ho tiS Communication Format Time Link 0 0 412 Comm Ekhar Bit Bits Link V D 1 past Controller input settings HSC mre Parity oud Controller output settings PLS Modem Enabled r Sier Bit Interrupt pulse catch settings Interrupt edge settings Terminator Time constant setting af CPU input Tool Port Header not exist No415 1520068 71 Starting address for data recen ed of DT D taai senal data communicstion mode Bultfercapacity setting for data ot 2048 0
343. y in the internal RAM I NN Stops Spice contact Vu dealer 23 cd Es RAM EM errora __ E25 errors _ error5 A Master memory The models of master memories are different E25 model Stops Use the master memories created with the same model error FP e FPO FPOR FP X C14 C16 Probably a hardware abnormality Please contact your dealer When the master memory cassette is mounted the master memor cassette may be damaged Remove the master memory and check whether the ERROR turns off When the ERROR turned off rewrite the master memory as its contents are damaged and use it again When the ERROR does not turn off please d 2 Stops contact your dealer 1 24 640 56 72 FP M Probably an abnormality in the memory unit Program the memory unit again and try to operate If the same error is detected try to operate with another memory unit FP2 FP2SH FP10SH and There may be a problem with the installed ROM ROM is not installed ROM contens are damaged Program size stored on the ROM is larger than the capacity of the ROM Check the contents of the ROM Unit Units installed exceed the limitations i e 4 or E27 installation Stops 71079 URS Turn off the power and re configure units error referring to the hardware manual System 2 abnormality in the system gister S
344. ype O if a value larger than the target speed at start up is specified it will be corrected to the target speed at start up With the type 1 if the target value is set to a value larger than 50kHz it will be corrected to 50kHz 2 If the elapsed value crosses over the acceleration forbidden area starting position during accelerating acceleration cannot be performed For information on the acceleration forbidden area starting position check with the special registers from DT90400 3 For deceleration the speed cannot be lower than the deceleration minimum speed For information on the deceleration minimum speed check with the special registers from DT90400 Explanation of pulse output operation Pulses are output using a duty of 25 fixedly When outputting with the PULSE SIGN method pulses will be output approx 300ys later after the output of direction signal The characteristics of a motor driver is considered 8 26 Operaiton mode of trapezoidal control There are two operation modes for the FPOR trapezoidal control which are type 0 and type 1 Those operation specifications vary when the target speed is changed during the trapezoidal control For changing the target speed the execution condition trigger should be on during the trapezoidal control Also it is possible for the both types to perform the deceleration stop control Type 0 The speed can be changed regarding the initially specified target speed as the maximum val

User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents